This document is a general brochure from 2011 for Ninz S.p.A., an Italian manufacturer of fire doors, multipurpose doors, gates, and related accessories. It provides an overview of the company's history, facilities, production capabilities, research and design processes, certifications, and markets served. Key points include Ninz having a 70% market share in Italy for fire doors, manufacturing taking place in two facilities in Italy, daily production capacity of 2000 doors, and distribution throughout Europe and other international markets.

1. General brochure 2011
“more than firedoors“
www.ninz.it

3. Main index NINZ
COMPANY PRESENTATION 2-3
FIRE DOORS Univer and Proget 4 - 33
MULTIPURPOSE DOORS Rever, Univer and Proget 34 - 79
PAINTING AND NDD DECORATIONS 80 - 87
DOOR ACCESSORIES devices and panic bars 88 - 149
GATES – sliding, telescopic, vertically sliding and hinged 150 - 199
GLAZINGS, windows, glazed doors and accessories 200 - 243
Each of the above chapters is also accessible online www.ninz.it
1

4. NINZ Fire doors
Company presentation
PRESENTATION - THE RELIABILITY OF EXPERIENCE
COMPANY
Ninz S.p.A. is Italy’s leading producer of fire doors with a
70% market share. Consolidated experience in the sector,
familiarity with standards and optimal quality-price ratios
are the company’s most distinguishing features. Over the
years it has broadened its offer to include multipurpose
metal doors and a wide range of accessories. In addition
to Italy, Ninz S.p.A. also markets its products in numerous
other European countries like France, Greece, Portugal,
Romania, Spain, Slovenia... and countries outside of Eu-
rope like Turkey, Russia and Panama.
Production takes place in two different facilities - Bolzano
and Ala (TN), where the offices for research and develop-
ment, sales and logistics are also located. In Ala a third
facility is currently under construction designed to further
enhance production capacity.
From its beginnings as a small family-owned metal works
company in 1953, over the years the company has evolved to
become a major industrial player with 250 employees. The
main impetus for growth came from its owner, Karl Ninz,
who first introduced the production of fire doors in 1976.
PRODUCTION - VERSATILITY AND DESIGN
The daily production capacity is 2000 doors, which are
currently divided into the PROGET line (fire rated and
multipurpose), the UNIVER line (fire rated and multipur-
pose) and REVER line (multipurpose). Products are made
to order for even the smallest quantities, satisfying the
most demanding customers thanks to the wide variety of
colors, accessories and windows available.
Customization of the product reaches a pinnacle with the
NDD technology (Ninz Digital Decor), a trademark, NINZ
decorative painting which permits any theme (words, pic-
tures, logos) to be reproduced on the door-leaf surface.
As an expression of the NDD claim, fire doors are trans-
formed into versatile design elements at the disposal of
architects and designers.
This project earned the company the prestigious “Design
Security & Safety Award” in 2007
2

5. NINZ Fire doors
Company presentation
DESIGN AND RESEARCH - EYES ON THE FUTURE
COMPANY
Continuous product improvements are managed by a team
of expert engineers and technicians, who combine scrupu-
lous attention to fire regulations with the practical con-
cerns of builders, installers and locksmiths. This research,
for instance, has generated certified installation methods
for mounting fire doors on different types of support
structures, such as masonry, plasterboard and sub-frames.
Thanks to the in-depth study of foreign standards, Ninz
S.p.A. has also succeeded in certifying its products in a
number of foreign countries, including France, Slovenia,
Russia, Romania...
For long the company has been preparing itself for the
marking’s coming into force by designing and developing
innovative fire doors that meet the new European stand-
ards. The product represents a new conceptualization dif-
ferent from all that has been in terms of aesthetics as well
as functionality, promising excellent performance in every
possible setting.
MARKETING - A SERVICE-ORIENTED PERSPECTIVE
Thanks to their reliability and quality, Ninz fire doors are
used throughout Italy and in many countries across the
world in public buildings where safety is at a premium:
schools, hospitals, convention centers, shopping malls,
manufacturing sites, hotels, museums...
The distribution within Italy is capillary thanks to a dense
network of retailers supported by over one hundred sales
agents.
Punctual delivery - one of the company’s strongest points
- is guaranteed by the careful planning of the production
and by the quality transport services, which are both or-
ganized in-house.
The service that Ninz S.p.A. offers its customers is com-
pleted by the internal technical-sales office, which assists
agents and customers in the pre- and post-sales phases,
and by the fitting office, which directly follows product
installations at the customer’s request.
For international distribution, Ninz S.p.A. draws on (de-
pending on the country) agents, exclusive retailers and
networks of retailers supported by a dedicated internal
technical-sales office.
Daily shipment to France is possible thanks to the special
wooden-crates packaging and the local logistics network
that has been created. Due to its great success, this service
will soon be extended to other European countries.
3

6. “state of the art in fire
protection technology“

7. UNIVER NINZ Doors
FIRE RATED VERSION
FEATURES 6-9
SPECIFIC OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 10 - 11
DOOR CROSS SECTIONS - MEASUREMENTS 12
INSTALLATION METHODS 13
ORDER MEASUREMENTS 14
OPENING MEASUREMENTS - ENCUMBRANCE 15
All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced technical changes to the contents of this brochure.
Fire-rated closures are typically used for internal compartmentalization and have been designed for this purpose.

8. Features
UNIVER Fire doors
WHAT MAKES THEM SPECIAL? One-leaved doors available in the following classes:
fire door
UNIVER
EI230 EI230 260 - Sm -2C5 30 30 290 REI 60 60
EI 260
EI EI 60 290
REI REI EI
EI REI REI 90
RE
“Quality first”
-- Fully galvanized door, including the “hidden” parts
-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal
-- Corrosion protection also provided along cut edges of
the metal sheets
-- Painted with epoxy-polyester thermoset powders in a
180 degrees (Celsius) oven
-- Substantial paint layer (70 microns plus)
-- Optimal corrosion resistance demonstrated by 500 hour
salt-fog test
-- Unaffected by severe climate changes, demonstrated by
2000 hours with +60° to -10° cycles at 75% humidity
-- Finishing with high-quality aesthetics
-- Orange skin anti-scratch structured paint
-- Customizable with wide selection of RAL colors
“Practicality of use”
-- Door reversibility*
-- Indication of door opening direction not necessary
-- Reduction of stock for retailers
-- Simplifies choices for end customers
-- Multiple installation methods for each door
-- Type approvals for anchors for mortar fixing or expan-
sion screws
“Conformity to standards”
-- In-house Ninz R&D with specialized testing equipment
-- Fire testing in accordance with UNI 9723 and EN 1634-1
-- Mechanical testing for the marking of accessories
-- -marked door accessories studied and sized to meet
standard European requirements Two-leaved doors available in the following classes:
-- Careful selection of materials and manufacturing methods
-- Strict product testing for conformity to declared technical EI230 260 - Sm -2C5 30 30 290 REI 60 60
EI EI 60 REI EI
REI REI REI 90 90
REI
standards
-- Absolute functional certainty over time
-- Doors “type approved” in compliance with M.D. 21
June 2004
-- Products delivered with the documentation required by
current regulations
“Manufacturing technology”
-- Manufacturing in modern and functional facilities
which employ the latest technologies to maintain high
quality levels and product uniformity
-- The entire production process - from raw materials to
painted and packaged products - takes place inside
Ninz’s own facilities, ensuring a 360 degree door control
Left Left RightRight Left Left RightRight
*except in combination with certain optional accessories
NOTE
The colors represented in the photos are not standard.
6

9. Features
UNIVER Fire doors
STANDARD ELEMENTS FOR VERSIONS EI230 -
fire door
UNIVER
EI260, EI290 - REI 60 - REI 120
which comprise comprise Univer fire doors:
Door leaf
-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet
metal, press folded and electro welded
-- Perimetral rebate on 4 sides
-- Internally reinforced with hot-galvanized steel profiles
-- Heat-insulated with treated mineral wool
-- Internal stiffeners for overhead door closer and panic bar
-- 50 or 60 mm thickness, depending on fire rating
Doorframe
-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal
-- Grooves for thermo expansive sealing and rebate sealing
-- Suitable for anchors for mortar fixing or expansion screws
-- Detachable rebate for application on finished flooring
-- Removable threshold for thresholdless installation
-- Strike plates in PA6 black nylon for lock bolt and safety bolts
-- Assembled doorframes for one-leaved doors
-- Assembly required for two-leaved doorframes
Thermo expansive sealing
-- Mounted on vertical doorframe profiles and central ver-
tical profiles on two-leaved doors
-- For on-site mounting on the doorframe’s upper cross-beam
-- Mounted above and below the EI290 and REI 120 leaves
Hinges
-- Nr. 2 three-wing hinges for each leaf
-- of which one ball-bearing hinge with screws for vertical
adjustment of the leaf, marked as per EN 1935, clas-
sified for up to 160 kg load, 200.000 cycles durability,
suitable for fire door use
-- and one hinge with self-closing spring
Safety bolts
-- Nr. 2 safety bolts on hinge side leaf edge
Locking mechanism
-- Reversible locking mechanism with bolt and central lock
-- marked in conformity with EN 12209 standard
-- Insert with patent key, Euro profile cylinder ready
Handle
-- Fire rated handle in black PA6 nylon with steel core
-- Steel installation plate with cylinder hole
-- Backplate in black PA6 nylon
-- Fastener screws and patent key insert
NOTE
Cylinder and rebate sealing provided on request only.
The handle requires assembly.
7

10. Features
UNIVER Fire doors
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
fire door
UNIVER
which are part of the Univer fire doors:
Closing regulator
-- Two-leaved doors include an RC/STD closing regulator to
ensure the correct closing sequence of the leaves
-- marking in conformity with EN 1158 standard
Locking mechanism for secondary leaf
-- “Flush-bolt” automatic locking of the secondary leaf
-- Lever control for unlocking
Upper coupling system for the secondary leaf
-- Secondary leaf lock activated device which inserts rod
into the upper strike box
-- Upper strike box in black PA6 nylon with steel roller
Lower coupling system for the secondary leaf
-- Vertical rod with steel point which inserts into lower
strike box
-- Floor catch (floor-mounted floor catch) made of self-
extinguishing black nylon, for doors without threshold
-- Floor catch in self-extinguishing black nylon with a steel
roller, for doors with threshold
Identification plate
-- Metal tag with door identification data, in accordance
with current regulations
Finishing
-- Standard painted with epoxy-polyester thermoset pow-
ders in a 180 degrees oven, orange skin, anti-scratch
finishing
-- Standard pastel turquoise color, lighter tone for the leaf
(NCS4020-B50G), darker tone for the frame (NCS5020-B50G)
Standard packaging
-- Single door wrapped into stretchable polyethylene (PE) film
-- Assembled doorframes for one-leaved doors
-- Assembly required for doorframes for two-leaved doors
-- Palletized on wooden pallets
Door weight kg/m2 of wall opening
class 1 leaf 2 leaves
EI230 34 -
EI260 36 35
REI 60 34 33
EI290, REI 120 43 41
NOTE
If the door ever needs to be repainted, follow the precise instructions
on the „painting“ page.
The closing regulator requires assembly.
8

11. Features
UNIVER Fire doors
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
fire door
UNIVER
A wide variety of accessories and surface finishes are available
on request for maximum value enhancement of Univer doors to
your own specific needs.
The proper accessories can help resolve:
Safety-related needs
-- Doors for panic exits (see panic bars)
-- Doors for emergency exits (see emergency exit handles)
-- Open doors which must be closed in case of fire (see leaf
holding systems)
Installation and utilization needs
-- Frame extensions
-- Drip steel-profile
-- Special fastener screws
-- Kick and protection plates
-- Windows
Access-related control issues
-- Electrically-activated lock mechanisms
-- Electric handle mechanisms
-- Magnetic blocking mechanisms
Performance enhancing
-- Sealing
-- Cylinders
-- Door closers
-- Special closing regulators
-- Special handles
Customized finishing
-- Select paint colors from a wide variety of RAL tints
-- NDD – Ninz Digital Decor, graphic images applied with
special ink jets and protected by a transparent topcoat.
Infinite varieties of customizable decorations in harmony
with specific door settings
-- Stainless steel handles
-- Colored handles
Packaging for maximum protection
Sturdy wooden crates protect all doors and related ac-
cessories
-- NDD decorated doors
-- Construction sites
-- Shipping abroad
-- Special transport
NOTE The following optional accessories make Univer doors irreversible, requir-
Details on the optional accessories may be found in the following chap- ing the indication of the door opening direction when the order is placed:
ters of this brochure: - SLASH panic bar
- Finishing - Panic bar for secondary leaves
- Accessories for metal doors - Windows
- Panic bars - MAC lock
Right-opening doors are the default selection if opening direction is - ELM/cisa and ELM/mt electric handle
not specified. - Special locks (016 tir- Stel 15)
9

12. Specific optional accessories
UNIVER Fire doors
WINDOW WITH FIRE RATED GLASS
fire door
UNIVER
Upon request all one- and two-leaved fire doors, exclud-
ing those EI230 rated, may be equipped with round or
rectangular windows with fire rated stratified glass and
window frames. Windows not possible for one-leaved REI
doors with FM L (wall opening) above 1167mm.
Limits prescribed by standard
According to standards UNI 9723 and EN 1634-1, windows
may be smaller but not larger than the test sample size,
and the reverse holds true for the border strip around the
window which may be wider but not thinner.
The following limits correspond with these restrictions.
Borders, window position
“Border measurement” refers to the distance from the
edge of the window to the wall opening of the door.
Elevation for round windows
window size FM H position
Ø 300 minimum 2050 Y=1600
Ø 300 less than 2050 Y=FM H - 450
Round window cross section
Ø 400 minimum 2150 Y=1600
Ø 400 from 2050 to 2149 Y=1550 54 17
Ø 400 less than 2050 Y=FM H - 500
Elevation for rectangular windows
window dimensions L x H FM H position
250/300 x 400 minimum 2150 Z=1450
250/300 x 400 from 2050 to 2149 Z=1350 Border Window Ø Border
250/300 x 400 less than 2050 Z=FM H -700
Rectangular window cross section
b
b
50 15
a a
Y
Z
Border Window LxH Border
Window min. border min. border dimensions
dimensions EI2 REI FM L min.
a b a b
Ø 300 740
Window thickness
220 300 220 300 EI260, REI 60 21 mm EI290 37 mm REI 120 53 mm
Ø 400 840
Ø 300 L1 740 + L2 min.
220 300 220 300 NOTE
Ø 400 L1 840 + L2 min.
The positions indicated above are standard.
Different positions may be considered as long as they respect the mini-
Ø 300 L1 740 + L2 740
220 300 220 300 mum “a” and “b” border strips. The window itself may not be supplied
Ø 400 L1 840 + L2 840
separately except for replacements. It is always advisable for doors with
windows to be equipped with door closers for controlled closing.
250 x 400 EI2=750 REI=850
250 300 300 300
300 x 400 EI2=800 REI=900 ATTENTION
REI windows become opaque on exposure to temperatures of 40 de-
250 x 400
300 300 300 300
L1 850 + L2 min. grees or higher, or when installed outside and exposed to UV radia-
300 x 400 L1 900 + L2 min. tion. Minor aesthetic imperfections or tiny air bubbles do not compro-
mise the fire resistance of the glass, and do not constitute grounds for
250 x 400 L1 850 + L2 850 claims. For special instructions and recommendations for fire windows,
300 300 300 300
300 x 400 L1 900 + L2 900 see the “Notices” reported on the last page of the window accessories
section of the present brochure.
10

13. Specific optional accessories
UNIVER Fire doors
FRAME EXTENSIONS FOR UNIVER DOORS
fire door
UNIVER
IM 11 - IM 12
Frame extensions to be mounted in addition to the Univer Doorframe
frame acting as a wall cladding. Made of “Sendzimir” proc- opening
essed hot-galvanized sheet metal and painted the same
color as the doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders. Pro- Wall opening
file on three sides, upper corners with 45 degree joint, fixing
with screws and plugs (screws and plugs not included).
73
IM 11: for 50mm door thickness, for installation on 70mm (min.) wall
thickness
IM 12: for 60mm door thickness, for installation on 80mm (min.) wall
thickness
IM 13 - IM 14
Telescopic frame extension to be screwed to the Univer
doorframe acting as a wall cladding. Consists of two overlap-
ping profiles with a 25mm adjustable range. Made of “Send- Doorframe
zimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal painted the opening
same color as the doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders.
Profile on three sides, upper corners with 90 degree joint.
Wall opening
Complete with fastener screws. To mount the frame exten-
sion, fixing holes need to be drilled into doorframe on site.
Combine with sealing to conceal the screw heads. 50
IM 13: for 50mm door thickness, for installation on 125mm (min.) wall
thickness
IM 14: for 60mm door thickness, for installation on 135mm (min.) wall
thickness
REBATE SEALING
FF/CR sealing (for EI2 doors) and FF sealing (for REI doors)
in black extruded profile to be pressed into the dedicated
groove in the perimetral frame.
FF sealing in black extruded profile self-adhesive for ap-
plication to the central joint of two-leaved doors.
NOTE
Upon request sealing supplied for single doors to be cut and mounted
on site.
ENHANCED PERFORMANCE (Sm, C5)
Mandatory accessories
Enhanced performance features type mandatory optional acc. reference in brochure
- rubber seal FF/CR UNIVER fire door
1 leaf
- Nr. 1 automatic door sweep ACCESSORIES
EI260-Sm Smoke control Door
- rubber seal FF/CR UNIVER fire door
2 leaves
- Nr. 2 automatic door sweep ACCESSORIES
1 leaf - Nr. 1 door closer ACCESSORIES
EI260-C5 Durability: 200,000 cycles
2 leaves - Nr. 2 door closers ACCESSORIES
11

14. Door cross sections - Measurements
UNIVER Fire doors
One-leaved doors Doors without lower threshold
fire door
UNIVER
Horizontal cross section Vertical cross section
Doorframe opening = FM L -74
Exterior doorframe = FM H +13
Doorframe opening = FM H -40
+15
Wall opening FM H +5
+20
Wall opening FM L +10
Exterior doorframe = FM L +32
FFL
Doors with internal and external lower thresholds Doors with internal lower threshold
Vertical cross section Vertical cross section
Exterior doorframe = FM H +34
Exterior doorframe = FM H +13
+15
Doorframe opening
Wall opening FM H +5
+15
Wall opening FM H +5
= FM H -72
Doorframe opening
= FM H -72
FFL
FFL
32
Two-leaved doors
Horizontal section
Doorframe opening = FM L - 80
Active leaf opening = L1 -75
L2 L1
+20
Wall opening FM L +10 = L1+ L2
Exterior doorframe = FM L +26
NOTE +20 +15
Leaf thickness The tolerances FM L +10 , FM H +5 of the indicated measurements
class thickness make it easier to fill the gap between the wall and the doorframe with
EI230, REI 60 50 mm cement mortar.
EI260, EI290, REI 120 60 mm
FFL = Finished floor level
12

15. Installation methods
UNIVER Fire doors
INSTALLATION WITH ANCHORS FOR MORTAR FIXING ANCHOR POSITIONING
fire door
UNIVER
One-leaved doors
Right opening Left opening
For mortar fixing, appropriate cuts will need to be created in
the walls (section 80 x 200 mm). The anchors should be bent
and blocked inside the wall. For fire sealing purposes and
mechanical hold, the space between the doorframe and the
masonry should always be filled with concrete mortar.
Two-leaved doors
Right opening
INSTALLATION FOR EXPANSION SCREWS FIXING
For the installation with expansion screws, the anchors
serve as spacers and should not be bent. Using Würth
type art. 0910436112 plugs or similar (supplied at the
customer‘s expense), installation requires holes to be
Left opening
drilled through the thermo expansive sealing. The door-
frame has pre-drilled holes. For fire sealing purposes and
mechanical hold, the space between the doorframe and
the masonry should always be filled with concrete mortar.
NOTE
Proper installation requires 80 x 200 mm holes to be dug into the
masonry.
13

16. Order measurements
UNIVER Fire doors
ORDER MEASUREMENTS
fire door
UNIVER
Wall opening Doorframe opening
One-leaved doors Two-leaved doors
PT L = FM L - 74 PT L = FM L - 80
PT H = FM H - 40 PT H = FM H - 40
NOTE
Buyers should be aware that pursuant to and in accordance with Leg-
islative Decree dd. 19.09.1994 Nr. 626, resp. of Legislative Decree dd.
19.03.1996 Nr. 242, all doors used for emergency exits must have a
minimum height of 2000 mm (= nominal wall opening 2040 mm). Unless
specified otherwise by the customer, two-leaved standard, semi-standard
and customized doors are supplied with a right-pull opening direction.
One-leaved EI230, EI260, EI290 doors One-leaved REI 60, REI 120 doors
FM L x FM H PT L x PT H FM L x FM H PT L x PT H
standard dimensions doorframe opening standard dimensions doorframe opening
800 x 2050 / 2150 726 x 2010 / 2110 800 x 2050 / 2150 726 x 2010 / 2110
900 x 2050 / 2150 826 x 2010 / 2110 900 x 2050 / 2150 826 x 2010 / 2110
1000 x 2050 / 2150 926 x 2010 / 2110 1000 x 2050 / 2150 926 x 2010 / 2110
1100 x 2050 / 2150 1026 x 2010 / 2110 1100 x 2050 / 2150 1026 x 2010 / 2110
1200 x 2050 / 2150 1126 x 2010 / 2110
semi-standard dimensions 1350 x 2050 / 2150 1276 x 2010 / 2110
from 540 from 466
x 2050 / 2150 x 2010 / 2110
to 1150 to 1076 semi-standard dimensions
from 540 from 466
non-standard dimensions x 2050 / 2150 x 2010 / 2110
to 1345 to 1271
from 540 from 1780 from 466 from 1740
x x non-standard dimensions
to 1150 to 2150 to 1076 to 2110
from 540 from 1780 from 466 from 1740
x x
to 1330 to 2150 to 1256 to 2110
from 1331 from 1938 from 1257 from 1898
x x
to 1350 to 2150 to 1276 to 2110
Two-leaved EI260, EI290 doors Two-leaved REI 60, REI 120 doors
FM L (L1+L2) x FM H PT L x PT H FM L (L1+L2) x FM H PT L x PT H
standard dimensions doorframe opening standard dimensions doorframe opening
1200 ( 600 + 600) x 2050 / 2150 1120 x 2010 / 2110 1150 ( 750 + 400 ) x 2050 / 2150 1070 x 2010 / 2110
1200 ( 700 + 500) x 2050 / 2150 1120 x 2010 / 2110 1200 ( 800 + 400 ) x 2050 / 2150 1120 x 2010 / 2110
1300 ( 650 + 650) x 2050 / 2150 1220 x 2010 / 2110 1250 ( 800 + 450 ) x 2050 / 2150 1170 x 2010 / 2110
1300 ( 800 + 500) x 2050 / 2150 1220 x 2010 / 2110 1300 ( 900 + 400 ) x 2050 / 2150 1220 x 2010 / 2110
1400 ( 700 + 700) x 2050 / 2150 1320 x 2010 / 2110 1350 ( 900 + 450 ) x 2050 / 2150 1270 x 2010 / 2110
1400 ( 900 + 500) x 2050 / 2150 1320 x 2010 / 2110 1400 (1000 + 400 ) x 2050 / 2150 1320 x 2010 / 2110
1500 ( 750 + 750) x 2050 / 2150 1420 x 2010 / 2110 1450 (1000 + 450 ) x 2050 / 2150 1370 x 2010 / 2110
1600 ( 800 + 800) x 2050 / 2150 1520 x 2010 / 2110 1600 ( 800 + 800 ) x 2050 / 2150 1520 x 2010 / 2110
1700 ( 900 + 800) x 2050 / 2150 1620 x 2010 / 2110 1700 ( 900 + 800 ) x 2050 / 2150 1620 x 2010 / 2110
1800 ( 900 + 900) x 2050 / 2150 1720 x 2010 / 2110 1800 ( 900 + 900 ) x 2050 / 2150 1720 x 2010 / 2110
1900 (1000 + 900) x 2050 / 2150 1820 x 2010 / 2110 1900 (1000 + 900) x 2050 / 2150 1820 x 2010 / 2110
2000 (1000 +1000) x 2050 / 2150 1920 x 2010 / 2110 2000 (1000 +1000) x 2050 / 2150 1920 x 2010 / 2110
semi-standard dimensions semi-standard dimensions
from 1000 (500+500) from 920 from 940 (540+400) from 860
x 2050 / 2150 x 2010 / 2110 x 2050 / 2150 x 2010 / 2110
to 2000 (1000+1000) to 1920 to 2000 (1000+1000) to 1920
non-standard dimensions non-standard dimensions
from 1000 (500+500) from 1780 from 920 from 1740 from 940 (540+400) from 1780 from 860 from 1740
x x x x
to 2000 (1000+1000) to 2150 to 1920 to 2110 to 2000 (1000+1000) to 2150 to 1920 to 2110
14

17. Opening measurements - Encumbrances
UNIVER Fire doors
OPENING MEASUREMENT AND ENCUMBRANCE
fire door
UNIVER
WITH 90 DEGREE OPENING
One-leaved doors with panic bar Two-leaved doors with panic bars
Net passage calculation EI230 - REI 60 REI 60 EI260 - EI290 - REI 120 EI260 - EI290 - REI 120
panic bar type protrusion one-leaved doors two-leaved doors one-leaved doors two-leaved doors
EXUS 125 FML - 226 FML - 384 FML - 236 FML - 404
TWIST 100 FML - 201 FML - 334 FML - 211 FML - 354
SLASH 75 FML - 176 FML - 284 FML - 186 FML - 304
TOUCHBAR 74 FML - 175 FML - 282 FML - 185 FML - 302
z = leaf protrusion L1 + 35 L1 + 35
FML + 29 FML + 29
relative to the wall L2 + 64 L2 + 64
ENCUMBRANCE WITH 180 DEGREE OPENING -
HANDLE HEIGHT
Two-leaved doors
One-leaved doors x = L1 + 5 y = L2 + 35
x = FML + 5 h handle = FMH/2 + 50
h handle = FMH/2 + 50 b = 130 (only in the presence of panic bars or M14 handles)
NOTE
The 90 or 180 degree opening of the leaf could be compromised if
handle or door closer protrusions come into contact with the wall.
UNIVER - GENERAL NOTES
All rights reserved. Installation should be executed by qualified technicians.
No reproduction (partial or total) without prior authorization by Ninz. Modifications may only be made as indicated in the installation instruc-
Ninz reserves the right to modify the product. tions. Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.
15

18. “fire protection excellence,
flexibility custom-made“

19. PROGET NINZ Doors
FIRE RATED VERSION
FEATURES 18 - 21
SPECIFIC OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 22 - 25
DOOR CROSS SECTIONS - MEASUREMENTS 26
INSTALLATION METHODS 27
OPTIONAL INSTALLATION METHODS 28
DRY WALL INSTALLATION 29 - 30
ORDER MEASUREMENTS - HANDLE HEIGHTS 31 - 32
OPENING MEASUREMENTS - ENCUMBRANCE 33
All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced technical changes to the contents of this brochure.
Fire-rated closures are typically used for internal compartmentalization and have been designed for this purpose.

20. Features
PROGET Fire doors
THE FIRE DOOR IN A CLASS OF ITS OWN One-leaved doors available in the following classes:
fire doors
PROGET
REI 30 30
REI REI 60 60
REI REI 90 90
REI
“Indisputable quality”
-- Especially sturdy door for safe functioning over time
-- Ideal for application to uneven or weak walls
-- Fully isolated frame for true “dry wall installation”
-- Built to order for all kinds of requests
-- Fully galvanized door, including the “hidden” parts
-- Made of hot-galvanized sheet metal, “Sendzimir” proc-
essed
-- Corrosion protection also provided along cut edges of
the metal sheets
-- Painted with epoxy-polyester thermoset powders in a
180 degrees (Celsius) oven
-- Substantial paint layer (70 microns plus)
-- Optimal corrosion resistance demonstrated by 500 hour
salt-fog test
-- Unaffected by severe climate changes, demonstrated by
2000 hours with +60° to -10° cycles at 75% humidity
-- Finishing with high-quality aesthetics
-- Orange skin anti-scratch structured paint
-- Customizable with wide selection of RAL colors
-- “Practicality of use”
-- Truly sturdy frame that facilitates anchoring to the wall
-- Suitable for all wall types
-- Different installation methods to choose from
-- Significantly reduced installation times
-- Type approvals for multiple installations to different
wall types
-- Ample size range
-- Wide variety of accessories
Two-leaved doors available in the following classes:
“Conformity to standards”
-- In-house Ninz R&D with specialized testing equipment REI 30
REI 30 REI 60 60
REI REI 90 90
REI
-- Fire testing in accordance with UNI 9723 and EN 1634-1
-- Mechanical testing for the marking of accessories
-- marked door accessories studied and sized to meet
standard European requirements
-- Careful selection of materials and manufacturing methods
-- Strict product testing for conformity to declared techni-
cal standards
-- Absolute functional certainty over time
-- Doors “type approved” in compliance with M.D. 21
June 2004
-- Products delivered with the documentation required by
current regulations
“Manufacturing technology”
-- Manufacturing in modern and functional facilities
which employ the latest technologies to maintain high
quality levels and product uniformity
-- The entire production process - from raw materials to
painted and packaged products - takes place inside
Ninz’s own facilities, ensuring a 360 degree door control
Opening direction
Opening direction needs to be indicated while ordering
Left Left Right
Right Left Left Right
Right
NOTE
The colors represented in the photos are not standard.
Door closer provided upon request only.
18

21. Features
PROGET Fire doors
STANDARD ELEMENTS
fire doors
PROGET
which comprise Proget fire doors:
Door leaf
-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet
metal, press folded and electro welded
-- Perimetral rebate on 3 sides, flat at the bottom
-- Internally reinforced with hot-galvanized steel profiles
-- Heat-insulated treated mineral wool packing that is rig-
idly joined to the sheet metal
-- Internal stiffeners for overhead door closer and panic bar
-- Single thickness of 60 mm
Standard frame
-- Sturdy profile with a sizeable cross section
-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet
metal
-- Equipped with special assembly brackets
-- Grooves for thermo expansive sealing and rebate sealing
-- Standard installation via anchors for mortar fixing
-- Upon request installation via expansion screws or screws
onto the subframe
-- Lower spacer, mounting template
-- Rests on finished flooring without rebate
-- Strike plates in PA6 black nylon for lock bolt and safety bolts
-- Assembly required for doorframes
Thermo expansive sealing
-- Mounted on vertical doorframe profiles and central ver-
tical profiles (for two-leaved doors)
-- Mounted above and below the leaves depending on the
certification
Hinges
-- Nr. 2 three-wing hinges for each leaf
-- of which one ball-bearing hinge with screws for vertical
adjustment of the leaf, marked as per EN 1935, classi-
fied for up to 160 kg load, 200.000 cycles durability, suit-
able for fire door use
-- and one hinge with self-closing spring
Safety bolts
- Nr. 1 or 2 safety bolts applied on hinge side leaf edge
Locking mechanism
-- Reversible locking mechanism with bolt and central latch
-- marked in conformity with EN 12209 standard
-- Insert with patent key, Euro profile cylinder ready
Handle
- Fire rated handle in black PA6 nylon with steel core
- Steel installation plate with cylinder hole
- Backplate in black PA6 nylon
- Fastener screws and patent key insert
NOTE
Cylinder and rebate sealing provided on request only.
The handle requires assembly.
19

22. Features
PROGET Fire doors
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
fire doors
PROGET
which comprise Proget fire doors:
Closing regulator
-- Standard two-leaved doors include an RC/STD Closing
regulator to ensure the correct closing sequence of the
leaves
-- marking in conformity with EN 1158 standard
Locking mechanism for secondary leaf
-- “Flush-bolt” automatic locking of the secondary leaf
-- Lever control for unlocking
Upper coupling system for the secondary leaf
-- Secondary leaf lock activated device which inserts rod
into the upper strike box
-- Upper strike box in pierced steel with steel roller
Lower coupling system for the secondary leaf
-- Vertical rod with steel point which inserts into lower
strike box
-- Lower floor catch (floor-mounted bushing) made of
self-extinguishing black nylon with rebate stopper
Identification plate
-- Metal tag with door identification data, in accordance
with current regulations
Finishing
-- Standard painted with epoxy-polyester thermoset pow-
ders in a 180 degrees oven, orange skin, anti-scratch
finishing
-- Standard pastel turquoise color, lighter tone for the leaf
(NCS4020-B50G), darker tone for the frame (NCS5020-
B50G)
Standard packaging
-- Single leaf wrapped into stretchable polyethylene (PE)
film
-- Single packaging for each doorframe with stretchable
polyethylene (PE) film
-- Palletized on wooden pallets
Door weight class kg/m2 of wall opening
1 leaf REI 60 37
2 leaves REI 60 35
1 leaf REI 120 42
2 leaves REI 120 40
NOTE
If the door ever needs to be repainted, follow the precise instructions
on the “painting” page.
20

23. Features
PROGET Fire doors
INSTALLATION ONTO OTHER WALL TYPES
fire doors
PROGET
Other types of installation are possible, all of which have been
rigorously certified and approved
-- Frame for dry wall installation with expansion screws
-- Frame for dry wall installation with screws onto the subframe
-- Frame for installation on plasterboard
-- Embracing frame for plasterboard installation
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
A wide variety of accessories and surface finishes are available
on request for maximum value enhancement of Proget doors to
your own specific needs. The proper accessories can help resolve:
Safety-related needs
-- Doors for panic exits (see panic bars)
-- Doors for emergency exits (see emergency exit handles)
-- Open doors which must be closed in case of fire (see leaf
holding systems)
Installation and utilization needs
-- Frame extensions
-- Floor mounted floor catch in galvanized steel
-- Drip steel-profile
-- Special fastener screws
-- Kick and protection plates
-- Rectangular windows, standard dimensions or built to order
-- Round windows
Access-related control issues
-- Electrically-activated lock mechanisms
-- Electric handle mechanisms
-- Magnetic blocking mechanisms
Performance enhancing
-- Sealing
-- Cylinders
-- Door closers
-- Special closing regulators
-- Special handles
Customized finishing
-- Select paint colors from a wide variety of RAL tints
-- NDD – Ninz Digital Decor, graphic images applied with
special ink jets and protected by a transparent topcoat.
Infinite varieties of customizable decorations in harmo-
ny with specific door settings
-- Stainless steel handles
-- Colored handles
Packaging for maximum protection
Sturdy wooden crates protect all doors and related acces-
sories
-- NDD decorated doors
-- Construction sites
-- Shipping abroad
-- Special transport
NOTE
Details on the optional accessories may be found in the following chap-
ters of this brochure:
- Finishing
- Accessories for metal doors
- Panic bars
21

24. Specific optional accessories
PROGET Fire doors
WINDOW WITH FIRE RATED GLASS
fire doors
PROGET
Upon request all one- and two-leaved fire doors REI 60
and REI 120 may be equipped with round or rectangu-
lar windows with fire rated stratified glass and window
frames.
Limits prescribed by regulations
According to standards UNI 9723 and EN 1634-1, windows
may be smaller but not larger than the test sample size,
and the reverse holds true for the border strip around the
window which may be wider but not thinner.
The following limits correspond with these restrictions.
Borders, window position
“Border measurement“ refers to the distance from the
edge of the window to the wall opening of the door.
Elevation for round windows
window size FM H position
Ø 300 minimum 2050 Y=1600 Round window cross section
Ø 300 less than 2050 Y=FM H - 450 54 17
Ø 400 minimum 2150 Y=1600
Ø 400 from 2050 to 2149 Y=1550
Ø 400 less than 2050 Y=FM H - 500
Elevation for rectangular windows
window dimensions L x H FM H position
300 x 400 minimum 2150 Z=1450 Border Window Ø Border
300 x 400 from 2050 to 2149 Z=1350
300 x 400 less than 2050 Z=FM H -700
400 x 600 minimum 2150 Z=1250
400 x 600 from 2050 to 2149 Z=1150 Rectangular window cross section
400 x 600 less than 2050 Z=FM H - 900 50 15
400 x 1200 minimum 2150 Z=650
400 x 1200 from 2050 to 2149 Z=550
400 x 1200 less than 2050 Z=FM H - 1500
Border Window LxH Border
b
b
a a
Y
Window thickness
Z
class glass thickness
REI 60 21 mm
REI 120 53 mm
NOTE ATTENTION
Position and measurements indicated above are for standard. REI windows become opaque on exposure to temperatures of 40 de-
Different positions and measurements may be considered as long as grees or higher, or when installed outside and exposed to UV radia-
they respect the minimum “a” and “b” border strips and maximal tion. Minor aesthetic imperfections or tiny air bubbles do not compro-
measurements mentioned in the certificate for the window. The win- mise the fire resistance of the glass, and do not constitute grounds for
dow itself may not be supplied separately except for replacements. It claims. For special instructions and recommendations for fire windows,
is always advisable for doors with windows to be equipped with door see the „Notices“ reported on the last page of the window accessories
closers for controlled closing. section of the present brochure.
22

25. Specific optional accessories
PROGET Fire doors
WINDOW SPECIFICATIONS BASED
fire doors
PROGET
e
ON INSTALLATION METHOD
pl boa s
m
te crew
fra
ra g
te rd
b rd
n
g
pl on s
RE racin
em oa
su fixi
e
m
ith rb
i
20
r
r
ns
ta
0
I6
I1
pa
bf
as
as
or
model min./max. window border strip dimensions FM L (L1 + L2) x FM H
RE
ex
m
w
L x H a b
300 from 900 to 1170 x from 1775 to 2275
Ø 300
from 1004 to 1340 x from 2050 to 2500
300 from 1000 to 1170 x from 1775 to 2275
Ø 400
from 1004 to 1340 x from 2050 to 2500
from 250 from 250 250 from 750 to 900 x from 1775 to 2000
to 400 to 600
from 250 from 250 300 from 850 to 1000 x from 1775 to 2150
to 400 to 600
from 250 from 250 300 from 850 to 1007 x from 1775 to 2150
to 400 to 600 from 864 to 1153 x from 1938 to 2363
from 250 from 630 250 from 750 to 900 x from 1775 to 2000
(*) to 400 to 1400 from 779 to 1037 x from 1803 to 2197
from 250 from 250 360 from 970 to 1340 x from 1775 to 2670
to 620 to 400
from 250 from 250 300 from 850 to 1170 x from 1775 to 2275
to 564 to 443 from 1004 to 1340 x from 2050 to 2500
from 250 from 500 320 from 890 to 1162 x from 1775 to 2620
(*) to 522 to 1460 from 997 to 1332 x from 2361 to 2670
from 1800 (900 + 900) to 2252 (1126 + 1126) x
300 from 1775 to 2275**
Ø 300 300
from 1962 (996 + 996) to 2540 (1270 + 1270) x
from 2050 to 2500**
from 2000 (1000 + 1000) to 2252 (1126 + 1126) x
300 from 1775 to 2275**
Ø 400
from 2000 (1000 + 1000) to 2540 (1270 + 1270) x
from 2050 to 2500**
from 250 from 250 300 from 1700 (850 + 850) to 2000 (1000 + 1000) x
to 400 to 600 from 1775 to 2150**
from 1700 (850 + 850) to 2000 (1000 + 1000) x
from 250 from 250 300 from 1775 to 2150**
to 400 to 600 from 1708 (856 + 852) to 2229 (1144 +1148) x
from 1938 to 2363**
from 1100 (750 + 350) to 1800 ( 900 + 900 ) x
from 250 from 630 250 from 1775 to 2000
(*) to 400 to 1400 from 1539 (772 + 767) to 2061 (1028 +1033) x
from 1803 to 2197
from 250 from 250 325 from 1800 (900 + 900) to 2540 (1270 + 1270) x
to 620 to 400 from 1775 to 2670**
from 1700 (850 + 850) to 2252 (1126 + 1126) x
from 250 from 250 300 from 1775 to 2275**
to 564 to 443 from 1962 (996 + 996) to 2540 (1270 + 1270) x
from 2050 to 2500**
from 1240 (890 + 350) to 2315 (1155 + 1160) x
from 250 from 500 320 from 1775 to 2620
(*) to 515 to 1460 from 1975 (989 + 986) to 2540 (1268 + 1272) x
from 2361 to 2670
NOTE
(*) Windows only possible for the minimum size of 0,25 m2, and only
on one-leaved doors or the active leaf of two-leaved doors.
(**) FM secondary leaf minimum without window with RC/STD = 350 mm
FM secondary leaf minimum without window but with RC2 = 370 mm
23

26. Specific optional accessories
PROGET Fire doors
FRAME EXTENSIONS FOR PROGET DOORS
fire doors
PROGET
IM 1
Frame extensions to be mounted in addition to the Proget
frame to serve as embracing frame made of “Sendzimir” Wall opening
processed hot-galvanized sheet metal and painted the same
color as the doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders. Pro-
Doorframe
file on three sides, upper corners with 45 degree joint, fix- opening -3mm
ing with screws and plugs in groove (screws and plugs not on each side
included). 73
IM 3
Frame extensions to be mounted in addition to the Proget
frame to serve as embracing frame, especially for plaster-
board. Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized
sheet metal and painted the same color as the doorframe
with epoxy-polyester powders. Profile on three sides, up- Wall opening
per corners with 45 degree joint, fixing with screws and
plugs (screws and plugs not included). Doorframe
opening -3mm
on each side
73
IM 4
Frame extension to be screwed to the Proget doorframe
acting as a wall cladding. Made of “Sendzimir” processed
hot-galvanized sheet metal painted the same color as
the doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders. Profile on
three sides, upper corners with 90 degree joint. Wall opening
Complete with fastener screws. To mount the frame ex-
tension, fixing holes need to be drilled into doorframe on Doorframe
site. Combine with sealing to conceal the screw heads.
opening -3mm
on each side
73
IM 5
Telescopic frame extension to be screwed to the Proget
doorframe acting as a wall cladding for expansion screw
fixing. Consists of two overlapping profiles with a 25mm
adjustable range. Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-
galvanized sheet metal painted the same color as the Wall opening
doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders. Profile on three
sides, upper corners with 90 degree joint. Doorframe
Complete with fastener screws. To mount the frame ex- opening -3mm
tension pre-drilled holes are available on the frame. Com- on each side 73
bine with sealing to conceal the screw heads.
24

27. Specific optional accessories
PROGET Fire doors
STEEL FLOOR CATCH 50 14
fire doors
PROGET
Floor-mounted steel floor catch for two-leaved Proget
35
doors. Made of pierced and successively galvanized steel.
Includes rebate stop for the passive leaf, the strike box for
insertion of the rod, Nr. 3 screws and Nr. 3 plugs.
51
To be used in place of the nylon floor catch for doors that
18
usually remain open and where carts and heavy equip-
26
ment pass on a regular basis.
22
Lower PROGET steel floor catch
FF REBATE SEALING
FF sealing in black extruded profile to be pressed into the
dedicated groove in the perimetral frame and on the cen-
tral joint of two-leaved doors.
NOTE
Upon request sealing supplied for single one-leaved or two-leaved
doors to be cut and mounted on site.
25

28. Door cross sections - Measurements
PROGET Fire doors
One-leaved doors Doors without lower threshold
fire doors
PROGET
Horizontal cross section Vertical cross section
Doorframe opening = FM L -80
Exterior doorframe = FM H +30
+15
Wall opening FM H +5
Doorframe opening
= FM H -40
+20
Wall opening FM L +10
Exterior doorframe = FM L + 60 FFL
Two-leaved doors
Horizontal cross section
Doorframe opening = FM L -80
Active leaf opening = L1 -81
L2 L1
+20
Wall opening FM L +10 = L1 + L2
Exterior doorframe = FM L + 60
Leaf thickness
REI 60, REI 120 60 mm
NOTE +20 +15
The tolerances FM L +10 , FM H +5 of the indicated measurements
make it easier to fill the gap between the wall and the doorframe with
cement mortar.
For dry wall installation, the holes must be precise and greater toleran-
ce ranges should not be employed.
FFL = Finished floor level
26

29. Standard installation methods
PROGET Fire doors
INSTALLATION WITH ANCHORS
fire doors
PROGET
FOR MORTAR FIXING
The standard installation method for Proget doors is to
use the anchors for mortar fixing. Appropriate cuts will
need to be created in the walls (section 80 x 200 mm).
The anchors should be bent and blocked inside the wall.
For fire sealing purposes and mechanical hold, the space
between the doorframe and the masonry should always
be filled with concrete mortar.
One-leaved doors
FM L = from 500 to 1035 x FM H = from 1775 to 2200 FM L greater than 1035 and/or FM H greater than 2200
Two-leaved doors
FM L = from 850 to 2070 x FM H = from 1775 to 2200 FM L greater than 2070 and/or FM H greater than 2200
NOTE
For proper installation, the cuts for the anchors should be 80 x 200
mm in size.
27

30. Optional installation methods
PROGET Fire doors
DRY WALL INSTALLATION ONTO THE SUBFRAME
fire doors
PROGET
WITH SCREWS
Installation method certified for one- or two-leaved REI 60
and REI 120 doors, in conformity with UNI 9723 standard,
for screw fixing onto metal subframes in the walls.
The subframe is made of hollow steel profiles, cross section
30 x 15 mm, complete with spacers and anchors for mortar
fixing. Subframes need to be ordered separately from the
door. Make sure measurements correspond to the door’s
FM L x FM H measurements.
Doorframe opening
The supplied subframe comes factory heat-insulated with
special materials and includes corner joints and a lower
spacer to be added on site.
The subframe method allows a dry wall” installation of
the doors, making an installation onto finished masonry
possible. Wall opening
INSTALLATION FOR EXPANSION SCREWS FIXING
Installation method certified for one- or two-leaved REI
60 and REI 120 doors, in conformity with UNI 9723 stand-
ard, for expansion screws. Designed for installations onto
concrete, full bricks, half-full bricks, lightened cement and
other materials.
The supplied subframe comes factory heat-insulated with
special materials and includes corner joints and a lower
spacer to be added on site.
This method allows for “dry wall” installation of the doors
without requiring any additional masonry work. Installa- Doorframe opening
tion of the door, therefore, becomes a simple mechanical
operation plus the final adjustments.
NOTE Wall opening
Please specify clearly whether the door is for subframe installation or
for direct wall installation with expansion screws.
WALL SCREWS
For direct wall installations or installation onto subframes,
special expansion screws should be used without plugs.
Please see the “door accessories” pages for more details.
28

31. Installation onto plasterboard
PROGET Fire doors
INSTALLATION ONTO PLASTERBOARD WITH EM-
fire doors
PROGET
BRACING FRAME
Installation method onto plasterboard certified for one-
or two-leaved REI 60 and REI 120 doors in conformity with
UNI 9723 standard.
The supplied frame comes factory heat-insulated with
special materials and includes corner joints and pre-drilled
screw holes with cover caps.
Construction of the plasterboard should be done following the specific
door installation instructions.
Door cross section and plasterboard version: Plasterboard walls REI 60
REI 30 REI 60 REI 90 Made using galvanized steel frames with “U”-shaped 75 x
40 mm guide profiles, “C”-shaped 75 x 47 mm vertical pro-
files (doubled next to the doorframe), with a single layer of
Doorframe opening 12,5 mm thick fire rated plasterboard used as finishing on
both sides and on the profiles around the doorframe.
min. 100
Order Required Doorframe Exterior
measurement wall opening opening of doorframe
FM L (width) FM L - 25 mm FM L - 80 mm FM L + 60 mm
FM H (height) FM H - 12 mm FM H - 40 mm FM H + 30 mm
Opening to be created
Order measurement FM L x H
Exterior of doorframe
Door cross section and plasterboard version: Plasterboard walls REI 120
REI 60 REI 90
Made using galvanized steel framing with “U”-shaped 75 x
40 mm guide profiles, “C”-shaped 75 x 47 mm vertical pro-
files (doubled next to the doorframe), with a double layer
of 12,5 mm thick fire rated plasterboard used as finishing
Doorframe opening on both sides and on the profiles around the doorframe.
min. 125
Order Required Doorframe Exterior
measurement wall opening opening of doorframe
FM L (width) FM L - 25 mm FM L - 80 mm FM L + 60 mm
FM H (height) FM H - 12 mm FM H - 40 mm FM H + 30 mm
Opening to be created
Order measurement FM L x H
Exterior of doorframe
29

32. Installation onto plasterboard
PROGET Fire doors
INSTALLATION ONTO PLASTERBOARD WITH AN-
fire doors
PROGET
GULAR FRAME
Installation method certified for one- or two-leaved REI 60
and REI 120 doors, in conformity with UNI 9723 standard,
onto plasterboard.
The supplied frame comes factory heat-insulated with
special materials and includes corner joints, a lower spacer
to be added on site. and pre-drilled screw holes on the
rebate.
Construction of the plasterboard should be done following the specific
door installation instructions.
Door cross section and plasterboard version: Plasterboard walls REI 60
Made with 100 mm metal framing, with a reduction to
REI 30 REI 60 REI 90
75 mm next to the door and with uprights reinforced in-
ternally with an additional “C” profile. Finishing of both
faces with 15 mm thick fire rated plasterboard layers and
with an additional 12,5 mm plasterboard layer internally
around the door on the two sides.
Doorframe opening
min.130
Order Required Doorframe Exterior
measurement wall opening opening of doorframe
FM L (width) FM L + 6 mm FM L - 80 mm FM L + 60 mm
FM H (height) FM H + 3 mm FM H - 40 mm FM H + 30 mm
Order measurement FM L x H min.200
Exterior of doorframe
Door cross section and plasterboard version: Plasterboard walls REI 120
The support structure adjacent to the door consists of two
REI 60 REI 90
uprights and a 75 x 50 x 4 mm plate cross beam, 4 telescopic
sleeves inserted in the uprights for anchoring to the ceiling
and floor, 2 joints with sleeves installation of the crossbeam.
100 mm metal framing and 75 mm next to the door. The 75
mm framing is filled with mineral wool. A double-layer of
12,5 mm fire rated plasterboard layers as finishing for the
min.150
Doorframe opening two faces of the metal framing and the support structure,
with a triple-layer in the door area.
Order Required Doorframe Exterior
measurement wall opening opening of doorframe
FM L (width) FM L + 6 mm FM L - 80 mm FM L + 60 mm
Order measurement FM L x H min.200 FM H (height) FM H + 3 mm FM H - 40 mm FM H + 30 mm
Exterior of doorframe
30

33. Order measurements
PROGET Fire doors
ORDER MEASUREMENTS
fire doors
PROGET
Wall Opening Doorframe opening Plasterboard wall opening
One -or two- leaved doors
with embracing frame
FPCL = FML - 25
FPCH = FMH - 12
One- or two-leaved doors
with angular frame
FPCL = FML + 6
FPCH = FMH + 3
NOTE
For embracing frames, the wall openings to be created in the plaster-
board walls do not correspond to the order measurement and therefo-
re should follow the above specifications.
PT L x PT H
One-leaved door FM L x FM H
standard dimensions REI 60 and 120 doorframe opening
800 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 720 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
900 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 820 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1000 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 920 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1100 x 2050 / 2150 1020 x 2010 / 2110
1200 x 2050 / 2150 1120 x 2010 / 2110
1300 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1220 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1340 x 2050 / 2150 1260 x 2010 / 2110
semi-standard dimensions REI 60 and 120
from 546 to 995 x from 466 x
2000 / 2050 / 2150 1960 / 2010 / 2110
to 915
non-standard dimensions REI 60 and 120
from 546 to 1340 x from 1775 to 2670 anchor fixing with mortar
from 600 to 1170 x from 1775 to 2275 plasterboard installation with embracing frame
from 1004 to 1340 x from 2050 to 2500 plasterboard installation with embracing frame
from 546 to 1007 x from 1775 to 2150 plasterboard installation
from 864 to 1153 x from 1938 to 2363 plasterboard installation
from 600 to 1170 x from 1775 to 2275 ready for screw installation onto the subframe or with expansion screws
from 1004 to 1340 x from 2050 to 2500 ready for screw installation onto the subframe or with expansion screws
31

34. Order measurements - Handle height
PROGET Fire doors
Two-leaved doors FM L x FM H PT L x PT H
fire doors
PROGET
standard dimensions REI 60 and 120 doorframe opening
1150 ( 800 + 350 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1070 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1200 ( 800 + 400 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1120 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1250 ( 800 + 450 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1170 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1250 ( 900 + 350 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1170 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1300 ( 900 + 400 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1220 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1350 ( 900 + 450 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1270 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1350 (1000 + 350 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1270 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1400 (1000 + 400 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1320 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1450 (1000 + 450 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1370 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1600 ( 800 + 800 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1520 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1700 ( 900 + 800 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1620 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1800 ( 900 + 900 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1720 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1800 (1000 + 800 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1720 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1900 (1000 + 900 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1820 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
2000 (1000 + 1000) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1920 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
semi-standard dimensions REI 60 and REI 120
from 890 (540+ 350) to 2000 (1000 + 1000) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150
non-standard dimensions REI 60 and 120
from 890 (540 + 350) to 2540 (1270 + 1270) x from 1775 to 2670 anchor fixing with mortar
from 890 (540 + 350) to 2252 (1126 + 1126) x from 1775 to 2275 plasterboard installation with embracing frame
from 1962 (996 + 996) to 2540 (1270 + 1270) x from 2050 to 2500 plasterboard installation with embracing frame
from 890 (540 + 350) to 2000 (1000 + 1000) x from 1775 to 2150 plasterboard installation
from 1708 (856 + 852) to 2292 (1144 + 1148) x from 1938 to 2363 plasterboard installation
from 890 (540 + 350) to 2252 (1126 + 1126) x from 1775 to 2275 ready for screw installation onto the subframe or with expansion screws
from 1962 (996 + 996) to 2540 (1270 + 1270) x from 2050 to 2500 ready for screw installation onto the subframe or with expansion screws
NOTE
The following REI 120 doors with standard measurements are equip- Buyers should be aware that pursuant to and in accordance with
ped with a CP1 door closer: Legislative Decree dd. 19.09.1994 Nr. 626, resp. of Legislative Decree
1 leaf: from 1141 to 1340 x from 2381 to 2630 dd. 19.03.1996 Nr. 242, all doors used for emergency exits must have
from 891 to 1140 x from 2631 to 2670 a minimum height of 2000 mm (= nominal wall opening 2040 mm).
from 1141 to 1340 x from 2631 to 2670
2 leaves: from 2261 to 2540 x from 2131 to 2380
from 1761 to 2260 x from 2381 to 2630
from 2261 to 2540 x from 2381 to 2630
from 1761 to 2260 x from 2631 to 2670
from 2261 to 2540 x from 2631 to 2670
HANDLE HEIGHT
One-leaved door Two-leaved door
h = 1050 h = 1050
32

35. Opening measurements - Encumbrances
PROGET fire doors
OPENING MEASUREMENT AND ENCUMBRANCE
fire doors
PROGET
WITH 90 DEGREE OPENING
One-leaved doors with panic bar Two-leaved doors with panic bars
NOTE
Handles and door closers
may obstruct full 90° or 180°
opening.
Net passage calculation
panic bar type protrusion one-leaved door two-leaved door
EXUS 125 FML - 245 FML - 410
TWIST 100 FML - 220 FML - 360
SLASH 75 FML - 195 FML - 310
TOUCHBAR 74 FML - 194 FML - 308
z = leaf protrusion relative to the wall FML + 27 L1 + 35, L2+75
ENCUMBRANCE WITH 180 DEGREE OPENING -
HANDLE HEIGHT
One-leaved door Two-leaved door
x = FML - 7 x = L1 + 1 y = L2 + 42
b = max. 130 (only in the presence of a panic bar or M14 handle)
NOTE
The 90 or 180 degree opening of the leaf could be compromised if han-
dle or door closer protrusions come into contact with the wall.
PROGET - GENERAL NOTES
All rights reserved. Installation should be executed by qualified technicians.
No reproduction (partial or total) without prior authorization by Ninz. Modifications may only be made as indicated in the installation instruc-
Ninz reserves the right to modify the product. tions. Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.
33

36. “bare minimum, maximum
performance!”

37. NINZ REVER multipurpose doors
FEATURES 36 - 39
SPECIFIC OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 40 - 43
DOOR CROSS SECTIONS - MEASUREMENTS 44
INSTALLATION METHODS 45
ORDER MEASUREMENTS 46
OPENING MEASUREMENTS - ENCUMBRANCE 47
All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced technical changes to the contents of this brochure.
Closures are typically used for internal compartmentalization and have been designed for this purpose.

38. Features
REVER multipurpose doors
THE ECONOMICAL MULTIPURPOSE
multipurpose
YOU ALWAYS WISHED FOR
rever
“Quality first”
-- Fully galvanized, including the “hidden” parts
-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal
-- Corrosion protection also provided along the cut edges
of the metal
-- Painted with epoxy-polyester thermoset powders in a
180 degree (Celsius) oven
-- Extra-thick paint layer (over 70 microns)
-- Optimal corrosion resistance as demonstrated by 500
hour salt-fog testing
-- Finishing with high-quality aesthetics
-- Orange skin anti-scratch structured paint
-- Customizable with wide selection of RAL colors
“Practicality of use”
-- Door reversibility*
-- Indication of door opening direction not necessary
-- Reduction of stock for retailers
-- Simplifies choices for end customers
-- Especially well-suited for indoor use
-- Light but still sturdy
-- Easy installation
“Versatility”
-- Very wide field of application One-leaved doors
-- Can be combined with various frame types
-- Installable onto any wall type
-- Application with a block frame
-- Can be combined with over-head frame panel with or
without ventilating perforation
-- Available with upper/lower crack enlargement
-- Vast assortment of accessories
-- Customized measurements also available
“Manufacturing technology”
-- Manufacturing in modern and functional facilities which
employ the latest technologies to maintain high quality
levels and product uniformity
-- The entire production process - from raw materials to
painted and packaged products - takes place inside
Ninz’s own facilities, ensuring a 360 degree door control
Left Left Right
Right Left Left Right
Right
Two-leaved doors
*except in combination with certain optional accessories
NOTE
The colors represented in the photos are not standard.
36

39. Features
REVER multipurpose doors
STANDARD ELEMENTS
multipurpose
rever
which comprise Rever multipurpose doors:
Door
-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet
metal, press folded
-- Perimetral rebate on 4 sides
-- Internal corrugated honeycomb fiber structure fixed
firmly to the sheet metal
-- Thickness of 40 mm
Doorframe
-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet
metal
-- Grooves for rebate sealing
-- Suitable for anchors for mortar fixing or expansion
screws
-- Detachable rebate for application on finished flooring
-- Removable threshold for thresholdless installation
-- Strike plates in PA6 black nylon for lock bolt
-- Assembled doorframes for one-leaved doors
-- Assembly required for two-leaved doorframes
Hinges
-- Nr. 2 three-wing hinges for each leaf
Locking mechanism
-- Reversible locking mechanism with bolt and central latch
-- Insert with patent key, Euro profile cylinder ready
Handle
-- PA6 black nylon handle
-- Fastener screws to pass
-- Insert for patent-type key
Safety bolts
-- Nr. 3 safety bolts applied on hinge side doorframe edge
NOTE
Cylinder and rebate sealing provided on request only.
The handle requires assembly.
37

40. Features
REVER multipurpose doors
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
multipurpose
rever
which comprise Rever multipurpose doors:
Safety lock
-- Central latch for blocking and unblocking the passive
leaf
-- Lever control for unlocking vertical rods
Upper coupling system for the secondary leaf
-- Vertical rod with steel point which inserts into the upper
strike box
-- Upper strike box in black PA6 nylon with steel roller
Lower coupling system for the secondary leaf
-- Vertical rod with steel point which inserts into lower
strike box
-- Floor catch (floor-mounted bushing) in black nylon, for
doors without threshold
-- Floor catch in black nylon with a steel roller, for doors
with threshold
Finishing
-- Standard painted with epoxy-polyester thermoset pow-
ders in a 180 degrees oven, orange skin, anti-scratch
finishing
-- Standard pastel turquoise color, lighter tone for the leaf
(NCS4020-B50G), darker tone for the frame (NCS5020-
B50G)
Standard packaging
-- Single door wrapped into stretchable polyethylene (PE) film
-- Assembled doorframes for one-leaved doors
-- Assembly required for doorframes for two-leaved doors
-- Palletized on wooden pallets
Pre-settings
-- Each door is ready for the installation of a three-point
SECUR lock
-- The main lock and upper rod housing on the secondary
leaf are ready for installation of the latching mechanism
for panic bars
Door weight kg/m2 of wall opening
1 leaf 15
2 leaves 14
NOTE
If the door ever needs to be repainted, follow the precise instructions
on the “painting” page.
38

41. Features
REVER multipurpose doors
OPTIONAL ACCeSSOrIeS
multipurpose
rever
A wide variety of accessories and surface finishes are avail-
able on request for maximum value enhancement of Rever
doors to your own specific needs.
The proper accessories can help resolve:
Safety-related needs
-- Doors for panic exits (see panic bars)
-- Doors for emergency exits (see emergency exit handles)
-- Three-point Rever SECUR lock
Installation and utilization needs
-- Embracing or telescopic frames
-- Frame extensions
-- Drip steel-profile
-- Kick and protection plates
-- Windows
-- Ventilating perforation
-- Overhead frame panel
-- Available with upper/lower crack enlargement
Access-related control issues
-- Electrically-activated lock mechanisms
-- Electric handle mechanisms
-- Magnetic blocking mechanisms
Performance enhancing
-- Rebate sealings
-- Cylinders
-- Door closers
-- Special handles
Customized finishing
-- Select paint colors from a wide variety of RAL tints
-- NDD – Ninz Digital Decor, graphic images applied with
special ink jets and protected by a transparent topcoat.
Infinite varieties of customizable decorations in harmony
with specific door settings
-- Stainless steel handles
-- Colored handles
Packaging for maximum protection
Sturdy wooden crates protect all doors and related acces-
sories
-- NDD decorated doors
-- Construction sites
-- Shipping abroad
-- Special transport
The following optional accessories make Rever doors irreversible, re-
quiring the indication of the door opening direction when the order
is placed:
NOTE - SLASH panic bar
Details about optional accessories may be found in the following chap- - Panic bar for secondary leaves
ters of this brochure: - Windows and ventilation grills
- Finishing - MAC locks
- Accessories for metal doors - ELM/cisa and ELM/mt electric handle
- Panic bars - Special locks (016 tir- Stel 15)
Right-opening doors are the default selection if opening direction is - Overhead frame panels and prolungated frames
not specified. - Special doorframes (SPEED, SOLID, TESCOP)
39

42. Specific optional accessories
REVER multipurpose doors
MULTIPURPOSE WINDOW
multipurpose
rever
On request, the one- and two-leaved doors may be
equipped with round or rectangular windows, with strati-
fied 3 + 3 mm glass framed with a black rubber EPDM
profile. The corners of rectangular windows are rounded
(radius of approx. 100 mm).
Production limits
Window sizes are standard and the minimum border strips
around the window may not be reduced.
Borders, window position
“Border measurement” refers to the distance from the
edge of the window to the wall opening of the door.
Elevation for round windows
window size FM H position
Ø 300 minimum 1950 Y=1600
Ø 300 less than 1950 Y=FM H - 350
Ø 400 minimum 2000 Y=1600
Ø 400 less than 2000 Y=FM H - 400
Elevation for rectangular windows Round and rectangular window cross sections
window dimensions L x H FM H position
39 11
300 x 500 minimum 1950 Z=1500
300 x 500 less than 1950 Z=FM H - 450
400 x 700 minimum 2050 Z=1500
400 x 700 less than 2050 Z=FM H - 550
Round Ø window
Border Rectangular window Border
b
b
a a
Y
Z
Window dimensions minimum border FM L min. dimensions
a b
300 700
200 200
400 800
KIT window 300
200 200
L1 700 + L2 400
The windows for Rever doors are also available as a KIT 400 L1 800 + L2 400
for later installation directly by the customer.
300 L1 700 + L2 700
200 200
400 L1 800 + L2 800
NOTE
The positions indicated above are standard. 300 x 500 700
Different positions may be considered as long as they respect the mini- 200 200
400 x 700 800
mum “a” and “b” border strips.
300 x 500 L1 700 + L2 400
200 200
400 x 700 L1 800 + L2 400
300 x 500 L1 700 + L2 700
200 200
400 x 700 L1 800 + L2 800
40

43. Specific optional accessories
REVER multipurpose doors
SPECIAL ‚SPEED‘ DOORFRAME FOR REVER DOORS
multipurpose
Doorframe 15 55
opening
rever
SPEED on three sides embracing doorframe with 45 deg.
joints, made of 1,25 mm thick galvanized „Sendzimir“
processed sheet metal, assembly required. For installation
Required
onto finished walls using 6 integrated clamps and two wall opening
adjustable spacers with plugs or screws. Includes rebate
sealing and RAL painting with thermoset epoxy-polyester FM Order
powders. Minimum 75mm wall thickness, 55/70 frames. measurements
70
Order measurements required wall opening doorframe opening
FM L (width) FM L + 20 FM L - 64
FM H (height) FM H + 10 FM H - 34
SPECIAL ‚SOLID‘ DOORFRAME FOR REVER DOORS Doorframe 15 45
opening
SOLID on three sides embracing doorframe with 45 deg.
joints, made of 1,25 mm thick galvanized „Sendzimir“
processed sheet metal, assembly required. For installation Required
with anchors for mortar fixing or with iron bank to fix with wall opening
plugs or screw on, including removable threshold spacer,
FM Order
sealing and RAL painting with thermoset epoxy-polyester
measurements
powders. Minimum 50mm wall thickness, 45/45 frames.
45
Order measurements required wall opening doorframe opening
FM L (width) FM L + 40 FM L - 64
FM H (height) FM H + 20 FM H - 34
SPECIAL ‚TESCOP‘ DOORFRAME FOR REVER DOORS Doorframe 15 55
opening
Two-pieced TESCOP on three sides embracing doorframe
with 45 deg. joints, made of 1,25 mm thick galvanized
„Sendzimir“ processed sheet metal, assembly required. To Required
be fixed to finished wall with screws, including removable wall opening
threshold spacer, sealing and RAL painting with thermoset
epoxy-polyester powders. Minimum 70mm wall thickness, FM Order
measurements
adjustment range of +25mm, frames 55/70.
70
Order measurements required wall opening doorframe opening
FM L (width) FM L + 20 FM L - 64
FM H (height) FM H + 10 FM H - 34
IM21 FRAME EXTENSION FOR REVER DOORS
Wall opening
Frame extension to be screwed to the Rever doorframe
acting as a wall cladding. Made of “Sendzimir” processed
hot-galvanized sheet metal painted the same color as
the doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders. Profile on
three sides, upper corners with 45 degree joint.
To mount the frame extension, fixing holes need to be
Doorframe
opening drilled into doorframe on site. Combine with sealing to
conceal the screw heads.
48
Minimum 60mm wall thickness.
INSTALLATION “IN THE REVEAL” WITH BLOCK FRAME
FM Order 18
measurements On request additional block profiles for one- and two-leaved
multipurpose Rever doors. Consists of 3 sections of hollow
40x20x1,5mm metal profiles painted the same color as the
doorframe using thermoset epoxy-polyester powders. Instal-
Doorframe lation with screws and plugs (screws and plugs not included).
opening
Required wall opening = FM L + 36, FM H + 18
Required wall
opening
41

44. Specific optional accessories
REVER multipurpose doors
VENTILATION Grate
multipurpose
rever
Ventilation grate made of either black or white PVC, 482
x 99 mm (air passage approx. 150 cm2). The opening direc-
tion of the door needs to be specified.
Minimum FML = 650 mm
200
VENTILATING PERFORATIONS
Ventilating perforation for one- and two-leaved Rever
doors and for the active leaf of two-leaved doors; made
by perforating the illustrated pattern into the sheet met-
25
3
al, air passage of approx. 200 cm2 per leaf. Rever doors
with ventilating perforations remain reversible.
15
NOTE
150
Ventilating perforations are only provided on the main leaf of two-
leaved doors.
OVERHEAD FRAME PANEL WITH
VENTILATING PERFORATION
A prolungated frame with a galvanized, pre-drilled 12/10
mm thick piece of sheet metal to serve as the overhead
frame panel with ventilating perforation, which also
functions as the upper rebate for the leaf. Painted the
same color as the leaf using thermoset epoxy-polyester
powders. Also available for Speed, Solid and Tescop door-
Wall opening height (custom made)
frames. Panel, leaf and frame require on-site assembly.
Wall opening height + 8
2030 or 2130
25
FFL
4
15
42

45. Specific optional accessories
REVER multipurpose doors
DOOR WITH extended FRAME
multipurpose
rever
Frame extends beyond the door leaf to create a 100 mm
crack either below or both above and below. When using
the standard Rever door leaf and an extended frame, the
positioning of the handle is higher as a consequence.
External frame
External frame
handle
height
Handle height external frame required wall opening
handle
height
crack below FM H / 2 + 150 FM H + 108 FM H + 100
crack below
and above FM H / 2 + 150 FM H + 208 FM H + 200
THREE-POINT SECUR LOCK FOR REVER DOOR
The SECUR version of Rever provides a more reliable door
closure. Activating the lock with a key blocks the leaf in
the frame at three points: in the center with the latch
bolt, above with the rod that inserts into the upper strike
box and below with the rod that inserts into the lower
strike box.
Also available as a KIT for on-site installation. SECUR Rev-
er doors remain reversible.
upper strike box lower strike box (bushing)
Additional locking points
NOTE
Not available in the anti panic version.
FF REBATE SEALING
FF sealing in black extruded profile to be pressed into the
dedicated groove of the perimetral frame.
FF sealing in black extruded profile self-adhesive for ap-
plication to the central joint of two-leaved doors.
NOTE
Upon request sealing supplied for single doors to be cut and mounted
on site.
perimetral frame central joint for two-leaved doors
43

46. Door cross sections - Measurements
REVER multipurpose doors
One-leaved doors Doors without lower threshold
multipurpose
Horizontal cross section Vertical cross section
rever
Doorframe opening = FM L -74
Exterior doorframe = FM H +8
Doorframe opening = FM H -40
+15
Wall opening FM H +5
+20
Wall opening FM L +10
Exterior doorframe = FM L +22
FFL
Doors with internal and external lower threshold Doors with internal lower threshold
Vertical cross section Vertical cross section
Exterior doorframe = FM H +24
Exterior doorframe = FM H + 8
+15
Doorframe opening
Doorframe opening = FM H - 40
Wall opening FM H +5
+15
Wall opening FM H +5
= FM H -72
FFL
FFL
Two-leaved doors
Horizontal cross section
Doorframe opening = FM L - 74
Active leaf opening = L1 -74
L2 L1
+20
Wall opening FM L +10 = L1+ L2
Exterior doorframe = FM L +22
Leaf thickness NOTE +20 +15
MULTIPURPOSE 40 mm The tolerances FM L +10 , FM H +5 of the indicated measurements
make it easier to fill the gap between the wall and the doorframe with
cement mortar.
For dry wall installation, the holes must be precise and greater toler-
ance ranges should not be employed.
FFL = Finished Floor Level
44

47. Installation methods
REVER multipurpose doors
INSTALLATION WITH ANCHORS FOR MORTAR FIXING ANCHOR POSITIONING
multipurpose
rever
For mortar fixing, appropriate cuts will need to be created One-leaved doors
in the walls (section 80 x 160 mm) or the anchors should be Right opening and Left opening
fixed with expansion screws. The anchors should be bent
and blocked inside the wall. For best mechanical hold, the
space between the doorframe and the masonry should al-
ways be filled with concrete mortar or polyurethane foam.
INSTALLATION FOR EXPANSION SCREWS FIXING
Two-leaved doors
For the installation with expansion screws, the anchors Right opening
serve as spacers and should not be bent. Using Würth type
art. 0910436112 plugs or similar (supplied at the custom-
er’s expense), installation is done with expansion screws
into the pre-drilled holes present on the frame. For the
best mechanical hold, the space between the doorframe
and the masonry should always be filled with concrete
mortar or polyurethane foam.
Left opening
(*) For proper installation, the cuts for the anchors should be
200 x 160 mm in size.
45

48. Order measurements
REVER multipurpose doors
ORDER MEASUREMENTS
multipurpose
rever
Wall Opening Doorframe opening
One-leaved doors
PTL = FML - 74
PTH = FMH - 40
Two-leaved doors
PTL = FML - 74
PTH = FMH - 40
One-leaved door FM L x FM H PT L x PT H
standard dimensions doorframe opening
700 x 2050 / 2150 626 x 2010 / 2110
800 x 2050 / 2150 726 x 2010 / 2110
900 x 2050 / 2150 826 x 2010 / 2110
1000 x 2050 / 2150 926 x 2010 / 2110
1100 x 2050 / 2150 1026 x 2010 / 2110
1350 x 2050 / 2150 1276 x 2010 / 2110
semi-standard dimensions
from 500 to 1345 x 2050 / 2150 from 526 to 1271 x 2010 / 2110
non-standard dimensions
from 500 to 1350 x from 1780 to 2150 from 526 to 1276 x from 1740 to 2110
Two-leaved doors FM L (L1+L2) x FM H PT L x PT H
standard dimensions doorframe opening
1200 ( 800 + 400) x 2050 / 2150 1126 x 2010 / 2110
1300 ( 900 + 400) x 2050 / 2150 1226 x 2010 / 2110
1400 ( 700 + 700) x 2050 / 2150 1326 x 2010 / 2110
1600 ( 800 + 800) x 2050 / 2150 1526 x 2010 / 2110
1800 ( 900 + 900) x 2050 / 2150 1726 x 2010 / 2110
2000 (1000 + 1000) x 2050 / 2150 1926 x 2010 / 2110
semi-standard dimensions
from 900 (500+400) to 2000 (1000 +1000) x 2050 / 2150 from 826 to 1926 x 2010 / 2110
non-standard dimensions
from 900 (500+400) to 2000 (1000 +1000) x from 1780 to 2150 from 826 to 1926 x 1740 / 2110
NOTE
Buyers should be aware that pursuant to and in accordance with Leg- 2040 mm). Unless specified otherwise by the customer, two-leaved
islative Decree dd. 19.09.1994 Nr. 626, resp. of Legislative Decree standard, semi-standard and customized doors are supplied with a
dd. 19.03.1996 Nr. 242, all doors used for emergency exits or routes right pull opening direction.
musthave a minimum height of 2000 mm (= nominal wall opening
46

49. Opening measurements - Encumbrances
REVER multipurpose doors
OPENING MEASUREMENTS AND ENCUMBRANCE
multipurpose
rever
WITH 90 DEGREE OPENING
One-leaved doors with panic bar Two-leaved doors with panic bars
Net passage calculation
panic bar type protrusion one-leaved door two-leaved door
EXUS 125 FML - 209 FML - 344
TWIST 100 FML - 184 FML - 294
SLASH 75 FML - 159 FML - 244
TOUCHBAR 74 FML - 158 FML - 242
z = leaf protrusion L1 + 11
FML + 11
relative to the wall L2 + 56
ENCUMBRANCE WITH 180 DEGREE OPENING
- HANDLE HEIGHT
One-leaved door Two-leaved door
x = FML - 4 x = L1 - 4 y = L2 + 42
h handle = FMH/2 + 50 h handle = FMH/2 + 50
NOTE
The 90 or 180 degree opening of the leaf could be compromised if
handle or door closer protrusions come into contact with the wall.
REVER - GENERAL NOTES
All rights reserved. No reproduction (partial or total) without prior authori- Modifications may only be made as indicated in the installation instructions.
zation by Ninz. Ninz reserves the right to modify the product. Installation Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.
should be executed by qualified technicians.
47

50. “the quality multipurpose,
reversible and heat-insulated“

51. UNIVER NINZ Doors
MULTIPURPOSE VERSION
FEATURES 50 - 53
SPECIFIC OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 54 - 57
DOOR CROSS SECTIONS - MEASUREMENTS 58
INSTALLATION METHODS 59
ORDER MEASUREMENTS 60
OPENING MEASUREMENTS - ENCUMBRANCE 61
All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced technical changes to the contents of this brochure.
Closures are typically used for internal compartmentalization and have been designed for this purpose.

52. Features
UNIVER multipurpose doors
THE HIGH QUALITY MULTIPURPOSE
multipurpose
UNIVER
“Quality first”
-- Solid design and manufacture
-- Fully galvanized door, including the “hidden” parts
-- Made of “Sendzimir” process hot-galvanized sheet metal
-- Corrosion protection also provided along cut edges of
the metal sheets
-- Painted with epoxy-polyester thermoset powders in a
180 degrees (Celsius) oven
-- Substantial paint layer (70 microns plus)
-- Optimal corrosion resistance demonstrated by 500 hour
salt-fog test
-- Unaffected by severe climate changes, demonstrated by
2000 hours with +60° to -10° cycles at 75% humidity
-- Finishing with high-quality aesthetics
-- Orange skin anti-scratch structured paint
-- Customizable with wide selection of RAL colors
“Practicality of use”
-- Door reversibility*
-- Indication of door opening direction not necessary
-- Reduction of stock for retailers
-- Simplifies choices for end customers
-- Easy installation
“Versatility”
-- Suitable for multiple uses because of its sturdiness
-- May be ordered with marking for external use One-leaved doors
-- Vast assortment of accessories
-- Customized measurements also available
“Manufacturing technology”
-- Manufacturing in modern and functional facilities
which employ the latest technologies to maintain high
quality levels and product uniformity
-- The entire production process - from raw materials to
painted and packaged products - takes place inside
Ninz’s own facilities, ensuring a 360 degree door control
Left Left RightRight Left Left RightRight
*except in combination with certain optional accessories
NOTE
The colors represented in the photos are not standard. Two-leaved doors
50

53. Features
UNIVER multipurpose doors
STANDARD ELEMENTS
multipurpose
UNIVER
which comprise Univer multipurpose doors:
Door leaf
-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet
metal, press folded and electro welded
-- Perimetral rebate on 4 sides
-- Heat-insulated with mineral wool
-- Internal stiffeners for overhead door closer and panic bar
-- Thickness of 50 mm
Doorframe
-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet
metal
-- Grooves for rebate sealing
-- Suitable for anchors for mortar fixing or expansion screws
-- Detachable rebate for application on finished flooring
-- Removable threshold for thresholdless installation
-- Strike plates in PA6 black nylon for lock bolt
-- Assembled doorframes for one-leaved doors
-- Assembly required for two-leaved doorframes
Hinges
-- Nr. 2 three-wing hinges for each leaf
-- of which one 1 ball-bearing hinge with screws for vertical
adjustment of the leaf, marked as per EN 1935, classi-
fied for up to 160 kg load, 200.000 cycles durability, suit-
able for fire door use
-- and one hinge with self-closing spring
Safety bolts
-- Nr. 3 safety bolts applied on hinge side doorframe edge
Locking mechanism
-- Reversible locking mechanism with bolt and central latch
-- Insert with patent key, Euro profile cylinder ready
Handle
-- PA6 black nylon handle
-- Fastener screws to pass
-- Insert for patent-type key
NOTE
Cylinder and rebate sealing provided on request only.
The handle requires assembly.
51

54. Features
UNIVER multipurpose doors
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
multipurpose
UNIVER
which comprise Univer multipurpose doors:
Safety lock
-- Central latch for blocking and unblocking the passive leaf
-- Lever control for unlocking vertical rods
Upper coupling system for the secondary leaf
-- Vertical rod with steel point which inserts into the up-
per strike box
-- Upper strike box in black PA6 nylon with steel roller
Lower coupling system for the secondary leaf
-- Vertical rod with steel point which inserts into lower
strike box
-- Floor catch (floor-mounted bushing) in black nylon, for
doors without threshold
-- Floor catch in black nylon with steel roller, for doors
with threshold
Identification plate
-- Metal tag with door identification data
Finishing
-- Standard paint with epoxy-polyester thermoset powders
in a 180 degrees oven, orange skin, anti-scratch finishing
-- Standard pastel turquoise color, lighter tone for the leaf
(NCS4020-B50G), darker tone for the frame (NCS5020-
B50G)
Standard packaging
-- Single door wrapped into stretchable polyethylene (PE) film
-- Assembled doorframes for one-leaved doors
-- Assembly required for doorframes for two-leaved doors
-- Palletized on wooden pallets
Pre-settings
-- Each door is ready for the installation of a three-point
SECUR lock
-- The main lock and upper rod housing on the secondary
leaf are ready for installation of the latching mechanism
for panic bars
Door weight kg/m2 of wall opening
1 leaf 23
2 leaves 22
NOTE
If the door ever needs to be repainted, follow the precise instructions
on the “painting” page.
52

55. Features
UNIVER multipurpose doors
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
multipurpose
UNIVER
A wide variety of accessories and surface finishes are avail-
able on request for maximum value enhancement of Univ-
er doors to your own specific needs.
The proper accessories can help resolve:
Safety-related needs
-- Doors for panic exits (see panic bars)
-- Doors for emergency exits (see emergency exit handles)
-- Univer three-point SECUR lock
Installation and utilization needs
-- Frame extensions
-- Drip steel-profile
-- Kick and protection plates
-- Windows
-- Ventilation grills
Access-related control issues
-- Electrically-activated lock mechanisms
-- Electric handle mechanisms
-- Magnetic blocking mechanisms
Performance enhancing
-- Sealing
-- Cylinders
-- Door closers
-- Special handles
Customized finishing
-- Select paint colors from a wide variety of RAL tints
-- NDD – Ninz Digital Decor, graphic images applied with
special ink jets and protected by a transparent topcoat.
Infinite varieties of customizable decorations in harmo-
ny with specific door settings
-- Stainless steel handles
-- Colored handles
Packaging for maximum protection
Sturdy wooden crates protect all doors and related acces-
sories
- NDD decorated doors
- Construction sites
- Shipping abroad
- Special transport
NOTE The following optional accessoires make Univer doors irreversible, requir-
Details about optional accessories may be found in the present bro- ing the indication of the door opening direction when the order is placed:
chure in chapters: - SLASH panic bar
- Finishing - Panic bar for secondary leaves
- Accessories for metal doors - Window and ventilation grills
- Panic exit devices - MAC locks
Right-opening (Right) doors are the default selection if opening direc- - ELM/cisa and ELM/mt electric handle
tion is not specified. - Special locks (016 tir- Stel 15)
53

56. Specific optional accessories
UNIVER multipurpose doors
MULTIPURPOSE WINDOW
multipurpose
UNIVER
WITH METAL WINDOW FRAME
Upon request one- and two-leaved doors may be equipped
with round or rectangular windows, with different types
of glass and window frames.
Production limits
Window sizes are standard and the minimum border strips
around the window may not be reduced.
Borders, window position
„Border measurement“ refers to the distance from the
edge of the window to the wall opening of the door.
Elevation for round windows
window dimensions FM H position
Ø 300 minimum 1950 Y=1600
Ø 300 less than 1950 Y=FM H - 350
Ø 400 minimum 2150 Y=1600
Ø 400 1950-2149 Y=1550
Ø 400 less than 1950 Y=FM H - 400
Elevation of rectangular windows Glasses available Shapes available
window dimensions L x H FM H position screened 6,5 mm rectangular
250/300 x 400 minimum 2150 Z=1450 screened crystal 6,5 mm rectangular
250/300 x 400 1950-2149 Z=1350 laminated 3 + 3 mm rectangular, circular
250/300 x 400 less than 1950 Z=FM H - 600 laminated 4 + 4 mm rectangular
chamber 4 + 12 + 4 mm rectangular
b
b
Round window cross section
54 17
a a
Y
Z
Window dimensions min. border dimensions FM L min. Border Window Ø Border
a b
Ø 300 700
200 200
Ø 400 800 Rectangular window cross section
Ø 300 L1 700 + L2 400 50 15
200 200
Ø 400 L1 800 + L2 400
Ø 300 L1 700 + L2 700
200 200
Ø 400 L1 800 + L2 800
250 x 400 650 Border Window LxH Border
200 200
300 x 400 700
250 x 400 L1 650 + L2 400
200 200
300 x 400 L1 700 + L2 400 NOTE
The positions indicated above are standard.
250 x 400 L1 650 + L2 650 Different positions may be considered as long as they respect the
200 200 minimum „a“ and „b“ border strips. The window itself may not be
300 x 400 L1 700 + L2 700
supplied separately except for replacements. It is always advisable to
equip doors with windows with a closing regulator.
54

57. Specific optional accessories
UNIVER multipurpose doors
MULTIPURPOSE WINDOW
multipurpose
UNIVER
WITH RUBBER WINDOW FRAME
On request, one- and two-leaved doors may be equipped
with round or rectangular windows, with laminated 3 + 3
mm glass framed with a black rubber EPDM profile.
The corners of rectangular windows are rounded (radius
of approx. 100 mm).
Production limits
Window sizes are standard and the minimum window bor-
der strip measurements may not be reduced.
Borders, window position
“Border measurement” refers to the distance from the
edge of the window to the wall opening of the door.
Elevation of round windows
window dimensions FM H position
Ø 300 minimum 1950 Y=1600
Ø 300 less than 1950 Y=FM H - 350
Ø 400 minimum 2000 Y=1600
Ø 400 less than 2000 Y=FM H - 400 Round and rectangular window cross sections
39 11
Elevation of rectangular windows
window dimensions L x H FM H position
300 x 500 minimum 1950 Z=1500
300 x 500 less than 1950 Z=FM H - 450
400 x 700 minimum 2050 Z=1500
Round Ø window
400 x 700 less than 2050 Z=FM H - 550 Border Rectangular window Border
Window dimensions minimum border FM L min. dimensions
b
b
a b
300 700
a a 200 200
Y
Z
400 800
300 L1 700 + L2 400
200 200
400 L1 800 + L2 400
300 L1 700 + L2 700
200 200
NOTE 400 L1 800 + L2 800
The positions indicated above are standard.
Different positions may be considered as long as they respect the mini- 300 x 500 700
200 200
mum “a” and “b” borders. It is always advisable for doors with win- 400 x 700 800
dows to be equipped with door closers for controlled closing.
300 x 500 L1 700 + L2 400
200 200
400 x 700 L1 800 + L2 400
300 x 500 L1 700 + L2 700
200 200
400 x 700 L1 800 + L2 800
55

58. Specific optional accessories
UNIVER multipurpose doors
FRAME EXTENSIONS FOR UNIVER DOORS
multipurpose
UNIVER
IM 11
Doorframe
Frame extensions to be mounted in addition to the Univer
opening -3mm
frame acting as wall cladding. Made of „Sendzimir“ proc-
on each side
essed hot-galvanized sheet metal and painted the same
color as the doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders. Pro- Wall opening
file on three sides, upper corners with 45 degree joint, fix-
ing with screws and plugs (screws and plugs not included).
73
IM 11: for 50mm door thickness, for installation on 70mm (min.) wall
thickness Frame extension IM 11
IM 13
Telescopic frame extension to be screwed to the Univer
doorframe acting as wall cladding. Consists of two over-
lapping profiles with a 25mm adjustable range. Made of Doorframe
„Sendzimir“ processed hot-galvanized sheet metal paint- opening -3mm
ed the same color as the doorframe with epoxy-polyester on each side
powders. Profile on three sides, upper corners with 90 de- Wall opening
gree joint.
Complete with fastener screws. To mount the frame ex-
tension, fixing holes need to be drilled into doorframe on 50
site. Combine with sealing to conceal the screw heads.
Frame extension IM 13
IM 13: for 50mm door thickness, for installation on 125mm (min.)
wall thickness
VENTILATION grate
Ventilation grate made of either black or white PVC, 482
x 99 mm (air passage approx. 150 cm2). The opening direc-
tion of the door needs to be specified.
Minimum FML = 650 mm
200
56

59. Specific optional accessories
UNIVER multipurpose doors
THREE-POINT SECUR LOCK FOR UNIVER DOOR
multipurpose
UNIVER
The SECUR version for Univer provides a more reliable
door closure. Activating the lock with a key blocks the leaf
in the frame at three points: in the center with the latch
bolt, above with the rod that inserts into the upper strike
box and below with the rod that inserts into the lower
strike box.
ATTENTION
Not available in the anti panic version. upper strike box lower strike box (bushing)
Additional locking points
FF REBATE SEALING
FF sealing in black extruded profile to be pressed into the
dedicated groove of the perimetral frame.
FF sealing in black extruded profile self-adhesive for ap-
plication to the central joint of two-leaved doors.
NOTE
Upon request sealing supplied for single doors to be cut and mounted
on site.
57

60. Door cross sections - Measurements
UNIVER multipurpose doors
One-leaved doors Doors without lower threshold
multipurpose
UNIVER
Horizontal cross section Vertical cross section
Doorframe opening = FM L -74
Exterior doorframe = FM H +13
+15
Wall opening FM H +5
Doorframe opening
= FM H -72
+20
Wall opening FM L +10
Exterior doorframe = FM L +32
FFL
Doors with internal and external lower threshold Doors with internal lower threshold
Vertical cross section Vertical cross section
Exterior doorframe =FM H +34
Exterior doorframe =FM H +13
+15
Wall opening FM H +5
Doorframe opening
+15
Wall opening FM H +5
= FM H -72
Doorframe opening
= FM H -72
FFL
FFL
32
Two-leaved doors
Horizontal cross section
Doorframe opening = FM L - 74
Active leaf opening = L1 - 82
L2 L1
+20
Wall opening FM L +10 = L1 + L2
Exterior doorframe = FM L + 32
Leaf thickness NOTE +20 +15
MULTIPURPOSE The tolerances FM L +10 , FM H +5 of the indicated measurements
50 mm
make it easier to fill the gap between the wall and the doorframe with
cement mortar. For dry wall installation, the holes must be precise and
greater tolerance ranges should not be employed.
FFL = Finished Floor Level
58

61. Installation methods
UNIVER multipurpose doors
INSTALLATION WITH ANCHORS FOR MORTAR FIXING ANCHOR POSITIONING
multipurpose
UNIVER
One-leaved doors
Right opening Left opening
For mortar fixing, appropriate cuts will need to be created
in the walls (section 80 x 200 mm) or the anchors should be
fixed with expansion screws. The anchors should be bent
and blocked inside the wall. For best mechanical hold, the
space between the doorframe and the masonry should al-
ways be filled with concrete mortar or polyurethane foam.
Two-leaved doors
Right opening
INSTALLATION FOR EXPANSION SCREWS FIXING
For the installation with expansion screws, the anchors
serve as spacers and should not be bent. Using Würth
type art. 0910436112 plugs or similar (supplied at the
customer’s expense), installation is done with expansion
screws into the pre-drilled holes present on the frame.
For the best mechanical hold, the space between the
doorframe and the masonry should always be filled with
concrete mortar or polyurethane foam.
Left opening
59

62. Order measurements
UNIVER multipurpose doors
ORDER MEASUREMENTS
multipurpose
UNIVER
Wall Opening Doorframe opening
One-leaved doors
PT L = FM L - 74
PT H = FM H - 40
Two-leaved doors
PT L = FM L - 74
PT H = FM H - 40
One-leaved door FM L x FM H PT L x PT H
standard dimensions doorframe opening
800 x 2050 / 2150 726 x 2010 / 2110
900 x 2050 / 2150 826 x 2010 / 2110
1000 x 2050 / 2150 926 x 2010 / 2110
1100 x 2050 / 2150 1026 x 2010 / 2110
1200 x 2050 / 2150 1126 x 2010 / 2110
1350 x 2050 / 2150 1276 x 2010 / 2110
semi-standard dimensions
from 500 to 1345 x 2050 / 2150 from 426 to 1266 x 2010 / 2110
non-standard dimensions
from 540 to 1350 x from 1780 to 2150 from 466 to 1276 x from 1740 to 2110
Two-leaved doors FM L (L1+L2) x FM H PT L x PT H
standard dimensions doorframe opening
1150 ( 750 + 400) x 2050 / 2150 1076 x 2010 / 2110
1200 ( 800 + 400) x 2050 / 2150 1126 x 2010 / 2110
1250 ( 800 + 450) x 2050 / 2150 1176 x 2010 / 2110
1300 ( 900 + 400) x 2050 / 2150 1226 x 2010 / 2110
1350 ( 900 + 450) x 2050 / 2150 1276 x 2010 / 2110
1400 (1000 + 400) x 2050 / 2150 1326 x 2010 / 2110
1450 (1000 + 450) x 2050 / 2150 1376 x 2010 / 2110
1600 ( 800 + 800) x 2050 / 2150 1526 x 2010 / 2110
1700 ( 900 + 800) x 2050 / 2150 1626 x 2010 / 2110
1800 ( 900 + 900) x 2050 / 2150 1726 x 2010 / 2110
1900 (1000 + 900) x 2050 / 2150 1826 x 2010 / 2110
2000 (1000 +1000) x 2050 / 2150 1926 x 2010 / 2110
semi-standard dimensions
from 900 (500+400) to 2000 (1000+1000) x 2050 / 2150 from 826 to 1926 x 2010 / 2110
non-standard dimensions
from 900 (500+400) to 2000 (1000+1000) x from 1780 to 2150 from 826 to 1926 x from 1740 to 2110
NOTE
Buyers should be aware that pursuant to and in accordance with Leg- 2040 mm). Unless specified otherwise by the customer, two-leaved
islative Decree dd. 19.09.1994 Nr. 626, resp. of Legislative Decree standard, semi-standard and customized doors are supplied with a
dd. 19.03.1996 Nr. 242, all doors used for emergency exits or routes right-pull opening direction.
60

63. Opening measurements - Encumbrances
UNIVER multipurpose doors
must have a minimum height of 2000 mm (= nominal wall opening
multipurpose
OPENING MEASUREMENTS AND ENCUMBRANCE
UNIVER
WITH 90 DEGREE OPENING
Two-leaved doors with panic bars
One-leaved doors with panic bar
Net passage calculation
panic bar type protrusion one-leaved door two-leaved door
EXUS 125 FML - 226 FML - 378
TWIST 100 FML - 201 FML - 328
SLASH 75 FML - 176 FML - 278
TOUCHBAR 74 FML - 175 FML - 276
z = leaf protrusion L1 + 30
FML + 29
relative to the wall L2 + 75
ENCUMBRANCE WITH 180 DEGREE OPENING -
HANDLE HEIGHT
Two-leaved door
One-leaved door x = L1 + 4 y = L2 + 50
x = FML + 4 h handle = FMH/2 + 50
h handle = FMH/2 + 50
NOTE
The 90 or 180 degree opening of the leaf could be compromised if
handle or door closer protrusions come into contact with the wall.
UNIVER MULTIPURPOSE - GENERAL NOTES Modifications may only be made as indicated in the installation instructions.
All rights reserved. No reproduction (partial or total) without prior Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.
authorization by Ninz. Ninz reserves the right to modify the product.
Installation should be executed by qualified technicians.
61

64. “safer because
they are sturdier“

65. PROGET NINZ Doors
MULTIPURPOSE vERSION
FEATURES 64 - 67
SPECIFIC OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES - WINDOWS 68 - 74
DOOR CROSS SECTIONS - MEASUREMENTS 75
STANDARD INSTALLATION METHODS 76 - 77
ORDER MEASUREMENTS 78
OPENING MEASUREMENTS - MAXIMUM ENCUMBRANCE 79
All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced technical changes to the contents of this brochure.
Closures are typically used for internal compartmentalization and have been designed for this purpose.

66. Features
PROGET multipurpose doors
THE MULTIPURPOSE DOOR IN A CLASS OF ITS OWN
multipurpose
PROGET
„Indisputable quality“
-- Especially sturdy door for safe functioning over time
-- Built to order for all kinds of requests
-- Fully galvanized door, including the “hidden” parts
-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet
metal
-- Corrosion protection also provided along cut edges of
the metal sheets
-- Painted with epoxy-polyester thermoset powders in a
180 degrees (Celsius) oven
-- Substantial paint layer (70 microns plus)
-- Optimal corrosion resistance demonstrated by 500 hour
salt-fog test
-- Unaffected by severe climate changes, demonstrated by
2000 hours with +60° to -10° cycles at 75% humidity
-- Finishing with high-quality aesthetics
-- Orange skin anti-scratch structured paint
-- Customizable with wide selection of RAL colors
“Practicality of use”
-- Truly sturdy frame that facilitates anchoring to the wall
-- Suitable for all types of walls
-- Ample size range
-- Wide variety of accessories
-- Easy installation
“Versatility” One-leaved doors
-- Very wide field of application
-- Can be combined with various frame types
-- Installation onto any wall type
-- Installation with a block frame possible
-- May be ordered with marking for external use
“Manufacturing technology”
-- Manufacturing in modern and functional facilities
which employ the latest technologies to maintain high
quality levels and product uniformity
-- The entire production process - from raw materials to
painted and packaged products - takes place inside
Ninz’s own facilities, ensuring a 360 degree door control
Opening direction
Opening direction needs to be indicated while ordering
Left Left Right
Right Left Left Right
Right
Two-leaved doors
NOTE
The colors represented in the photos are not standard.
Door closer provided upon request only.
64

67. Features
PROGET multipurpose doors
STANDARD ELEMENTS
multipurpose
PROGET
which comprise Proget fire doors:
Door leaf
-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet
metal, press folded and electro welded
-- Perimetral rebate on 3 sides, flat at the bottom
-- Internally reinforced with hot-galvanized steel profiles
-- Heat-insulated treated mineral wool packing that is rigidly
joined to the sheet metal
-- Internal stiffeners for overhead door closer and panic bar
-- Single thickness of 60 mm
Standard frame
-- Sturdy profile with a sizeable cross section
-- Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet metal
-- Equipped with special assembly brackets
-- Grooves for rebeate sealing
-- Standard installation via anchors for mortar fixing
-- Upon request installation via expansion or installation
screws
-- Lower spacer, mounting template
-- Rests on finished flooring without rebate
-- Strike plates in PA6 black nylon for lock bolt and safety bolts
-- Assembly required for doorframes
Hinges
-- Nr. 2 three-wing hinges for each leaf
-- of which one ball-bearing hinge with screws for vertical
adjustment of the leaf, marked as per EN 1935, clas-
sified for up to 160 kg load, 200.000 cycles durability,
suitable for fire door use
-- and one hinge with self-closing spring
Safety bolts
-- Nr. 1 sturdy safety bolt applied on hinge side leaf edge
Locking mechanism
-- Reversible locking mechanism with bolt and central
latch
-- Insert with patent key, Euro profile cylinder ready
Handle
-- Handle in black PA6 nylon with steel core
-- Steel installation plate with cylinder hole
-- Backplate in black PA6 nylon
-- Fastener screws and patent key insert
NOTE
Cylinder and sealing provided on request only.
The handle requires assembly.
65

68. Features
PROGET multipurpose doors
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
multipurpose
PROGET
which comprise Proget multipurpose doors:
Locking mechanism on secondary leaf
-- “Flush-bolt” automatic latching of the passive leaf
-- Lever control for unlocking
Upper coupling system for the secondary leaf
-- Secondary leaf lock activated device which inserts rod
into the upper strike box
-- Upper strike box in pierced steel with steel roller
Lower coupling system for the secondary leaf
-- Vertical rod with steel point which inserts into lower
strike box
-- Lower floor catch (floor-mounted bushing) made of
black nylon with rebate stopper
Identification plate
-- Metal tag with door identification data
Finishing
-- Standard paint with epoxy-polyester thermoset pow-
ders in a 180 degrees oven, orange skin, anti-scratch
finishing
-- Standard pastel turquoise color, lighter tone for the leaf
(NCS4020-B50G), darker tone for the frame (NCS5020-
B50G
Standard packaging
-- Single leaf wrapped into stretchable polyethylene (PE)
film
-- Single packaging for each doorframe with stretchable
polyethylene (PE) film
-- Palletized on wooden pallets
Door weight kg/m2 of wall opening
1 leaf 29
2 leaves 26
NOTE
If the door ever needs to be repainted, follow the precise instructions
on the “painting” page.
66

69. Features
PROGET multipurpose doors
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
multipurpose
PROGET
A wide variety of accessories and surface finishes are avail-
able on request for maximum value enhancement of Pro-
get doors to your own specific needs.
The proper accessories can help resolve:
Safety-related needs
-- Doors for panic exits (see panic bars)
-- Doors for emergency exits (see emergency exit handles)
-- Three-point locking mechanism
Installation and utilization needs
-- Special frames
-- Frame extensions
-- Floor-mounted floor catch in galvanized steel
-- Drip steel-profile
-- Special installation screws
-- Kick and protection plates
-- Rectangular windows, standard or built to order
-- Round windows
-- Wide variety of grates
Access-related control issues
-- Electrically-activated lock mechanisms
-- Electric handle mechanisms
-- Magnetic blocking mechanisms
Performance enhancing
-- Sealing
-- Cylinders
-- Door closers
-- Special handles
Customized finishing
-- Select paint colors from a wide variety of RAL tints
-- NDD – Ninz Digital Decor, graphic images applied with
special ink jets and protected by a transparent topcoat.
Infinite varieties of customizable decorations in harmo-
ny with specific door settings
-- Stainless steel handles
-- Colored handles
Packaging for maximum protection
Sturdy wooden crates protect all doors and related acces-
sories
- NDD decorated doors
- Construction sites
- Shipping abroad
- Special transport
NOTE
Details about optional accessories may be found in the present bro-
chure in chapters:
- Finishing
- Accessories for metal doors
- Panic exit devices
67

70. Specific optional accessories - Windows
PROGET multipurpose doors
MULTIPURPOSE WINDOW
multipurpose
PROGET
WITH METAL WINDOW FRAME
Upon request one- and two-leaved doors may be equipped
with round or rectangular windows, with different types
of glass and window frames.
Production limits
Window sizes are standard and the minimum border strips
around the window may not be reduced.
Borders, window position
“Border measurement” refers to the distance from the
edge of the window to the wall opening of the door.
Elevation for round windows
window dimensions FM H position
Ø 300 minimum 1950 Y=1600
Ø 300 less than 1950 Y=FM H - 350
Ø 400 minimum 2150 Y=1600
Ø 400 from 1950 to 2149 Y=1550
Ø 400 less than 1950 Y=FM H - 400
Round window cross section
Elevation for rectangular windows
window 54 17
dimensions L x H FM H position
250/300/400 x 400 minimum 2150 Z=1450
250/300/400 x 400 from 1950 to 2149 Z=1350
250/300/400 x 400 less than 950 Z=FM H - 600
400 x 600 minimum 2150 Z=1250
400 x 600 from 1950 to 2149 Z=1150
Border Window Ø Border
400 x 600 less than 1950 Z=FM H - 800
400 x 1200 minimum 2150 Z=650
400 x 1200 from 1950 to 2149 Z=550
400 x 1200 less than 1950 Z=FM H - 1400
Rectangular window cross section
400 x 600 KIPP minimum 2150 Z=1250
400 x 600 KIPP from 2050 to 2149 Z=1150 50 15
400 x 600 KIPP less than 2050 Z=FM H - 800
min. 250 x 250 Z=as indicated by costumer
Borders, window position
Border Window LxH Border
b
b
a KIPP window cross section
a
Y
with opening on the hinge side
Z
50 13
Border Window LxH Border
68

71. Specific optional accessories - Windows
PROGET multipurpose doors
Window dimensions Window dimensions
multipurpose
min. border dimensions FM L min. min. border dimensions FM L min.
PROGET
a b a b L1 L2
250 x 400 200 200 L1 650 + L2 350
Ø 300 200 200 700
Ø 400 800 300 x 400 200 200 L1 700 + L2 350
400 x 400 200 200 L1 800 + L2 350
400 x 600 200 200 L1 800 + L2 350
Ø 300 200 200 L1 700 + L2 350
Ø 400 L1 800 + L2 350 400 x 1200 200 200 L1 800 + L2 350
Windows made to 200 200 L1 650 + L2 350
order min.250x250
Ø 300 200 200 L1 700 + L2 700
Ø 400 L1 800 + L2 800 400 x 600 KIPP 300 300 L1 1000 + L2 350
250 x 400 200 200 L1 650 + L2 650
250 x 400 200 200 650
300 x 400 200 200 L1 700 + L2 700
300 x 400 200 200 700
400 x 400 200 200 L1 800 + L2 800
400 x 400 200 200 800
400 x 600 200 200 L1 800 + L2 800
400 x 600 200 200 800
400 x 1200 200 200 L1 800 + L2 800
400 x 1200 200 200 800
Windows made to 200 200 L1 650 + L2 650
Windows made to 200 200 650 order min.250x250
order min.250x250
400 x 600 KIPP 300 300 L1 1000 + L2 1000
400 x 600 KIPP 300 300 1000
Glasses available shapes available
screened glass 6,5 mm rectangular
screened crystal glass 6,5 mm rectangular
laminated glass 3 + 3 mm rectangular, circular
laminated glass 4 + 4 mm rectangular
glass chamber 4 + 12 + 4 mm rectangular
screened glass 6,5 mm Kipp rectangular
NOTE
Position and measurements indicated above are for standard.
Different positions may be considered as long as they respect the mini-
mum “a” and “b” border strips. The window itself may not be supplied
separately except for replacements. It is always advisable for doors with
windows to be equipped with door closers for controlled closing.
69

72. Specific optional accessories - Windows
PROGET multipurpose doors
MULTIPURPOSE WINDOW
multipurpose
PROGET
WITH RUBBER WINDOW FRAME
On request, one- and two-leaved doors may be equipped
with round or rectangular windows, with laminated 3 + 3
mm glass framed with a black rubber EPDM profile.
The corners of rectangular windows are rounded (radius
of approx. 100 mm).
Production limits
Window sizes are standard and the minimum border strips
around the window may not be reduced.
Borders, window position
“Border measurement” refers to the distance from the
edge of the window to the wall opening of the door.
Elevation for round windows
window dimensions FM H position
Ø 300 minimum 1950 Y=1600
Ø 300 less than 1950 Y=FM H - 350
Ø 400 minimum 2000 Y=1600
Ø 400 less than 2000 Y=FM H - 400
Round and rectangular window cross sections
Elevation of rectangular windows 39 11
window dimensions L x H FM H position
300 x 500 minimum 1950 Z=1500
300 x 500 less than 1950 Z=FM H - 450
400 x 700 minimum 2050 Z=1500
400 x 700 less than 2050 Z=FM H - 550
Round Ø window
Border Rectangular window Border
b
b
a a Window dimensions minimum border FM L min. dimensions
Y
Z
a b
Ø 300 200 200 700
Ø 400 800
NOTE Ø 300 200 200 L1 700 + L2 350
Ø 400 L1 800 + L2 350
The positions indicated above are standard.
Different positions may be considered as long as they respect the mini-
mum “a” and “b” border strips. The window itself may not be supplied Ø 300 200 200 L1 700 + L2 700
Ø 400 L1 800 + L2 800
separately except for replacements. It is always advisable for doors with
windows to be equipped with door closers for controlled closing.
300 x 500 200 200 700
400 x 700 800
300 x 500 200 200 L1 700 + L2 350
400 x 700 L1 800 + L2 350
300 x 500 200 200 L1 700 + L2 700
400 x 700 L1 800 + L2 800
70

73. Specific optional accessories
PROGET multipurpose doors
vENTILATING GRATES WITH METAL FRAMES min. 200
multipurpose
PROGET
min. 200
To permit continuous air movement through the door, dif-
ferent types of ventilating grates are available upon re-
quest in standard or non-standard formats. The screw-on
metal frames for the ventilating grates are painted the
same color as the leaf using thermoset epoxy-polyester
powders. On request air flow estimates calculated by a
special program can be supplied for the dimensions of the
x
ventilating grates.
x = 200 mm for grate heights up to 1200 mm
x = 500 mm for grate heights over 1200 mm
Grate with steel grate plates
Grate with steel grate plates only. Standard production em-
ploys angled steel grate plates that slope downwards in the
same direction as the door pull. Standard 200 mm elevation
above the finished floor.
Hinge side
Dimensions L x H estimated air flow
300 x 400 500 cm2
400 x 600 1100 cm2
400 x 1200 2500 cm2
to order by request
Grate with steel grate plates and anti-rodent mesh
Steel grate with steel grate plates overlaid with a metal anti-
rodent mesh (11 x 11 x 1 mm sheet). Standard production em-
ploys angled steel grate plates that slope downwards in the
same direction as the door pull. Standard 200 mm elevation
Hinge side
above the finished floor.
Dimensions L x H estimated air flow
300 x 400 400 cm2
400 x 600 900 cm2
400 x 1200 2000 cm2
to order by request
Grate with steel grate plates and anti-insect mesh
Steel grate plate with grate plates overlaid with a metal
anti-insect mesh (5 x 5 x 0,5 mm sheet). Standard produc-
tion employs angled steel grate plates that slope down-
wards in the same direction as the door pull. Standard 200
Hinge side
mm elevation above the finished floor.
Dimensions L x H estimated air flow
300 x 400 400 cm2
400 x 600 800 cm2
400 x 1200 2000 cm2
to order by request
Anti-rodent mesh
Metal frame with metal anti-rodent mesh only (16 x 16 x 3 mm
sheet). Standard 200 mm height above the finished floor.
Dimensions L x H
Hinge side
300 x 400
400 x 600
400 x 1200
to order
71

74. Specific optional accessories
PROGET multipurpose doors
FRAME EXTENSIONS FOR PROGET DOORS
multipurpose
PROGET
IM 1
Frame extensions to be mounted in addition to the Pro-
get frame acting as a wall cladding. Made of „Sendzimir“ Wall opening
processed hot-galvanized sheet metal and painted the
same color as the doorframe with epoxy-polyester pow- Doorframe
ders. Profile on three sides, upper corners with 45 degree opening -3mm
joint, fixing with screws and plugs in groove (screws and on each side
plugs not included). 73
IM 3
Frame extensions to be mounted in addition to the Pro-
get acting as a wall cladding, especially for plasterboard.
Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-galvanized sheet
metal and painted the same color as the doorframe with
Wall opening
epoxy-polyester powders. Profile on three sides, upper
corners with 45 degree joint, fixing with screws and plugs
Doorframe
(screws and plugs not included).
opening -3mm
on each side
73
IM 4
Frame extension to be screwed to the Proget doorframe
acting as a wall cladding. Made of “Sendzimir” processed
hot-galvanized sheet metal painted the same color as
the doorframe with epoxy-polyester powders. Profile on
three sides, upper corners with 90 degree joint. Wall opening
Complete with fastener screws. To mount the frame ex-
tension, fixing holes need to be drilled into doorframe on Doorframe
site. Combine with sealing to conceal the screw heads. opening -3mm
on each side
73
IM 5
Telescopic frame extension to be screwed to the Proget
doorframe acting as a wall cladding for expansion screw
fixing. Consists of two overlapping profiles with a 25mm
adjustable range. Made of “Sendzimir” processed hot-gal-
vanized sheet metal painted the same color as the door- Wall opening
frame with epoxy-polyester powders. Profile on three
sides, upper corners with 90 degree joint. Doorframe
Complete with fastener screws. To mount the frame ex- opening -3mm
tension pre-drilled holes are available on the frame. Com- on each side
73
bine with sealing to conceal the screw heads.
ventilation Grate
Ventilation grate made of either black or white PVC, 482
x 99 mm (air passage approx. 150 cm2). The opening direc-
tion of the door needs to be specified.
FM L minimum = 700 mm
200
Dimensions estimated air flow
482 x 99 150 cm²
72

75. Specific optional accessories
PROGET multipurpose doors
SPECIAL FRAMES FOR PROGET MULTIPURPOSE DOORS
multipurpose
PROGET
Embracing three sided frame for Proget multipurpose
doors with 45 degree corner joints, made of 1,25 mm
thick “Sendzimir” processed galvanized steel sheets. To
be screwed to finished walls, including joints for assembly,
hole-covering caps, sealing and RAL painting with ther-
moset epoxy-polyester powder paints. Pre-drilled screw
holes present on the doorframe.
Installation screws not included.
Order measurements required wall opening doorframe opening Minimum wall thickness for multipurpose doors = 70 mm
FM L (width) FM L FM L - 80 mm
FM H (height) FM H FM H - 40 mm Order measurements = FM
Doorframe opening
20 50
BLOCK FRAME FOR IN THE REVEAL
(TUNNEL) APPLICATIONS
Three sided block frame application of Proget multipur-
pose doors with 45 degrees corner joints, made of 1,25
mm thick “Sendzimir” processed galvanized steel sheets.
To be screwed to finished walls and equipped with 6 in-
tegrated attachment shackles. Includes assembly joints,
hole-covering caps, sealing and RAL painting with ther-
moset epoxy-polyester powder paints. Pre-drilled screw
holes present on the doorframe.
Installation screws not included.
Opening to create (FM L + 70; FM H + 35)
Order measurements required wall opening doorframe opening Order measurements = FM 35
FM L (width) FM L + 70 mm FM L - 80 mm
FM H (height) FM H + 35 mm FM H - 40 mm Doorframe opening
min. 100
20 50
73

76. Specific optional accessories
PROGET multipurpose doors
THREE-POINT LOCKING MECHANISM
multipurpose
PROGET
Upon request for a more reliable closure, one- and two-
leaved Proget multipurpose doors may be delivered with
a three-point lateral lock. In combination with double M1
handle and cylinder. The lock is also available for anti-
panic and emergency push versions. Thus the three-point
locking mechanism can be combined with emergency
handles or with EXUS, TWIST, SLASH type BM panic bars in
conformity with marking.
Additional closure points
STEEL FLOOR CATCH 50 14
Floor-mounted steel floor catch for two-leaved Proget
35
doors. Made of pierced and successively galvanized steel.
Includes rebate stop for the passive leaf, the strike box for
insertion of the rod, Nr. 3 screws and Nr. 3 plugs.
51
To be used in place of the nylon floor catch for doors that
usually remain open and where carts and heavy equip-
18
26
ment pass on a regular basis.
22
FF REBATE SEALING
FF sealing in black extruded profile to be pressed into the
dedicated groove in the perimetral frame and on the cen-
tral joint of two-leaved doors.
NOTE
Upon request sealing supplied for single one-leaved or two-leaved
doors to be cut and mounted on site.
74

77. Door cross sections - Measurements
PROGET multipurpose doors
One-leaved doors Doors without lower threshold
multipurpose
PROGET
Horizontal cross section Vertical cross section
Doorframe opening = FM L -80
Exterior doorframe = FM H +30
Doorframe opening = FM H -40
+15
Wall opening FM H +5
+20
Wall opening FM L +10
Exterior doorframe = FM L +60 FFL
Two-leaved doors
Horizontal cross section
Doorframe opening = FM L -80
Active leaf opening = L1 -81
L2 L1
+20
Wall opening FM L +10 = L1 + L2
Exterior doorframe = FM L +60
Leaf thickness
MULTIPURPOSE 60 mm
NOTE +20 +15
The tolerances FM L +10 , FM H +5 of the indicated measurements
make it easier to fill the gap between the wall and the doorframe with
cement mortar.
For dry wall installation, the holes must be precise and greater toleran-
ce ranges should not be employed.
FFL = Finished floor level
75

78. Standard installation method
PROGET multipurpose doors
INSTALLATION WITH ANCHORS FOR MORTAR FIXING
multipurpose
PROGET
For mortar fixing, appropriate cuts for the anchors will
need to be created in the walls (section 80 x 200 mm) or
fixed with plugs. For fixing with screws the anchors should
be used as spacers and fixed with expansion screws. For
best mechanical hold, the space between the doorframe
and the masonry should always be filled with concrete
mortar or polyurethane foam.
One-leaved doors
FM L = from 500 to 1340 x FM H = from 800 to 1749 FM L = from 500 to 1035 x FM H = from 1750 to 2200
FM L greater than 1036 and/or FM H greater than 2200
NOTE
For proper installation, the cuts for the anchors should be 80 x 200
mm in size.
76

79. Standard installation method
PROGET multipurpose doors
Two-leaved doors
multipurpose
PROGET
FM L = from 850 to 2660 x FM H = from 800 to 1749 FM L = from 850 to 2070 x FM H = from 1750 to 2200
FM L greater than 2070 and/or FM H greater than 2200
INSTALLATION FOR EXPANSION SCREWS FIXING
For the installation with expansion screws, the anchors
serve as spacers and should not be bent. For the best me-
chanical hold, the space between the doorframe and the
masonry should always be filled with concrete mortar or
polyurethane foam.
WALL SCREWS
50
For direct wall installations or installation onto subframes,
60
special expansion screws should be used without plugs.
80
100
Please see the “door accessories” pages for more details.
Wall screws available
77

80. Order measurements
PROGET multipurpose doors
ORDER MEASUREMENTS
multipurpose
PROGET
Wall Opening Doorframe opening
One-leaved door FM L x FM H PT L x PT H
standard dimensions doorframe opening
800 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 720 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
900 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 820 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1000 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 920 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1100 x 2050 / 2150 1020 x 2010 / 2110
1200 x 2050 / 2150 1120 x 2010 / 2110
1300 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1220 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1340 x 2050 / 2150 1260 x 2010 / 2110
semi-standard dimensions
from 500 to 995 x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 from 420 to 915 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
non-standard dimensions
from 500 to 1340 x from 1750 to 2670 from 420 to 1260 x 1710 / 2630
Two-leaved doors FM L (L1+L2) x FM H PT L x PT H
standard dimensions doorframe opening
1150 ( 800 + 350 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1070 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1200 ( 800 + 400 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1120 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1250 ( 800 + 450 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1170 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1250 ( 900 + 350 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1170 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1300 ( 900 + 400 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1220 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1350 ( 900 + 450 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1270 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1350 (1000 + 350 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1270 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1400 (1000 + 400 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1320 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1450 (1000 + 450 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1370 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1600 ( 800 + 800 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1520 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1700 ( 900 + 800 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1620 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1800 ( 900 + 900 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1720 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1800 (1000 + 800 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1720 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
1900 (1000 + 900 ) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1820 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
2000 (1000 + 1000) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 1920 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
semi-standard dimensions
from 890 (540+ 350) to 2000 (1000 + 1000) x 2000 / 2050 / 2150 from 810 to 1920 x 1960 / 2010 / 2110
non-standard dimensions
from 850 (500 + 350) to 2660 (1330 + 1330) x from 1750 to 2670 from 770 to 2580 x from 1710 to 2630
19.03.1996 Nr. 242, all doors that are used as emergency routes or
NOTE exits must have a minimum height of 2000 mm (= nominal wall opening
Buyers should be aware that pursuant to and in accordance with Leg- 2040 mm). Doors that are wider than they are tall are not permitted.
78

81. Opening measurements - Encumbrances
PROGET multipurpose doors
islative Decree dd. 19.09.1994 Nr. 626, resp. of Legislative Decree dd.
multipurpose
PROGET
OPENING MEASUREMENTS AND ENCUMBRANCE
WITH 90 DEGREE OPENING
Two-leaved doors with panic bars
One-leaved doors with panic bar
Net passage calculation
panic bar type protrusion one-leaved door two-leaved door
EXUS 125 FM L- 245 FM L- 410
TWIST 100 FM L- 220 FM L- 360
SLASH 75 FM L- 195 FM L- 310
TOUCHBAR 74 FM L- 194 FM L- 308
z = leaf protrusion relative to the wall FM L+ 27 L1 + 35, L2+75
ENCUMBRANCE WITH 180 DEGREE OPENING -
HANDLE HEIGHT
Two-leaved door
One-leaved door x = L1 + 1 y = L2 + 42 b = 130
x = FM L - 7 h handle = 1050
h handle = 1050
NOTE
The 90 or 180 degree opening of the leaf may be compromised if han-
dle or door closer protrusions come into contact with the wall.
PROGET MULTIPURPOSE - GENERAL NOTES executed by qualified technicians. Modifications may only be made as
All rights reserved. indicated in the installation instructions. Original NINZ replacement
No reproduction (partial or total) without prior authorization by Ninz. parts must be used for all repair work.
Ninz reserves the right to modify the product. Installation should be
79

82. “the ideal finish for
every type of surrounding”

83. Painting and NDD® decorations
for metal doors
PAINTING 82 - 83
NDD® - NINZ DIGITAL DECOR 84
DECORATION GROUPS 85
FEATURES 86
EXAMPLES 87
We reserve the right to make unannounced technical changes to the contents of this brochure.

84. Painting
For NINZ doors
PAINTING
Painting
This standard door is painted with thermoset powders, anti-scratch orange skin
and semi-glossy finish (except for certain colors). The paint is particularly resistant
and offers a pleasant finish for interior applications. Choose from a wide range
of RAL colors.
STANDARD COLORS WITH NO PRICE SUPPLEMENT
Paint for interior use (group 01) with turquoise pastel
colored epoxy-polyester powders - lighter tone for the
leaf (NCS4020-B50G) and darker for the frame (NCS5020-
B50G). The tonalities of the frame and the door leaf are
represented on the photo to the right.
SPECIAL COLORS WITH PRICE SUPPLEMENT Group 02:
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
Paint for interior use (groups 02 and 03) available in a va- 1013 1015 5010 5024 6000 7016 7024 7035
riety of RAL colors with epoxy-polyester powders. Doors
must be protected from atmospheric agents. Sunlight
fades the colors. RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
7038 8011 9001 9002 9010 9011 9016 9018
Distinct from other RAL tints, metallic tinted paints RAL
9006, RAL 9007 (group 3) and RAL 9006 E (group 04)
present a finish with a wrinkled structure that requires Group 03:
pre-approval of a sample. RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
1001 1003 3000 3003 3020 5012 5015 6005
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
7001 7004 7011 7030 7032 7037 7040 7042
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
7047 8017 8019 9005 9006* 9007*
*requires pre­approval of a sample.
82

85. Painting
For NINZ doors
SPECIAL COLORS FOR EXTERIOR USE Group 04:
PAINTING
WITH PRICE SUPPLEMENTS RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
1013E 3000E 5010E 6005E 7016E 7024E 7035E 9002E
Paint for exterior use (group 04) with polyester powders
in various RAL tints.
RAL RAL NCS NCS
9006E* 9010E 4020E 5020E
*requires pre­approval of a sample.
SPECIAL COLORS BY REQUEST Group 05:
WITH PRICE SUPPLEMENTS Colors by request only
Paint available for interior and exterior use (group 05)
with epoxy-polyester and polyester (respectively) pow-
ders in the requested RAL tints. Group 05 does not include
special colors, such as metallic, mica, smooth or wrinkled
texture and other sample tints like Pantone, NCS, etc.
Cleaning Retouching
Water and neutral soap are recommended for the regu- On request, the Ninz company also provides touch-up
lar cleaning of our products. Do not use common clean- paint (nitro/synthetic) in 0,25 or 1,00 kg cans in the neces-
ing products (see detergents) and/or other solvents. We sary RAL tint.
shall not be held responsible for any problems that arise if
these guidelines are not respected.
Re-painting Protection
-- For re-painting, use the following procedure: Since the doors have been designed for normal interior
-- sand and carefully wipe away any dust from the surfaces use, they should always be protected from atmospheric
-- apply a base layer of opaque 2-component epoxide - we agents and direct sunlight.
recommend EPOX product Nr. 5203 beige 0059 (made by Exterior uses require paints that are specially designed for
ALCEA, in Milan) this kind of application (see groups 04, 05).
-- repaint the surfaces with your choice of lacquers or paints.
WARNING!
Application to exterior doors requires for the adoption of various meas­
ures for preventing product degradation, such as:
1. The door should always be protected from bad weather. The door can
be permanently damaged if water seeps inside the door leaf. Provide
canopies or roofing to protect newly installed and existing products.
2. Avoid choosing darker colors when the doors will be exposed to
direct sunlight. The sheet metal can heat up and cause warping of the
door leaf that may compromise the functionality of the door itself.
An artifact of the printing process is that the colors depicted here may
not correspond exactly to the colors of actual doors. Please see the
RAL or NCS samples.
83

86. NDD® - Ninz Digital Decor
Digital printing for NINZ doors
Ninz Digital Decor
NDD®
NDD provides clients
with an infinite number
of graphic possibilities
applicable to the
surfaces of NINZ doors.
DESCRIPTION
NDD - Ninz Digital Decor decorative painting. NDD® - Ninz Digital Decor introduces style and design to
Graphic illustrations are applied directly to the flat sur- metal door products. Ninz doors can be directly printed with
faces of the door leaf after it has been painted with a base either your company’s logo or designs, materials and sym-
coat of polymerized powders. Painting with high-resolu- bols selected from a wide variety of NDD®, or also with your
tion digital print using special ink jets. The application of preferred artwork or customized images. NDD® introduces
an additional layer of transparent coating ensures optimal innovations to doors as an architectural entity; introducing
protection of the decorative paint. NDD® can create added value on socio-cultural, economic
Decorative NDD painting is available for the entire range and emotional dimensions.
of one- and two-leaved Rever, Univer and Proget doors.
awarded with the The www.ninz.it website illustrates an infinity of continu-
ously updated decorations that have been categorized into
eight groups for rapid review. The groups are listed on the
next page.
Laboratory testing executed on NDD® samples result
500 h exposure test in salt fog good performance, no sign of deterioration encountered
500 h humidity resistance test good performance, no deterioration or loss of surface shine
500 h UVA radiation resistance test good performance, no deterioration or loss of surface shine
Abrasion resistance test after 1000 cycles the decoration was unaltered
Solvent resistance test good performance, no deterioration in the decoration or the background paint
84

87. NDD® - Decoration groups - www.ninz.it
Digital printing for NINZ doors
ARTLINE This group includes a wide selection of famous WOOD This set includes an endless variety of realistic imi-
artworks drawn from ancient history up to the present tations of classic, exotic, special and colored types of wood.
NDD®
day. These extraordinary designs endow the environment
with a special atmosphere as an expression of style.
FANTASY NDD is a data bank of exclusive NINZ images STONES This selection includes an endless variety of real-
and creations. istic imitations of marbles, granites and other stones.
REFINEMENTS Contains an infinite number of NDD dec- PUBLICITY Transforms Ninz doors into a publicity tool
orations and textures created on customer request and for the company and its products. Printing of the logo in-
available and useable for a diverse variety of applications. tegrates the door into the company image. A variety of
actual applications are reported here.
PHOTOGRAPHS This group contains original photos of SYMBOLS Given the particular importance of this group,
country sides, objects, animals, environments, etc., with a special department has been created for workplace safe-
the appropriate foto resolution. ty symbols, room description/labeling symbols, the simple
numbering of rooms, etc.
85

88. NDD® - Specifications
Digital prints for NINZ doors
DECORATIONS FROM OUR DATABASE WOODEN CRATE PACKAGING
NDD®
Doors with decorative NDD painting are supplied with:
-- doorframes in the proposed color
-- door leaf rebate in the base color of the leaf itself
-- hinges in the frame color
-- accessories of the type and finishing according to the Ninz
door price lists and brochures
-- decoration covering the window frame and/or the central
upright, requitre that these are covered with NDD decorat-
ed sheet metal
SPECIAL DECORATIONS The particularity and prestige of NDD decorations requires
a special protection of the doors by packaging them in
New codes and pricing are required for customized deco- special wooden crates with an additional layer of external
rations and decorations that employ colors not listed in nylon wrapping. At the time of ordering, therefore, the
this brochure. In such cases, customers may also be asked additional cost for the wooden crate must be taken into
to indicate where logos and symbols should be positioned consideration. Customers who opt for standard packaging
on the door leaf, via the following forms of support: on pallets must assume full responsibility in case of dam-
age to the product.
-- PC-GENERATED FILE (logos, symbols, designs, etc.) in spe-
cialized “Illustrator” or “Freehand” format. Submit the
file by e-mail or on a CD/DVD-ROM.
-- DIAPOSITIVE with a 36 mm or 6 x 6 image of the picture
uploaded to a PC using a scanner (professional scanner
required). Submit the file (TIF, PDF or JPG format) in
maximum resolution on CD/DVD-ROM.
-- PHOTOGRAPHIC IMAGE made with a digital camera. Sub-
mit the file (TIF, PDF or JPG format) in maximum resolu-
tion on CD/DVD-ROM.
PROTECTION FOR EXTERIORS
The exterior installation of NDD doors requires specific
treatments for preventing the decorations from deterio-
rating over time. The cost supplement covers all door leaf
surfaces except for the leaf rebate.
86

89. NDD® - Example applications
In different environments
EXAMPLE APPLICATIONS IN TYPICAL SURROUNDINGS
NDD®
Airports - Train stations Museums – Historical buildings
Commercial businesses Hospitals – Nursing homes
Sport centers – Stadiums Parking lots
Logistic centers Schools - Universities
Hotels – Residences Offices
87

90. “quality accessories
distinguish the door”

91. Optional accessories for NINZ doors
HANDLES 90 - 92
CYLINDERS 93 - 95
DOOR CLOSERS, CLOSING REGULATORS 96 - 99
SEALINGS - KICK PLATES, DRIP PROFILES - SUBFRAMES 100 - 101
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS 102 - 103
ELECTRIC HANDLE 104 - 105
ELECTROMAGNETS, COMMANDS 106 - 107
DOOR-HOLDING SYSTEMS 108 - 109
All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced technical changes
to the contents of this brochure.

92. Black Nylon handles
Standard for REVER - UNIVER - PROGET doors
ACCESSORIES
DOOR HANDLES
doors
By default Rever, Univer and Proget doors include safety
levers coupled with long backplates with cylinder holes.
Each handle set includes a patent key insert, a 9 x 9 square
spindle, fastener screws and spacers.
M1 handles are fire rated consisting of a metal core inside
the lever and a galvanized steel cover plate to protect the
cylinder hole.
The M1 handles have been certified in accordance with
DIN 18273:1997-12.
M1 HANDLE 23 124
Fire rated Univer and Proget doors are equipped by de-
fault with M1-type handles.
166
72
The M1 handle package includes: a pair of black nylon
lever with metal cores and galvanized steel installation
plates, a pair of black nylon backplates with patent-type
Ø20
cylinder hole adaptable for installment of Euro profile cyl-
inders, a 125 mm long 9 x 9 square spindle, fastener screws
67
and spacers. The package includes also the hexagonal key
for setting of the hinges and fastening of the spring screw.
M1 NYLON 6 Handle
Version description functioning use
M1 handle/handle combination
with cylinder hole on both applications in which both door
door opening by handle or key from
sides. To be combined with opening directions are accessible
both sides
locks with an inter-axis without key
distance of 72 mm (015)
M1R HANDLE 23 118
The multi-purpose Univer and Proget doors are equipped
with M1R-type handles.
The M1R handle package includes: a pair of black nylon
72
180
lever handles, a pair of black nylon backplates with pat-
ent-type cylinder holes adaptable for installment of Euro
profile cylinders, a 125 mm long 9 x 9 square spindle, fas- Ø20
tener screws and spacers.
71
M1.R NYLON 6 Handle
Version description functioning use
M1R handle/handle combination
with cylinder hole on both applications in which both door
door opening by handle or key from
sides. To be combined with opening directions are accessible
both sides
locks with an inter-axis without key
distance of 72 mm (015)
NOTE
Handles are considered to be accessories and are not pre-assembled.
Cylinders need to be ordered separately (except for Secur handles).
90

93. Special black Nylon handles
For locks with an inter-axis distance of 72 mm
ACCESSORIES
SPECIAL HANDLES
doors
Rever, Univer and Proget doors may be equipped on re-
quest with handles with special functions other than
those provided by standard handles.
Versions description functioning use
M2 handle/ doorknob combina-
tion with cylinder hole on applications in which only one of the
the doorknob side requires the key
both sides. To be combined door opening directions is accessible
for opening
with locks with an inter-axis with a key
distance of 72 mm (015)
M4 doorknob/ doorknob combi-
nation with cylinder hole on both sides require the key for applications in which both door
both sides For combination opening. The doorknobs serve for opening directions are accessible by
with locks with an inter-axis pushing or pulling the door key only
distance of 72 mm (015)
M5 plate/plate combination with
cylinder hole on both sides. applications in technical rooms with
both sides require the key for
For combination with locks doors that usually remain closed and
opening
with an inter-axis distance of require keys for opening
72 mm (015)
M9 doorknob/plate combination
with cylinder hole on both both sides require the key for ope- applications in which both door
sides. For combination with ning The doorknob serves for pulling opening directions are accessible by
locks with an inter-axis the door key only
distance of 72 mm (015)
M11 handle/ handle combination
without cylinder hole. For
opening is possible at any time using applications in which the door never
combination with locks with
the handle needs to be locked
an inter-axis distance of 72
mm (015)
M20 handle/handle and doorknob
combination for interior closure using thumbturn latch from
closure. For combination inside. Emergency opening from typical closure for bathroom doors
with locks with star-shaped outside with screwdriver
spindles only (Stel 15)
NOTE
Models M2, M4, M5, M9 and M20 cannot be combined with the
three-point locking mechanism.
Handles are considered to be accessories and assembly is required.
Cylinders need to be ordered separately.
91

94. Colored handles - Stainless steel handles
For locks with an inter-axis distance of 72 mm
ACCESSORIES
COLORED DOOR HANDLES 23 127
doors
On request, painted resin handles can be provided which
match or provide better contrast with the base color of
the door.
166
72
M1C and M2C handles are fire rated like the M1 han-
dle, and have also been certified in accordance with DIN
18273:1997-12. Ø20
The M1C and M2C handles package consist of: one pair of
lever handles (M1C) or the handle/ doorknob combination
75
(M2C) made of polypropylene (PP) with a metal core and
galvanized steel installation plate, a pair of polypropylene M1C colored RAL1023
(PP) backplates with a Euro profile cylinder hole, a 125
mm long 9 x 9 square spindle, fastener screws and spacers.
Colors available:
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
1023 7016 7035 9006* 9010
*light aluminum
Versions description functioning use
M1C handle/handle combination
with cylinder hole on both applications in which both door
door opening by handle or key from
sides. For combination with opening directions are accessible
both sides
locks with an inter-axis without a key
distance of 72 mm (015)
M2C handle/doorknob combina-
tion with cylinder hole on applications in which only one of the
the doorknob side requires the key
both sides. For combination door opening directions works with
for opening
with locks with an inter-axis a key
distance of 72 mm (015)
STAINLESS STEEL DOOR HANDLES 23 127
On request, satin-finished stainless steel AISI 304 levers
and backplates can be provided which endow the prod-
166
72
uct with a higher quality while at the same time ensuring
optimal corrosion resistance and a noteworthy robustness
of the entire set. Ø20
In addition, M1X and M2X handles are equipped with a
return spring that maintains perfect alignment with the
75
geometry of the door.
They are mounted on a galvanized steel mechanism and
are supplied with a 125 mm long 9 x 9 square spindle, fas- M1 INOX handle
tener screws and spacers.
Versions description functioning use
M1X handle/handle combination
with cylinder hole on both applications in which both door ope-
door opening by handle or key from
sides. For combination with ning directions are accessible without
both sides
locks with an inter-axis a key
distance of 72 mm (015)
M2X handle/doorknob combina-
tion with cylinder hole on sostituire con „applications in which
the doorknob side requires the key for
both sides. For combination only one of the door opening directions
opening
with locks with an inter-axis works with a key
distance of 72 mm (015)
NOTE
The M2C and M2X models are not combinable with the 3 point locking
mechanism. Handles are considered as accessories and require assem-
bly. Cylinders need to be ordered separately.
92

95. Cylinders
For REVER - UNIVER - PROGET doors
ACCESSORIES
CYLINDERS
doors
On request Rever, Univer and Proget doors with standard
locks (Std 015) or three-point locking mechanisms (3vie
PRO) may be supplied with a Euro profile cylinder with
three keys.
They may also be provided in unique coding or group
coded versions, or in combination with unique or group
mastering.
Cylinders to pass
L L
Double nickel-plated cylinder equipped with 3 keys
Versions available Lengths available for door leaf thickness
standard cylinder 40/40 60 mm
single coded cylinder 35/35 50 mm
30/30 40 mm
group coded cylinder
sample key coded cylinder
single mastered cylinder
group mastered cylinder
ATTENTION
It is important to specify MAC lock combinations in the order.
Cylinders to pass for thumbturn latch
Double nickel-plated cylinder with chrome-plated thumb-
turn latch equipped with 3 keys
Versions available Lengths available for door leaf thickness
standard cylinder with thumbturn latch 40/40 60 mm
mastered cylinder with thumbturn latch 35/35 50 mm
mastered and emergency cylinder with thumbturn latch 30/30 40 mm
NOTE
Cylinders are considered to be accessories and assembly is required.
Cylinders to be combined with locks of NINZ doors must meet DIN
18254 standards.
Main, master and/or emergency key (or keys) should be ordered sepa-
rately - they are not included with the cylinder.
93

96. Cylinders
For REVER - UNIVER - PROGET doors
ACCESSORIES
CYLINDERS FOR COMBINATION WITH PANIC BARS
AND EMERGENCY HANDLES
doors
Standard panic bars and emergency handles are supplied
with a Euro profile cylinder with three keys.
Cylinders with single coding, grouped coding or in combi-
nation with single or grouped mastering.
Cylinders not to pass
Half nickel-plated cylinder equipped with 3 keys
Versions available Lengths available for door leaf thickness
standard half cylinder 40/10 60 mm
single coded half cylinder 35/10 50 mm
group coded half cylinder 30/10 40 mm
sample key coded half cylinder
single mastered half cylinder
group mastered half cylinder
ATTENTION
It is important to specify MAC lock combinations in the order.
Cylinders to pass in combination with EXUS DC
panic bars
L L
Double nickel-plated cylinder equipped with 3 keys.
Versions available Lengths available for door leaf thickness
standard cylinder 45/40 60 mm
single coded cylinder 40/40 50 mm
group coded cylinder 35/35 40 mm
sample key coded cylinder
single mastered cylinder
group mastered cylinder
NOTE
Cylinders are considered to be accessories and assembly is required.
Cylinders to be combined with the locks of NINZ doors must meet DIN
18254 standards.
Main, master and/or emergency key (or keys) should be ordered sepa-
rately - they are not included with the cylinder.
94

97. Cylinders, Keys
For REVER - UNIVER - PROGET doors
ACCESSORIES
CONFIGURED AS NEEDED!
master key opens
doors
all the doors
NINZ asks its partners to specify the system in the form of a
key plan which, when prepared with care, serves as a map
for optimizing the required intervention times (from order
to installation) while ensuring that the mastering system main keys
meets the specific needs being requested. open groups
of doors
Here are a few of the configurations that are available:
1) Standard
Cylinders with different keys.
2) Single coded
Cylinders with the same keys.
3) Grouped coded
Cylinders from the same group are coded alike.
4) Main/master key systems
Grouped master key system in which each cylinder can be
opened with its own key or with a master key that can
open cylinders from one group but not others; a general Key plan example for master key systems.
master key can open all cylinders from all different groups.
Standard cylinders closed from the interior with a thumb-
turn latch cannot be opened with the main/master key.
5) Frictioned emergency
“Frictioned cylinder” means that the main or master key
can only open doors that have not been closed from in-
side, while the same doors can still be opened with the
emergency key.
6) Encrypted cylinder with sample key
Sample key coding allows for cylinders to be coded on the
basis of a sample key supplied by the customer.
KEYS
The order should specify the number of keys to be sup-
plied with the mastered cylinders.
Versions available
normal key opens the single door only
main key opens all doors from the same group
master key opens all the doors that have grouped mastering
emergency key opens all doors
Key
95

98. Door closer
For REVER - UNIVER - PROGET doors
ACCESSORIES
DOOR CLOSER
doors
The door closer regulates the closure of the door so that
the door leaf returns properly to its final closed position
after being released.
Regulation is influenced by closure force, speed and the
final impact.
Although Univer and Proget doors are equipped with
spring hinges for automatic closure, the installation of
door closers is recommended for wide and/or heavy doors
and/or in the presence of windows on the leaf.
The door closer product is addressed by EU directive 89/106/
CEE, which means it is subject to marking.
CP1 with scissor arm
marked in conformity with EN 1154.
Rever, Univer and Proget doors are available, on request,
with an overhead CP1 door closer with a silver-colored
scissor arm.
The CP1 can be used for fire rated doors and is classified
for 180° closure with a force varying from 3 to 4.
Proget doors ordered with CP1 are provided with pre-
drilled installation holes on the door leaf and the frame.
Standard Rever, Univer and Proget doors include internal
reinforcements for the CP1 application.
Optional colors:
RAL RAL RAL
6
dark bronze 9016 9005
NOTE
51 51 51
Arm protrusion = 290 mm
CP1 UNIVER CP1 PROGET CP1 REVER
CP2 with slide channel
marked in conformity with EN 1154.
On request Rever, Univer and Proget doors are available
with an overhead CP2 door closer with slide channel. Rela-
tive to the CP1, the advantage of this system is the ab-
sence of a protruding arm.
The CP2 is suited for use on fire rated doors and has been
classified for 180° closure with force level 4.
Proget doors ordered with CP2 are provided with pre-
drilled installation holes on the door leaf and the frame.
Standard Rever, Univer and Proget doors include internal
reinforcements for the CP2 application.
Optional colors:
RAL RAL RAL
5
8
dark bronze 9016 9005
52 52 52
CP2 UNIVER CP2 PROGET CP2 REVER
96

99. Door closers
For UNIVER - PROGET doors
ACCESSORIES
CP2-EMF with slide channel and
electro-mechanical hold open device
doors
marked in conformity with EN 1154 and EN 1155.
The CP2–EMF differs from the CP2 in that it has an electro-
mechanical hold-open device that allows the door leaf to
be locked at an angle ranging from 80° to 120°. During
alarms or power outages, the hold-open device is unlocked
and the door is closed by the door closer.
The CP2-EMF can be used on fire doors and has a maximum
opening range of 120°, with a closing force set at 4.
Proget doors ordered with CP2-EMF are provided with pre-
drilled installation holes on the door leaf and the frame.
Optional colors:
Standard Univer doors include internal reinforcements for
the CP2-EMF application. RAL RAL RAL
dark bronze 9016 9005
17
10
52 52
CP2 EMF UNIVER CP2 EMF PROGET
maximum opening in the absence of obstacles
Model one-leaved door active leaf secondary leaf power supply absorption EC certification standard
CP1 180° 180° 180° - - 0432-BPR-0054 EN 1154
CP2 180° 180° 180° - - 0432-BPR-0051 EN 1154
CP2 EMF 120° 0432-BPR-0051 EN 1154
120° 120° 24 Vcc 58,3 mA
0432-BPR-0025 EN 1155
97

100. Closing regulators
For UNIVER - PROGET fire doors
ACCESSORIES
CLOSING REGULATOR
doors
Closing regulators administer the closure of two-leaved
doors so that the secondary leaf is overlaid on the active
leaf upon final closure. This is why it is mandatory to apply
closing regulators to all two-leaved fire doors.
There are two systems for applying it to the door:
- separated from the self-closing system of the spring
hinge or the door closer
- incorporated into the closure system of the door closer
Closing regulators are addressed by EU directive 89/106/
CEE, which means they are subject to marking.
RC/STD
marked in conformity with EN 1158.
The RC/STD closing regulator device is distinct from the
door closer and is a standard element of all Univer and
Proget two-leaved fire doors.
In Proget doors the closing regulator is inserted into the
upper horizontal groove of the frame, while in Univer
doors it is supplied separately with an anchoring rod to
be installed on site. In comparison with other regulators
which are separate from the door closer, the advantage
of the RC/STD regulator is that it is not visible when the
door is closed.
The RC/STD regulator is suited for use on fire doors and is
classified for forces ranging from 3 to 5.
UNIVER PROGET
RC2 system
marked in conformity with EN 1154 and EN 1158.
On request, two-leaved Univer and Proget doors are avail-
able with an RC2 regulator in place of the RC/STD.
The RC2 closing regulator system is incorporated into the
door closer, and consists of 2 CP2 with force EN 4 with a
slide channel and a regulator integrated in the upper slid-
ing guide. The entire system is silver colored.
The RC2 system presents clear advantages: .
- no protruding door-closer arms
- regulator concealed in the upper guide (even when the
door is open)
- controlled closure of both leaves
The RC2 regulator is suited for use on fire doors and is
classified for both door closers with force EN4.
17
10
Minimum wall opening width of 1200 mm and minimum
of 370 mm for the secondary leaf.
Proget doors ordered with RC2 are provided with pre-
drilled holes for the installation of 2 CP2 door closers on 52 52
the leaves and the slide channel on the frame. The instal-
RC2 UNIVER RC2 PROGET
lation holes in Univer doors need to be drilled on site for
anchoring to the internal reinforcement of the leaves.
Optional colors:
RAL RAL RAL
dark bronze 9016 9005
98

101. Closing regulators
For UNIVER - PROGET fire doors
ACCESSORIES
RC2–EMF1 SYSTEM
marked in conformity with EN 1154, EN 1158 and EN 1155.
doors
The RC2–EMF1 system differs from the RC2 in that it has an
electro-mechanical hold-open device that allows the door
leaf to be locked at an angle ranging from approx. 80°
to 130°. The active leaf is held open by the closing regu-
lator system. During alarms or power outages, the hold-
open system is unlocked and the door is closed by the door
closer. The entire system is provided in the standard silver
color.
.
The RC2-EMF1 system presents multiple advantages:
- possibility of holding the leaves open in the desired position
- no visible magnets
- no protruding door closer arms
- regulator concealed in the upper guide (even when the
17
10
door is open)
- controlled closure of both leaves
The RC2-EMF1 system is suited for use on fire rated doors 52 52
and is classified for both door closers with force level EN4.
Minimum wall opening width of 1200 mm and minimum RC2-EMF1 UNIVER RC2-EMF1 PROGET
of 370 mm for the secondary leaf.
Proget doors ordered with RC2-EMF1 are provided with
pre-drilled installation holes on the door leaf and the Optional colors:
frame. The Univer door series includes internal reinforce-
ments for application of the two door closers. RAL RAL RAL
dark bronze 9016 9005
maximum opening in the absence of obstacles
Model active leaf secondary leaf power supply absorption EC certification standard
RC/STD 180° 180° - - 0425-ICIM-1153 EN 1158
RC2 0432-BPR-0051 EN 1154
180° 180° - -
0432-BPR-0026 EN 1158
0432-BPR-0051 EN 1154
RC2-EMF1 180° 130° 24 Vcc 58,3 mA 0432-BPR-0025 EN 1155
0432-BPR-0026 EN 1158
99

102. Door sweep - Protection plates
For UNIVER - PROGET doors
ACCESSORIES
AUTOMATIC DOOR SWEEP
doors
On request, Univer and Proget doors are available with an
automatic door sweep to prevent air drafts from entering
through the crack between the leaf and the floor.
It complements the FF sealing applied to the frame to pro-
vide better acoustic insulation and better air sealing for
the door.
It is applied on the push side by using screws to attach it
directly to the sheet metal of the door, after which the
mechanism is completely covered with an anodized alu-
minum profile. On request, it can also be provided in the
same color as the door leaf. Push
15
It is applied on site following door installation so that it side
can be adjusted to the actual leaf height.
Lengths avail. FM L active leaf FM L secondary leaf
37
430 mm from 500 to 520 from 407 to 506
530 mm from 521 to 620 from 507 to 606
630 mm from 621 to 720 from 607 to 706
730 mm from 721 to 820 from 707 to 806
830 mm from 821 to 920 from 807 to 906
930 mm from 921 to 1020 from 907 to 1006
1030 mm from 1021 to 1120 from 1007 to 1106
1130 mm from 1121 to 1220 from 1107 to 1206
1230 mm from 1221 to 1320 from 1207 to 1306
1330 mm from 1321 to 1340 from 1307 to 1330
PROTECTIVE PLATES AND KICKPLATES
On request for 1 and 2 leaf Univer and Proget doors, speci-
fying the side of application (pull or push).
Their main function is to protect the parts of the door that
are vulnerable to being scraped by carts, hospital beds, etc.
They are made of AISI 304 satinized stainless steel sheet
metal with a standard height of 230 mm.
For on-site attachment with two-sided adhesive factory
applied on the back, at the bottom of the door (kick plate)
or at handle height (protective plate).
Holes are factory prepared for the passage of the handle panel and cylinder.
230
Protection plates
Holes are factory prepared for the passage of the handle panel and
cylinder.
230
Kick plates
100

103. Drip-steel profile - Wall screws - Subframe
For NINZ doors
ACCESSORIES
DRIP-STEEL PROFILE
doors
On request for Univer and Proget doors. Normally used 26
to prevent condensation from dripping down the door
leaf and puddling beneath the door. The profile is made
of “Sendzimir” processed galvanized sheet metal painted
the color of the door leaf.
29
It is applied to the exterior side of the door on site after be-
ing cut to measure, to be attached with the screws provided.
Lengths avail. FM L door leaf
710 mm to 800
810 mm to 900
910 mm to 1000
1260 mm to 1350
WALL SCREWS FOR FASTENING WITHOUT PLUGS
Field of use: installation of Proget REI 60/120 and multipur-
50
pose doorframes to the wall or subframe using screws but
60
no plugs. Designed for installation into concrete, full bricks,
80
half-full bricks, lightened cement and other materials.
100
Advantages: saves time and money thanks to direct attach-
ment of the frame to the wall, with no need to enlarge
the holes for plugs. Thanks to the black galvanization, the
screws blend in smoothly with the FC sealing.
Dimensions description
Ø 7.5 x 50 mm for attachment to metal subframes
Ø 7.5 x 60 mm for attachment to concrete and especially thick walls
Ø 7.5 x 80 mm for attachment to walls of average thickness
Ø 7.5 x 100 mm for attachment to walls of lower thickness
NOTE
Holes should be drilled using a Ø 6 mm stone drill bit.
SUBFRAME
10
Subframe (to be ordered) in hollow 30 x 15 x 2mm steel
profiles (recommended for REI 60 and REI 120 Proget
doors) equipped with anchors for mortar fixing and spac-
ers that are to be removed during final installation.
Wall opening for the door order FM H
Opening to create = FM H + 20
10 10
Required wall opening = FM L + 40
Wall opening for the door order FM L
Horizontal cross section
FFL
Vertical cross section
101

104. MAC® Multifunctional Access Control
Controlled opening system
ACCESSORIES
The MAC system makes it possible to activate the handle
to open the door using the same mechanical components
5
doors
as for normal functioning. 5
The particularity of the MAC system is that it concentrates
all of the command and control functions in the lock, 6 4
which simplifies the electrical work required on site. 4 2 3 6
2
1 3
The MAC system offers multiple advantages, such as:
- possibility of 12 V AC/DC or 24 V AC/DC power supplies,
which avoids problems due to inadequate voltage Diagram of components
- low current absorption:
- at 12 V the startup current is 500 mA for the first 5-6 sec.,
before changing to a 250 mA maintenance current
- at 24 V the startup current is 1 A for 300 millisecond.,
before settling to 500 mA for 4-5 sec. and finally chang-
ing to a 250 mA maintenance current for the remaining
25 sec.
- timer incorporated, time set at 30 sec. with automatic reset
(zeroing of the timer) every time the door is opened, elimi-
nating the need for external timers
- red/green LED on the backplate to prevent useless forcing
of the handle by signaling whether the opening system is Nylon handle with red/green LED Stainless steel handle with red/green
active or not LED
- continuous handle activation (always open when desired)
- remote LED for remote signaling of lock activation/deactiva-
tion
The MAC system comes pre-assembled with the door, in-
cluding the wiring inside the door leaf and the electrical
contacts between the leaf and the frame.
Included pre-assembled on the door: anti-panic lock with solenoid and elec-
tronic chip with timer incorporated (1), double electrical contacts between leaf
and frame (2), internal wiring inside the leaf (3)
Included in the package: handle and backplate with red/green LED and con-
nectors (4)
Not included: power supply for doorframe contacts (5), opening button and
command accessories (6)
102

105. MAC® Multifunctional Access Control
Controlled opening system
ACCESSORIES
MAC 1 SYSTEM MAC 2 SYSTEM
doors
Operation mode Operation mode
The MAC 1 system controls access from the pull side of the The MAC 2 system controls access from both sides of the
door. With the lock locked by key, opening is only possi- door. With the lock locked by key, opening is only possible
ble with electrical consent (button, switch, badge reader, with electrical consent (button, switch, badge reader, etc.)
etc.) which activates the handle, while opening is always which activates both handles. Activation of both handles
possible from the push side by means of the panic bar or is signaled by illumination of the “green LED,” with the
emergency handle. Activation of the handle is signaled by “red LED” signaling when the handles are idle. Both LEDs
illumination of the “green LED,” while the “red LED” indi- are off when no power is being supplied.
cates when the handle is idle. Both LEDs are off when no
power is being supplied.
Time mode Time mode
In this mode, the activation time lasts 30 seconds before In this mode, the activation time lasts 30 seconds before
the handle is returned to idle. If the door is opened within both handles are returned to idle. If the door is opened
the 30 seconds, the timer is automatically reset to zero. within the 30 seconds, the timer is automatically reset to
zero.
Continuous mode Continuous mode
“open setting”: in this mode, handle activation is control- “open setting”: in this mode, the activation of both han-
led by an electrical switch (not included) that provides dles is controlled by an electrical switch (not included)
continuous power to the MAC 1 lock. The green LED re- that provides continuous power to the MAC 2 lock. The
mains lighted, being turned off only from the time the green LED remains lighted for both handles, being turned
door is opened until it is fully closed once again. off only from the time the door is opened until it is fully
closed once again.
MAC 1 can be combined with any BM type panic bar and M3 MAC 2 can be combined with M1 (black nylon) and M1X
emergency handles. (stainless steel) handles.
EX DC BM EX/TW BM SL BM M3
NOTE
Both systems have been REI 120 fire-tested to ensure compliance of
the certified product
103

106. Electric handle
Controlled opening system
ACCESSORIES
ELM/MT MULTI-VOLTAGE ELECTRIC HANDLE 19 125
doors
Controlled door opening system that employs an elec-
tronic device to activate the handle. The latter is equipped
with an internal timer with a 30 seconds time allowance
72
225
for opening the door, after which the electric handle is
deactivated. The handle can be activated for longer time
periods by means of the electrical switch.
The illumination of a green LED and sounding of an acous-
tic signal (buzzer) indicate handle activation, while a red Ø20
LED indicates deactivation.
82
When ordered together with the door, the ELM/mt system
includes:
electric handle, electrical contacts between the leaf and
the frame, power cable inside the door connected to elec-
trical contacts, command panel, lock and fixing screws.
If ordered separately from the door, the system includes:
electric handle, command panel and fixing screws.
Technical data
power supply 12 Vcc/Vca - 24 Vcc/Vca
current absorbed at 12 V 500 mA
current absorbed at 24 V 200 mA
startup current at 12 V 700 mA
startup current at 24 V 300 mA
ELM/CISA MULTI-VOLTAGE CISA ELECTRIC HANDLE 141.5 75
Controlled door opening system that employs an electron- 190
ic device to activate the handle. Equipped with a separate
257
timer (for insertion into the switch box) which can be set
for different opening times: from a minimum of 0,1 second
72
to a maximum of 10 days.
Equipped with green LED that signal activation of the
handle.
38 33
The ELM/cisa system includes: electric handles, 2 meters of
power cable, cable sleeve for the connection between the
leaf and the frame, 8/9 square spindle, fixing screws, ad-
justable timer packaged separately.
Technical data
power supply 12 Vcc/Vca - 24 Vcc/Vca
current absorbed 330 mA
startup current 800 mA
operational temperature -20°C ÷ +80°C
max. relative ambient humidity 95%
NOTE
The electric handle requires assembly.
104

107. Electric handle
Controlled opening system
ACCESSORIES
OPENING SYSTEM FOR COMBINATION WITH
ELM/MT OR ELM/CISA ELECTRIC HANDLE
doors
Panic bars
The controlled opening direction is from the pull side of
the door (electric handle side). Locking the lock by key
blocks the electric handle functioning, while opening is
still possible via the panic bar on the push side.
Use: one- or two-leaved doors for anti-panic exits when
access control is desired on the pull side.
Exus
Twist Slash
MSC Handles
Use: one- or two-leaved doors when control is desired for
one of the two opening directions. Locking with the key
blocks opening in both directions.
Controlled opening may be for either the push or pull
direction, depending on where the electric handle is ap-
plied.
MCC/S Handles
Use: for one- or two-leaved doors where access is to be
controlled from the pull side only (electric handle side). MSC MCC/S
Locking with the key blocks opening from the push side,
but not from the side where the electric handle is applied.
OPENING SYSTEM FOR COMBINATION WITH ELM/
MT ELECTRIC HANDLE
Emergency handles M3
Use: one- or two-leaved doors for emergency exits when
access control is desired on the pull side.
The controlled opening direction is from the pull side of
the door (electric handle side). Locking the lock by key
blocks the operation of the electric handle, while opening
remains possible via the M3 emergency handle.
M3 HOT-CIL
Emergency handles HOT/CIL
Use: for the doors of hotel rooms
The controlled opening direction is from the push side of
the door (electric handle side). Closing with the thumb-
turn latch from inside the room, the opening by electric
handle is possible only with an electric consent. Opening
is always possible from the room side of the door.
105

108. Electromagnet
Controlled opening system
ACCESSORIES
ELECTROMAGNETS 13700 TD 01
doors
This system is for use in special situations when the doors
remain closed and should only be opened with electrical
consent. The electrically powered electromagnet holds
the door closed with a holding force of approximately 300
kg, rendering the action of the handle ineffective. Only
electrical commands (badge reader, key button, etc.) or
electrical consent from the fire detector system can deac- 02
tivate the electromagnet making a door opening possible. 03
Operation mode
The door is held closed by the electromagnet (01) and the 04
bolt of the lock. Opening from the outside can happen via
magnetic card (04) using the Badge reader (02) of the card
control system or any other system of choice and by retract-
ing the bolt using the handle or key.
From the inside, the deactivation of the electromagnet is
caused by the unlock button (03) (also remotely) or with
the same system used for the pull side, while the locking
bolt must still be retracted using the handle or key. The
activated electromagnet signals its state with a red LED,
whereas the green LED signals the temporary deactivation. NOTE
Further a relay AC/DC signaling the electromagnetic state Unlocking of the door is only possible if the door is not locked by key.
is supplied.
Technical data
model 13700 TD withstand force fino a 300 Kg.
power supply 12/24 Vcc time delay 0 ÷ 90 sec.
current absorbed at 12 V 500 mA electrom. compatib standard EMC - UNI CEI 70011
current absorbed at 24 V 250 mA certificate Nr. 0123/02
COMPONENTS INCLUDED WITH THE
ELECTROMAGNET CONTROLLED OPENING SYSTEM
For Proget doors
Electromagnet 13700 TD holding force 300 kg, 12/24 V DC,
fastener plate, anchor with stainless steel fastener back-
plate.
For Rever/Univer doors
Electromagnet 13700 TD withstanding force 300 kg, 12/24
V DC, fastener plate and angle bar, anchor with stainless PROGET Electromagnet REVER/ UNIVER Electromagnet
steel fastener backplate.
Control system:
- “Access” code keypad
- Card-based control system
- Biometric “TOCA access” reader
- Unlock button
NOTE
Detailed specifications for the Control system are found on the “Com-
mand accessories” page.
106

109. Power supply/command accessories
For MAC® - ELM/mt - ELM/cisa Electromagnet 13700 TD controlled opening systems
ACCESSORIES
CONTROL SYSTEMS AND RELATED ACCESSORIES
doors
“Access” code keypad
Power supply 12-18 V AC/V DC with 10 numeric buttons plus
an Enter key, including control unit for 1 door and timer
incorporated (0,5÷25 sec.). Up to 500 recordable different
codes, composed from 1 to 6 digits.
„Access“ code keypad
Card-based control system
Card control system with timer incorporated (art. 55611 +
55613 + 55615), including Badge reader, control unit, flat
cable, external 230 V DC/15 V DC transformer, three blank
badges and a coded badge.
Card-based control system
„TOCA access“ biometric reader
„TOCA access“ biometric reader for reading fingerprints
and transforming them into key codes. Includes an inter-
nal unit for registering, memorizing and cancelling users
and external unit for fingerprints. Autonomous low volt-
age 9 V AC power supply.
Biometric reader
Unlock button
Unlock button (art. GW 20 523), with white casing and
control light.
Power Supply Switching 12 V DC/3 A
With different management options:
- max. Nr. 10 MAC® Multifunction Access Control *
- or max. Nr. 5 13700 TD Electromagnets
- or max. Nr. 5 ELM/mt Electric handles *
- or max. Nr. 8 ELM/cisa Electric handles * Unlock button Power Supply Switching 12 V DC/3 A
* provided that they are not commanded simultaneously
107

110. Door-holding systems
For fire doors and gates
ACCESSORIES
C2 MONO-ZONE MICROPROCESSOR
24
0
doors
Certified in accordance with EN 1154-2 and EN 1154-4
standards.
The processor was designed and built in conformity with
UNI EN 1154 standards, which regulate processors for fire
150
alarms and related accessories which each must conform
with EN1154 standards.
Technical data
48
model 52002
primary power supply 230 V AC, 100 mA, 50-60Hz
This is a control unit which administers the door-holding electromagnets for fire
auxiliary power supply 2 batteries, 12 V DC/1,1 ÷ 1,3 Ah doors, where standards require consideration of every possible and imponderable
minimum output current 264 mA event that could happen during normal functioning. The following, therefore, are
subject to constant monitoring: all exits towards the smoke and heat detectors,
maximum output current 424 mA
the alarm and reset buttons, the external siren and the charge of the two batteries.
buffer battery charger output 24 V DC (27.6 V DC) The microprocessor itself, which functions as the brain of the system, is constantly
protection rating IP30 monitored at regular intervals by a specific system routine that checks for proper
functioning of the operational software. Any hitches, breakdowns or malfunctions
operational temperature -5°C ÷ +40°C are signaled by one of the ten LED diodes on the front panel, and the internal
operational zones single zone (mono-zone) buzzer provides an additional acoustic signal for specific cases. Alarm or breakdown
acoustic alarm internal buzzer situations can then be reset at three different levels depending on the seriousness
of the event: by a button located near the microprocessor, by a first button on the
"low battery" signal intermittent internal buzzer front of the microprocessor unit and by a second button on the same panel that
EC certification 0051-CPD-0264 requires key selector activation (key in possession of the safety manager). A fourth
reset level is then supplied for the circuit only (operation executable by authorized
EN 1154-2 +A1:2006
conformity with standards technical personnel only).
EN 1154-4:1997 + A1:2002 + A1:2006
ATTENTION MANAGES
According to standard EN 1154-4, it is obligatory for the mono-zone - max. Nr. 5 RFC heat/smoke detectors
processor to be equipped with: - max. Nr. 5 alarm activation buttons
- Nr. 1 heat/smoke detector RFC certif. EN 1154-7 - max. Nr. 2 electronic sirens
- Nr. 1 pair of buffer batteries - Nr. 4 EM or EMP electromagnets
- Nr. 1 external electronic siren certif. EN 1154-3 - Nr. 2 buffer batteries
- Nr. 1 alarm activation button certif. EN 1154/11
RFC HEAT AND SMOKE DETECTOR
Certified in accordance with UNI EN 1154-5 and EN 1154-7 Ø110
standards.
RFC heat and smoke detector characterized by white ABS cas-
ing. Optical/thermic operation with intervention temperature
to be set between 54 and 65°C. To ensure proper functioning,
the detectors must be subjected to regular 6-month mainte-
nance checks. Please note that it is inadvisable to position the
54
sensor where strong air currents are present.
Technical data
operational voltage 10 ÷ 30 V DC, typically 24 V DC Technical data
consumption at rest, at 24 V DC 70 µA operational temperature -40°C ÷ +60°C
absorption of alarm at 24 V DC 50 mA conformity with EN 1154-5, EN 1154-7 standards
BUFFER BATTERIES
Pair of rechargeable buffer batteries, 12 V DC/1.2 Ah
NOTE
All DOOR-HOLDING SYSTEMS are supplied in separate packaging and
require on-site assembly.
108

111. Door-holding systems
For fire doors and gates
ACCESSORIES
ELECTRONIC SIREN With 28 or 32 selectable to-
nes and a second tone for
doors
Includes a volume control function for installation in inter- two-phase alarms.
nal and external environments. The connection is made us-
ing double clamps (6) for branching. Dimensions:
Ø 91 x 91mm.
Technical data
power supply 9 ÷ 28 V DC
absorption by alarm at 12 V DC 8 mA
absorption by alarm at 24 V DC 16 mA
protection rating IP65
operational temperature -25°C ÷ +70°C
conformity with standard EN 1154-3
ALARM ACTIVATION BUTTON In red color ABS with a
weight of 110 gr.
Pressure on the plastic front plate activates the electrical
contact. Re-arming of the contact is executed manually us-
ing a key (provided). Dimensions:
99 x 95 x 43mm.
Technical data
power supply max. 30 V DC
protection rating IP41
operational temperature max. +65°C
internal exchange contact n.o./n.c.
conformity with standard EN 1154-11
75 53
EM ELECTROMAGNET
65
35
90
65
Technical data
power supply 24 V DC
absorption 60 mA
minimum withstand force 55 Kg.
EM wall electromagnet with white plastic casing, complete EC certification 0407-CPD-011 (IG-098-2004) /02
with unlock button. Anchor consisting of a nickel-plated plate conformity with standard EN 1155
and a jointed baseboard.
EMP ELECTROMAGNET 70 53
65
65
114
104
Technical data
power supply 24 V DC
EMP floor electromagnets, consisting of a galvanized metal core absorption 60 mA
with an unlock button and a fastener plate. Anchor consisting of minimum withstand force 55 Kg.
a nickel-plated plate and jointed baseboard.
EC certification 0407-CPD-011 (IG-098-2004)
conformity with standard EN 1155
NOTE
All DOOR-HOLDING SYSTEMS are supplied in separate packaging and
require on-site assembly.
109

112. “safety is in
your hands“

113. Emergency exit devices and
Anti-panic devices for safety exits
PROVISIONS / STANDARDS 112 - 116
EMERGENCY EXIT DEVICES 117 - 125
EXUS - PRESENTATION, FEATURES, CERTIFICATION 126 - 131
EXUS FOR GLASS DOOR - FEATURES, CERTIFICATION 132 - 133
TWIST - PRESENTATION, FEATURES, CERTIFICATION 134 - 137
SLASH - PRESENTATION, FEATURES, CERTIFICATION 138 - 143
GENERAL INFORMATION - TECH DRAWINGS, VARIATIONS 144 - 149
All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced technical
changes to the contents of this brochure.

114. Provisions/Standards
For emergency exit devices / Anti-panic devices for safety exits
EN 1125:2008 and EN 179:2008 STANDARDS
DEVICES
New European standards for marked safety exit and -- Materials used for anti-panic exit devices must remain
emergency exit devices entered into effect on 01 January operational at temperatures between -10° and + 60°.
2010, replacing the previous EN 1125: 1997 + A1:2001 and EN
179:1997 standards. -- Verification is required for suitability of use with fire/
smoke resistant doors, and this verification may only be
Standard EN 1125: 2008 specifies the requirements for man- received by passing a fire resistance test on both sides of
ufacturing, performance levels and testing of anti-panic the door in conformity with EN 1634-1.
exit devices activated mechanically by a horizontal bar and
designed for specific use in panic situations along escape -- It is extremely important that anti-panic and emergency
routes. devices not be used on fire doors that have a higher fire
Standard EN 179: 2008 specifies the requirements for the resistance time than the level for which the device itself
manufacturing, performance levels and testing of emergen- has been approved.
cy exit devices activated mechanically by a lever handle or
push panel. -- To reduce the risk of entrapping fingers and/or block-
ing the device, checks based on visual inspection and
measurement with appropriate calipers is prescribed.
conformity of the anti-panic and emergency exit devic- -- Protrusions and corners that could cause harm to per-
es with the standard requirements must be demonstrated sons must be smoothed down.
by initial type testing and production controls carried out
by the manufacturer under the continuous observation of -- Anti-panic or emergency exit devices that activate up-
the certifying body. per and lower vertical rods (on the passive leaf, for
instance) must ensure that manipulation of the lower
Performance and safety requirements rod does not activate the upper rod.
-- Device selection depends on the risk analysis of its use -- The strike box mounted on the floor must not rise
when installed along escape routes or emergency exits. higher than 15 mm and must be tapered in the direc-
tion of the escape route.
--
--
Anti-panic devices are only required to conform with
standard EN 1125, permitting exit at any time by a sin- Periodic lubrication must be possible without requiring
gle operation on the horizontal bar that requires no disassembly of the device.
--
prior knowledge of how the device functions and that
permits opening even when the door is subjected to For door masses greater than 200 kg and leaf dimen-
a load. These requirements simulate the forces that sions greater than 1320 x 2520 mm, additional testing
could be applied by people who are in a state of panic. under harsher conditions are required.
-- Standard EN 179 concerns emergency devices desig- -- The durability of the device may be classified as grade 6
nated for use in emergency situations involving peo- (100,000 cycles) or grade 7 (200.000 cycles). For second-
ple who are accustomed to using safety exits and their ary leaves, grade 6 corresponds to 10,000 cycles, and
devices, and who are therefore unlikely to be taken by for grade 7 - 20,000 cycles.
--
panic.
The presence of an external door furniture (key, cylin-
-- Devices for anti-panic or emergencies must be designed der, lever handle, doorknob, etc.) must not in any way
so that the door can be opened from the inside at any interfere with the activation of the internal anti-panic
time in less than 1 second. or emergency device.
112

115. Provisions/Standards
For emergency exit devices / Anti-panic devices for safety exits
OFFICIAL GAZETTE OF THE EUROPEAN UNION
DEVICES
04 July 2009
-- External door furnitures other than those provided by
the anti-panic device manufacturer is not considered to Information from member states:
conform with standards. Commission communication in the context of the application
of Directive 89/106/CEE of the Council in relation to the ap-
-- External door furnitures provided by the manufac- proach of regulatory and administrative legislative provisions
turer may have either manual or electrical operation of Member States in regards to construction products.
(e.g., electric handle or lock activated electrically by
the handle).
-- The material used to make the device must not OEN
Reference of
the substitute
contain or release dangerous substances in greater (1) Reference and title of the standard standard
amounts than prescribed by European standards or
national regulations. EN 1125:2008 Lock accessories
CEN Anti-panic devices for safety exits activated by EN 1125/1997
-- Anti-panic and emergency exit devices must be ac-
horizontal bar - Test methods and requirements
companied by clear, detailed instructions for instal- EN 179:2008 Lock accessories
lation and maintenance, including a list of all of the CEN Emergency exit devices activated by lever EN 179/1997
elements that have been tested and approved for use handles or push plates
of the device and that could be provided separately.
Date of the standard’s entry into effect Date of expiration of the
-- It is essential for anti-panic and emergency exit devices as a harmonized European standard co-existence period
to be installed according to the manufacturer’s instruc- 1.1.2009 1.1.2010
tions using duly compatible components only.
-- Horizontal bars and levers must normally be installed
at a height range of 900 to 1100 mm above the fin-
ished floor level, as measured in the closed position.
If it is known that children represent the majority
of the rooms’ occupants, a reduction in bar height
should be considered.
-- Once the device has been installed, the instructions
should be handed over to the user, who must pre-
serve them for use during maintenance operations.
-- To ensure that performance conforms with certifica-
tions, regular maintenance checks need to be carried
out at intervals of one month or less, with periodic
checks that all of the system’s components still corre-
spond to the component list provided at the outset.
113

116. Provisions/EC marking
Emergency exit devices
EC MaRKING aCCORdING TO EN 179:2008
dEVICES
How to read the marking:
EC conformity marking consisting of the “ ” symbol
indicated in Directive 93/68/CE
M3 device for emergency exits Product description
Ninz S.p.A. Corso Trento, 2/A
Name or identifying mark and registered address of the manufacturer
I-38061 ALA (TN)/ITALY
10 Last two digits of the year when the marking was applied
EN 179:2008 Standard number
0425 Identification number for the certifying body
2147-CPD-2010 EC certification number
3 7 7 B 1 4 4 2 A A Product classification
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th
CLaSSIFICaTION aCCORdING TO EN 179:2008
How to read the classification:
Category of use (1st character) Material safety (7th character)
Only one category of use is applicable: Five different material safety grades are applicable:
- grade 3: very frequent use with little need to pay at- - grade 2: 1000N
tention, in the sense of the possibility of accidents or im- - grade 3: 2000N
proper use. - grade 4: 3000N
- grade 5: 5000N
Durability (2nd character)
Two different durability ratings are applicable: Protrusion of horizontal bar (8° character)
- grade 6: 100,000 test cycles; Two different grades of device protrusion are applicable:
- grade 7: 200.000 test cycles. - grade 1: protrusion up to 150 mm (extra protrusion);
- grade 2: protrusion up to 100 mm (standard protrusion).
Mass of the door (3rd character)
Three different grades of door mass are applicable: Activation type (9° character)
- grade 5: up to 100 kg; Two activation types are applicable:
- grade 6: up to 200 kg; - type A: emergency exit device with lever handle activation
- grade 7: over 200 kg. - type B: emergency exit device with push panel activation
(SLASH, for example).
Suitability for use with fire/smoke rated doors (4th character)
Three different grades are applicable: Field of door application (10th character)
- grade 0: non approved for use on fire/smoke rated doors; Four different categories of field of door application are
- grade A: suitable for use on smoke rated doors; applicable, depending on the final use of the emergency
- grade B: suitable for use on fire/smoke rated doors; on exit device:
the basis of testing in conformity with EN 1634-1. - category A: one-leaved door, two-leaved door: active or
passive leaf, push opening;
Human safety (5th character) - category B: only one-leaved doors, push opening;
Only a single human safety rating is applicable: - category C: two-leaved doors, passive leaf only, push
- grade 1: all devices for panic exits must ensure human opening;
safety, so for purposes of the present standard only the - category D: one-leaved doors only, pull opening.
maximum rating is allowed.
Corrosion resistance (6th character)
The two different corrosion resistance ratings indicated in
EN 1670:2007 are applicable:
- grade 3: 96 h (high resistance);
- grade 4: 240 h (extra-high resistance).
114

117. Provisions/EC marking
Panic devices for safety exits
EC MaRKING aCCORdING TO EN 1125:2008
dEVICES
How to read the marking:
EC conformity marking consisting of the “ ” symbol
indicated in Directive 93/68/CE
EXUS Panic exit device Product description
Ninz S.p.A. Corso Trento, 2/A
Name or identifying mark and registered address of the manufacturer
I-38061 ALA (TN)/ITALY
08 Last two digits of the year when the marking was applied
EN 1125:2008 Standard number
0425 Identification number for the certifying body
1228-CPD-2007 EC certification number
3 7 7 B 1 3 2 1 A A Product classification
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th
CLaSSIFICaTION aCCORdING TO EN 1125:2008
How to read the classification:
Category of use (1st character) Material safety (7th character)
There is only one category of use that may be utilized: Only a single material safety rating are applicable:
- grade 3: very frequent use with little need to pay atten- - grade 2: there is only one category that represents the
tion, in the sense of the possibility of accidents or impro- minimum obtainable rating due to the fact that materi-
per use. al safety must be viewed as secondary relative to human
safety.
Durability (2nd character)
Two different durability ratings are applicable: Protrusion of horizontal bar (8° character)
- grade 6: 100,000 test cycles; Two different grades of horizontal bar protrusion are ap-
- grade 7: 200.000 test cycles. plicable:
- grade 1: protrusion up to 150 mm (extra protrusion);
Mass of the door (3rd character) - grade 2: protrusion up to 100 mm (standard protrusion).
Three different grades of door mass are applicable:
- grade 5: up to 100 kg; Horizontal bar activation type (9th character)
- grade 6: up to 200 kg; Two activation types are applicable:
- grade 7: over 200 kg. - type A: panic bars with push-bar activation (EXUS and
TWIST, for example);
Suitability for use with fire/smoke resistant doors - type B: panic bars with touch-bar activation (SLASH, for
(4th character) example).
Three different grades are applicable:
- grade 0: non approved for use on fire/smoke resistant Field of door application (10th character)
doors; Three different categories of field of door application are
- grade A: suitable for use on smoke resistant doors; applicable, depending on the final use of the safety exit
- grade B: suitable for use on fire/smoke resistant doors; device:
on the basis of testing in conformity with EN 1634-1. - category A: one-leaved door, two-leaved door: active or
secondary leaf, push opening;
Human safety (5th character) - category B: only one-leaved doors, push opening;
Only a single human safety rating are applicable: - category C: two-leaved doors, secondary leaf only, push
- grade 1: all devices for panic exits must ensure human opening.
safety, so that for purposes of the present standard only
the maximum rating is allowed.
Corrosion resistance (6th character)
The two different corrosion resistance ratings indicated in
EN 1670:2007 are applicable:
- grade 3: 96 h (high resistance);
- grade 4: 240 h (extra-high resistance).
115

118. Provisions/Standard
Emergency exit devices / Anti-panic devices for safety exits
TESTING EqUIPMENT
dEVICES
Our company maintains its own testing and experimentation
equipment in order to ensure maximum quality, reliability
and innovative service to our customers.
Company furnace
Mechanical testing equipment
Operational testing equipment
116

119. Emergency exit devices
NINZ
PRESENTaTION
dEVICES
Emergency exit devices (emergency handles)
Ninz S.p.A. is a leader in fire doors, and has once again re-
asserted itself as a visionary company with a strong iden-
tity created by its continuous research into the design and
technology of its own products, such as the new line of
emergency exit handles.
The handles are marked and pre-certified according
to European standard EN 179:2008, which entered in
effect January 01, 2010, and which prescribes a several
substantial changes that further extend the requirements
for maximum safety and ease of opening.
The Kit designed for your needs
When ordered separately from the door, the M3, M3X,
M14, M14X, Hot CIL and HOT CIL-X handles are packaged
in functional KITs for display and presentation in the most
appropriate distribution context.
Packaging in KITs ensures customers, installers and there-
fore the final users that they are receiving a complete
anti-panic system with fully corresponding and certi-
fied parts.
Certifications and replacements
Given the importance of maintaining the entire system’s
conformity, special attention has been paid to replace-
ment parts, which have been subjected to testing in ac-
cordance with the EN 179:2008 standard due to their piv-
otal role in maintaining certification.
The only way to ensure that the products maintain their
original characteristics over time is by using original NINZ
replacement parts.
For this reason, the instructions for emergency handles in-
clude additional indications regarding proper installation
and maintenance plus a exploded assembly drawing that
specifies every smallest detail of the certified system with all
of the references required for ordering replacement parts.
NOTE
Handles are considered to be accessories and assembly is required.
117

120. M3 emergency handle
Emergency handle for internal locks - EN 179:2008
M3 IN BLaCK NyLON 23 124
dEVICES
Description
Lever handle for emergency exit:
--
166
72
Reversible for right or left opening
-- Applicable to single leaf doors or the active leaf (main
leaf) of two-leaved doors located at emergency exits Ø20
-- Suitable for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other
types of emergency exit doors
67
-- Both the levers and the backplates are made of black
nylon, and the core of the lever and the internal in-
stallation plate are made of galvanized steel
-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for European profile
cylinders
-- Cylinder to pass in nickel-plated brass with 3 keys SUPPLIEd TOGETHER WITH THE dOOR
-- Suitable for doors with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880
mm/leaf, mass up to 300 kg/leaf, with ratings up to For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved
EI2120 - REI120 and smoke resistance, handle protru- doors:
sion of 65 mm Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance
and the strike box insert.
Included (in the package): Nr. 2 black nylon lever handles, Nr. 2 gal-
Applications vanized steel internal installation plates, Nr. 2 black nylon backplates,
The M3 lever handle for emergency exits is for use on Nr. 1 split square spindle, Nr. 1 standard nickel-plated double cylinder
doors designated for emergency situations involving peo- with 3 keys, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 instruction/
ple who are accustomed to using safety exits and their maintenance manual.
hardware, and who are therefore unlikely to be in a state Versions available: M3, M3 ELM/mt.
of panic. ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages
Operation mode
With the lock locked by key, the door can no longer be
opened from the pull side, while the door can still be M3 KIT VERSION
opened using the lever on the push side. (SUPPLIEd SEPaRaTELy FROM THE dOOR)
KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors:
VERSIONS aVaILaBLE Specify the leaf thickness in the order.
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike
box insert, Nr. 2 black nylon lever handles, Nr. 2 galvanized steel inter-
nal installation plates, Nr. 2 black nylon backplates, Nr. 1 split square
spindle, Nr. 1 standard nickel-plated double cylinder with 3 keys, Nr.
1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 instruction/maintenance
manual.
Versions available: M3
M3 M3 ELM/mt
VaRIaTIONS ON REqUEST
-- MAC1 type panic lock, including access control mode
-- Panic lock with 3 closing points (for multipurpose
PROGET doors only)
-- Mastered or coded cylinders
118

121. M3X emergency handle
Emergency handle for internal locks - EN 179:2008
M3X IN STaINLESS STEEL 23 127
dEVICES
Description
Lever handle for emergency exit:
166
72
-- Reversible for right or left opening
-- Applicable to single leaf doors or the active leaf (main
leaf) of two-leaved doors located at emergency exits Ø20
-- Suitable for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other
types of emergency exit doors
75
-- The levers as well as the internal installation plates
are made of AISI 304 satinized stainless steel, and the
backplates are made of galvanized steel
-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cyl-
inders
-- Cylinder to pass in nickel-plated brass with 3 keys SUPPLIEd TOGETHER WITH THE dOOR
-- Suitable for doors with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880
mm/leaf, mass up to 300 kg/leaf, with fire resistance For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved
up to EI2120 - REI120 and smoke resistance, handle doors:
protrusion of 75 mm Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance
and the strike box insert.
Use Included (in the package): Nr. 2 stainless steel lever handles, Nr. 2
The M3X emergency exit handle are to be applied on galvanized steel internal installation plates, Nr. 2 stainless backplates,
doors designated for emergency situations in which the Nr. 1 split square spindle, Nr. 1 standard nickel-plated double cylinder
people involved are accustomed to using safety exits and with 3 keys, fastener screws, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow),
their opening devices, and therefore who are very unlike- Nr. 1 instruction/maintenance manual.
ly to be in a state of panic. Versions available: M3X, M3X ELM/mt.
ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages
Operation mode
With the lock locked by key, the door can no longer
be opened from the pull side, but the door can still be
opened from the push side using the handle. M3X KIT VERSION
(SUPPLIEd SEPaRaTELy FROM THE dOOR)
VERSIONS aVaILaBLE KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors:
Specify the leaf thickness in the order.
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike
box insert, Nr. 2 black nylon lever handles, Nr. 2 galvanized steel
internal installation plates, Nr. 2 black nylon backplates, Nr. 1 split
square spindle, Nr. 1 standard nickel-plated double cylinder with 3
keys, fastener screws, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1
M3X M3X ELM/mt instruction/maintenance manual.
Versions available: M3X
VaRIaTIONS ON REqUEST
-- MAC1 panic lock, including access control system
-- Panic lock with 3 closing points (for multipurpose
PROGET doors only)
-- Mastered or coded cylinders
119

122. Certifications
Emergency handle for internal locks - EN 179:2008
M3, M3X CERTIFICaTIONS
ATTESTATO DI CONFORMITÀ
ATTESTAT CONFORMIT À
T
dEVICES
!
Suitable for one-leaved doors or the active leaf of two- DIRETTIVA 89 /1 0 6/CE E
CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY
!
leaved doors with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880 mm/leaf CERT CONFORMI
MITY 0425
DIRECTIVE 89 /1 0 6/CE E
and a mass of 300 kg/leaf Questo certificato è rilasciato in conformità a quanto prescritto dall’Art.6 par.2 lettera b) del DPR 21 aprile 1993, n°246 (Direttiva 89/106/CEE)
!
ed attesta la conformità del prodotto di seguito identificato agli Art.1, Art.2 ed allegato A del DPR 21 aprile 1993, n°246 (Direttiva 89/106/CEE)
This certificate is issued in accordance with the requirements defined in Article 6 par.2 lett. B) of DPR 21th April 1993, n° 246 (89/106/CE Directive) and
certifies the compliance of the product to art. 1, art. 2 and annex A of DPR 21th April 1993, n° 246 (89/106/CE Directive)
!
!
ATTESTAT O N° 2147 - CPD - 2010 CERTIFICATE N°
Organismo notificato Notified Body
ICIM S.p.A. - Piazza Don Mapelli, 75 – 20099 SESTO SAN GIOVANNI Identification number: 0425
Denomination M3, M3X DEVICE FOR
EMERGENCY EXITS Dati Fabbricante Manufacturer details
Sede legale NINZ S.p.A. Corso Trento, 2/A 38061 ALA (TN) ITALY Head office
Manufacturer Ninz S.p.A. Corso Trento, 2/A Unità operativa Production unit
I-38061 ALA (TN)/ITALY Dati prodotto Product datails
Tipologia DISPOSITIVI PER USCITE DI EMERGENZA AZIONATI MEDIANTE MANIGLIA A Type
Year application trademark 10 LEVA O PIASTRA A SPINTA
EMERGENCY EXIT DEVICES OPERATED BY A LEVER HANDLE OR PUSH PAD
Nr. and year of the standard EN 179:2008 Denominazione Dispositivo di emergenza serie “M3” “M3X” Denomination
Serrature antipanico art. AP16/18, 3201001.018, SCA 1 3201001.019/020,
Certifying body 0425 MAC 1 3201001.041/042
Coppia di deviatori art. 4201010
certificate Nr. 2147-CPD-2010 Riscontro serratura art. 2401006, 2401005, 2401015, 2401014, 2401035,
3412001
Classification 377B1442AA Aste verticali
Comandi
art. 3305013
art. 3101001.009 (M3), 3101017.003 (M3X)
Sistema di attestazione della conformità 1 System of attestation of conformity
Norma di riferimento EN 179:2008 Standard reference
1st Category of use very frequent Classificazione 3 7 7 B 1 4 4 2 A A Classification
2nd Durability 200.000 cycles Eventuali estensioni Nessuna / None Extensions
3rd Door mass over 200 kg
Eventuali condizioni di Condition of
4th Suitable for fire/smoke rated doors subordine della Nessuna / None subordination of CE
Certificazione CE certification
5th Safety, suitable for evacuation routes
6th High corrosion resistance 240 h Il presente attestato è valido esclusivamente per il prodotto indicato. Eventuali varianti da apportare devono essere approvate da ICIM SpA
The present certificate is valid only for the product described above. Every change has to be approved by ICIM S.p.A.
7th Material safety 1000 N !
8th Handle protrusion up to 100 mm Data di emissione
Issue date
Emissione corrente
Current issue
Data di scadenza
Expiring date
ICIM S.p.A.
9th Activation type with lever handle 12/03/2010
!
12/03/2010!
!
11/03/2020
Il Presidente
Ing. Tullio Badino
10th Suitable for one- or two-leaved doors !
! !
120

123. HOT-CIL Emergency handle
Emergency handle for internal locks - EN 179:2008
HOT-CIL IN BLaCK NyLON
dEVICES
Description
Lever handle and fixed doorknob for emergency exits, es-
pecially for hotel rooms:
-- Reversible for right or left opening
-- Normally applied on single leaf doors or the active
leaf of two-leaved doors if the secondary leaf nor-
mally remains closed and can only be opened manu-
ally with the latch bolt (019)
-- Suitable for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other
types of emergency exit pull doors 46 23 124
-- The lever, doorknob and even the backplates are
made of black nylon, while the core of the lever and
52
the internal installation plates are made of galva-
166
72
nized steel
-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated pull type for Euro pro-
file cylinders
-- Mastered cylinder to pass with thumbturn latch on Ø20
the pull side made of nickel-plated brass with 3 keys
-- Suitable for doors with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880
67
40
8.5
mm/leaf, mass up to 300 kg/leaf, with fire rating
EI2120 - REI120 and smoke resistance, handle protru-
sion of 65 mm
Use SUPPLIEd TOGETHER WITH THE dOOR
The HOT-CIL emergency exit handle is to be applied on
doors designated for emergency situations in which the For the single leaf or active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors
people involved are accustomed to using safety exits and (the secondary leaf normally remains closed and can only be opened
their opening devices, and who are therefore very unlike- manually using the bolt lock (019)):
ly to be in a state of panic. Included (mounted on the door): the anti-panic lock with 65 mm en-
trance and the strike box insert.
Operation mode Included (in the package): Nr. 1 lever handle and Nr. 1 fixed doorknob
The door can be opened from the push side by key only, in black nylon, Nr. 2 galvanized steel internal installation plates, Nr. 2
while it can be opened at any time from the pull side by black nylon backplates, Nr. 1 square spindle, Nr. 1 mastered cylinder to
pressing the handle, even when the lock is locked using pass with thumbturn latch on the pull side made of nickel-plated brass
the key. The lock has two bolts that protrude when the with 3 keys, fastener screws, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow),
key or the thumbturn latch is turned. Nr. 1 set of instructions for installation/maintenance.
Versions available: HOT-CIL, HOT-CIL ELM/mt.
ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages.
VERSIONS aVaILaBLE
HOT-CIL KIT VERSION
(SUPPLIEd SEPaRaTELy FROM THE dOOR)
KIT for single leaf door or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved
HOT-CIL HOT-CIL ELM/mt doors (the secondary leaf normally remains closed and can only be
opened manually using the bolt lock (019)):
Specify the leaf thickness in the order.
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike
box insert, Nr. 1 lever handle and Nr. 1 fixed doorknob in black nylon,
Nr. 2 galvanized steel internal installation plates, Nr. 2 black nylon
backplates, Nr. 1 square spindle, Nr. 1 mastered cylinder to pass with
thumbturn latch on the pull side made of nickel-plated brass with 3
keys, fastener screws, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set
of instructions for installation/maintenance.
Versions available: HOT-CIL
121

124. HOT-CIL-X Emergency handle
Emergency handle for internal locks - EN 179:2008
HOT-CIL-X IN STaINLESS STEEL
dEVICES
Description
Lever handle and fixed doorknob for emergency exits, es-
pecially for hotel rooms:
-- Lever handle and fixed doorknob for emergency ex-
its, especially for hotel rooms:
-- Reversible for right or left opening
-- Normally applied on single leaf doors or the active
leaf of two-leaved doors if the secondary leaf nor-
mally remains closed and can only be opened manu-
ally with the latch bolt (019) 23 127
-- Suitable for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other
46
types of emergency exit pull doors
-- The lever, doorknob and plates are made of AISI 304
49
166
72
satinized stainless steel, while the backplates are
made of galvanized steel
-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cyl- Ø20
inders
-- Mastered cylinder to pass with thumbturn latch on
46
75
8.5
the pull side made of nickel-plated brass with 3 keys
-- Suitable for doors with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880
mm/leaf, masses up to 300 kg/leaf, fire rated to EI²120
- REI120 and smoke resistance, handle protrusion of
75 mm
SUPPLIEd TOGETHER WITH THE dOOR
Application
The HOT-CIL-X emergency exit handle is for use on doors For the single leaf or active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors (the
designated for emergency situations in which the people passive leaf (secondary) normally remains closed and can only be
involved are accustomed to using safety exits and their opened manually using the bolt lock (019)):
opening devices, and who are therefore very unlikely to Included (mounted on the door): the anti-panic lock with 65 mm en-
be in a state of panic. trance and the strike plate insert.
Included (in the package): Nr. 1 lever handle and Nr. 1 fixed doorknob
Operation mode in satinized stainless steel, Nr. 2 galvanized steel internal installation
The door can be opened from the push side by key only, plates, Nr. 2 backplates in satinized stainless steel, Nr. 1 square spin-
while it can be opened at any time from the pull side by dle, Nr. 1 mastered cylinder to pass with thumbturn latch on the pull
pressing the handle, even when the lock is locked using side made of nickel-plated brass with 3 keys, fastener screws, Nr. 1
the key. The lock has two bolts that protrude when the adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of instructions for installa-
key or the thumbturn latch is turned. tion/maintenance.
Versions available: HOT-CIL-X, HOT-CIL-X ELM/mt.
ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages.
VERSIONS aVaILaBLE
HOT-CIL-X KIT VERSION
(SUPPLIEd SEPaRaTELy FROM THE dOOR)
KIT for single leaf door or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved
doors (the passive leaf (secondary) normally remains closed and can
HOT-CIL-X HOT-CIL-X ELM/mt only be opened manually using the bolt lock (019)):
Specify the leaf thickness in the order.
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike
plate insert, Nr. 1 lever handle and Nr. 1 fixed doorknob in satinized stain-
less steel, Nr. 2 galvanized steel internal installation plates, Nr. 2 back-
plates in satinized stainless steel, Nr. 1 square spindle, Nr. 1 mastered
cylinder to pass with thumbturn latch on the pull side made of nickel-
plated brass with 3 keys, fastener screws, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram
(green arrow), Nr. 1 set of instructions for installation/ maintenance.
Versions available: HOT-CIL-X
122

125. Certifications
Emergency handle for internal locks - EN 179:2008
HOT-CIL, HOT-CIL-X CERTIFICaTION
dEVICES
ATTESTATO DI CONFORMITÀ
ATTESTAT TÀ !
Suitable for one-leaved doors or two-leaved doors with DIRETTIVA 89/106/CEE
CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY
!
the second leaf semi-fixed and not equipped with emer- CERT MITY 0425
gency or anti-panic devices, with dimensions up to 1350 x DIRECTIVE 89/106/CEE
Questo certificato è rilasciato in conformità a quanto prescritto dall’Art.6 par.2 lettera b) del DPR 21 aprile 1993, n°246 (Direttiva 89/106/CEE)
!
2880 mm/leaf, masses of 300 kg/leaf. ed attesta la conformità del prodotto di seguito identificato agli Art.1, Art.2 ed allegato A del DPR 21 aprile 1993, n°246 (Direttiva 89/106/CEE)
This certificate is issued in accordance with the requirements defined in Article 6 par.2 lett. B) of DPR 21th April 1993, n° 246 (89/106/CE Directive) and
certifies the compliance of the product to art. 1, art. 2 and annex A of DPR 21th April 1993, n° 246 (89/106/CE Directive)
!
!
ATTESTAT O N° 2149 - CPD - 2010 CERTIFICATE N°
Organismo notificato Notified Body
ICIM S.p.A. - Piazza Don Mapelli, 75 – 20099 SESTO SAN GIOVANNI Identification number: 0425
Denomination HOT-CIL, HOT-CIL-X Dati Fabbricante
Sede legale NINZ S.p.A. Corso Trento, 2/A 38061 ALA (TN) ITALY
Manufacturer details
Head office
EMERGENCY EXIT DEVICE Unità operativa Production unit
Manufacturer Ninz S.p.A. Corso Trento, 2/A Dati prodotto Product datails
Tipologia DISPOSITIVI PER USCITE DI EMERGENZA AZIONATI MEDIANTE MANIGLIA A Type
I-38061 ALA (TN)/ITALY LEVA O PIASTRA A SPINTA
EMERGENCY EXIT DEVICES OPERATED BY A LEVER HANDLE OR PUSH PAD
Year application trademark 10 Denominazione Dispositivo di emergenza serie “HOT-CIL” “HOT-CIL-X” Denomination
Nr. and year of the standard EN 179:2008 Serrature antipanico art. 3201001.011
Coppia di deviatori art. 4201010
Certifying body 0425 Riscontro serratura art. 2401006, 2401005, 2401015, 2401014
Comandi art. 3101001.012 (M2), 3101017.002 (M2X)
certificate Nr. 2149-CPD-2010
Classification 377B1442AD Sistema di attestazione della conformità
Norma di riferimento
1
EN 179:2008
System of attestation of conformity
Standard reference
Classificazione 3 7 7 B 1 4 4 2 A D Classification
1st Category of use very frequent Eventuali estensioni Nessuna / None Extensions
2nd Durability 200.000 cycles Eventuali condizioni di Condition of
subordine della Nessuna / None subordination of CE
3rd Door mass over 200 kg Certificazione CE certification
4th Suitable for fire/smoke rated doors
5th Safety, suitable for evacuation routes Il presente attestato è valido esclusivamente per il prodotto indicato. Eventuali varianti da apportare devono essere approvate da ICIM SpA
The present certificate is valid only for the product described above. Every change has to be approved by ICIM S.p.A.
6th High corrosion resistance 240 h !
7th Material safety 1000 N Data di emissione Emissione corrente Data di scadenza ICIM S.p.A.
Issue date Current issue Expiring date
8th Handle protrusion up to 100 mm ! !
Il Presidente
Ing. Tullio Badino
12/03/2010 12/03/2010! 11/03/2020
9th Activation type with lever handle !
! !
10th Suited for one-leaved doors
123

126. M14 emergency handle
Emergency handle for insertion in lock - EN 179:2008
M14 IN BLaCK NyLON 46 23 124
dEVICES
Description
Lever handle for emergency exit:
--
166
Reversible for right or left opening
-- For application to the secondary leaf of two-leaved
doors located at emergency exits
-- Suitable for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other Ø20
types of emergency exit doors
-- The lever and plate are both made of black nylon,
67 9
while the core of the lever and the internal installa-
tion plate are made of galvanized steel
-- The safety lock is anti-panic fire rated, activates the
vertical rods and ensures automatic closure SUPPLIEd TOGETHER WITH THE dOOR
-- Suitable for doors with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880
mm/leaf, masses up to 300 kg/leaf, with fire rating For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors:
EI2120 Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm
-- REI120 and smoke resistance, handle protrusion of 65 mm entrance, vertical rods, upper locking device, upper strike plate.
Included (in the package): Nr. 1 lever handle (black nylon), Nr. 2 gal-
vanized steel internal installation plates, Nr. 2 blank black nylon back-
Use plates, Nr. 1 square spindle, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1
The M14 emergency exit handle is to be applied to doors
companion arm (for fire doors only), fastener screws, Nr. 1 adhesive
designated for emergency situations in which the people
pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of instructions for installation/main-
involved are accustomed to using safety exits and their
tenance.
opening devices, and who are therefore highly unlikely to
be in a state of panic.
The active (main) leaf must also be equipped with an anti-
M14 KIT VERSION
panic or emergency device.
(SUPPLIEd SEPaRaTELy FROM THE dOOR)
Operation mode KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors:
The M14 emergency device is always used in combination Please specify the door type - REVER, UNIVER or PROGET - in the order.
with a second device for safety or emergency exits that is KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 1
applied to the active (main) leaf, and for this reason does lever handle (black nylon), Nr. 2 galvanized steel installation plates,
not include external opening door furnitures. Nr. 2 blank black nylon backplates, Nr. 1 square spindle, Nr. 1 upper
From the push side, opening is possible at any time by locking device (for Rever and Univer multipurpose only), Nr. 1 compan-
pushing on the handle, which causes the vertical rods to ion arm (excluding Rever and Univer multipurpose doors), fastener
retract and at the same time pulls back the bolt of the ac- screws, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of instruc-
tive leaf’s lock, unlatching both doors. tions for installation/maintenance.
124

127. M14X emergency handle
Emergency handle for internal locks - EN 179:2008
M14X IN STaINLESS STEEL 46 23 127
dEVICES
Description
Lever handle for emergency exit:
--
166
Reversible for right or left opening
-- For application to the secondary leaf of two-leaved
doors located at emergency exits
-- Suitable for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other types Ø20
of emergency exit doors
-- The lever and backplates are both made of AISI 304
75
8.5
satinized stainless steel, while the internal installation
plates are made of galvanized steel
-- The safety lock is anti-panic/fire rated, activates the ver- SUPPLIEd TOGETHER WITH THE dOOR
tical rods and ensures automatic closure
-- Suitable for doors with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880 mm/ For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors:
leaf, mass up to 300 kg/leaf, with fire rating EI2120 REI120 Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance,
and smoke resistance, handle protrusion of 65 mm vertical rods, upper locking device, upper strike plate.
Included (in the package): Nr. 1 lever handle in satinized stainless steel, Nr. 2
Use galvanized steel internal installation plates, Nr. 2 blank backplates in sati-
The M14X emergency exit handle is to be applied on doors nized stainless steel, Nr. 1 square spindle, Nr. 1 floor-mounted door catch, Nr.
designated for emergency situations in which the people 1 companion arm (for fire doors only), fastener screws, Nr. 1 adhesive picto-
involved are accustomed to using safety exits and their gram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of instructions for installation/maintenance.
opening devices, and who are therefore highly unlikely to
be in a state of panic.
The active (main) leaf must also be equipped with an anti-
KIT M14X VERSION
panic or emergency device.
(SUPPLIEd SEPaRaTELy FROM THE dOOR)
Operation mode KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors:
The M14X emergency device is always used in combina- Please specify the door type - REVER, UNIVER or PROGET - in the order.
tion with a second device for safety or emergency exits KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 1
that is applied to the active leaf, and for this reason does lever handle in satinized stainless steel, Nr. 2 galvanized steel internal
not include external opening door furnitures. installation plates, Nr. 2 backplates in satinized stainless steel, Nr. 1
From the push side, opening is possible at any time by square spindle, Nr. 1 upper locking device (for Rever and Univer multi-
pushing on the handle, which causes the vertical rods to purpose only), Nr. 1 companion arm (excluding Rever and Univer mul-
retract and at the same time pulls back the bolt of the ac- tipurpose doors), fastener screws, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green ar-
tive leaf’s lock, unlatching both doors. row), Nr. 1 set of instructions for installation/maintenance.
M14, M14X CERTIFICaTION
ATTESTATO DI CONFORMITÀ
ATTESTAT CONFORMIT À
T !
Suited for the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors with di- DIRETTIVA 89 /1 0 6/CE E
CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY
!
mensions up to 1350 x 2880 mm/leaf, masses of 300 kg/leaf. CERT CONFORMI
MITY 0425
DIRECTIVE 89 /1 0 6/CE E
Questo certificato è rilasciato in conformità a quanto prescritto dall’Art.6 par.2 lettera b) del DPR 21 aprile 1993, n°246 (Direttiva 89/106/CEE)
!
ed attesta la conformità del prodotto di seguito identificato agli Art.1, Art.2 ed allegato A del DPR 21 aprile 1993, n°246 (Direttiva 89/106/CEE)
This certificate is issued in accordance with the requirements defined in Article 6 par.2 lett. B) of DPR 21th April 1993, n° 246 (89/106/CE Directive) and
certifies the compliance of the product to art. 1, art. 2 and annex A of DPR 21th April 1993, n° 246 (89/106/CE Directive)
!
!
ATTESTAT O N° 2148 - CPD - 2010 CERTIFICATE N°
Denomination M14 EMERGENCY EXIT DEVICE Organismo notificato Notified Body
ICIM S.p.A. - Piazza Don Mapelli, 75 – 20099 SESTO SAN GIOVANNI Identification number: 0425
Manufacturer Ninz S.p.A. Corso Trento, 2/A
I-38061 ALA (TN)/ITALY Dati Fabbricante
Sede legale NINZ S.p.A. Corso Trento, 2/A 38061 ALA (TN) ITALY
Manufacturer details
Head office
Year application trademark 10 Unità operativa Production unit
Dati prodotto Product datails
Nr. and year of the standard EN 179:2008 Tipologia DISPOSITIVI PER USCITE DI EMERGENZA AZIONATI MEDIANTE MANIGLIA A Type
LEVA O PIASTRA A SPINTA
Certifying body 0425 EMERGENCY EXIT DEVICES OPERATED BY A LEVER HANDLE OR PUSH PAD
Denominazione Dispositivo di emergenza serie “M14” “M14X” Denomination
certificate Nr. 2148-CPD-2010 Controserrature antipanico art. AP020P, AP020U, 3201001.006
Dispositivo superiore art. 3105080, 3105024, 3305003
Classification 377B1442AC Riscontro asta art. 2401046, 2401044, 2401002
Boccola pavimento art. 2401001, 2401007, 3105091, 2401020
Aste verticali art. 3305015, 3305016, 3305002, 3305005
Comandi art. 3101001.008 (M14), 3101017.004 (M14X)
1st Category of use very frequent
2nd Durability 200.000 cycles Sistema di attestazione della conformità 1 System of attestation of conformity
Norma di riferimento EN 179:2008
3rd Door mass over 200 kg Classificazione
Standard reference
Classification
3 7 7 B 1 4 4 2 A C
4th Suitable for fire/smoke rated doors
Eventuali estensioni Nessuna / None Extensions
5th Safety, suitable for evacuation routes
6th High corrosion resistance 240 h Eventuali condizioni di
subordine della Nessuna / None
Condition of
subordination of CE
7th Material safety 1000 N Certificazione CE certification
8th Handle protrusion up to 100 mm Il presente attestato è valido esclusivamente per il prodotto indicato. Eventuali varianti da apportare devono essere approvate da ICIM SpA
The present certificate is valid only for the product described above. Every change has to be approved by ICIM S.p.A.
9th Activation type with lever handle !
10th Suited for door: two-leaved, on the secondary leaf only Data di emissione Emissione corrente Data di scadenza ICIM S.p.A.
Issue date Current issue Expiring date
Il Presidente
! !
12/03/2010 12/03/2010! 11/03/2020 Ing. Tullio Badino
! !
!
125

128. EXUS®
126

129. Presentation
EXUS® panic bars
PRESENTATION
EXUS®
EXUS® panic bars
Ninz S.p.A. is a leader in fire doors, and has once again reas- With the new EXUS® panic bar, NINZ S.p.A. demon-
serted itself as a visionary company with a strong identity strates its willingness to believe in market develop-
created by its continuous research into the design and tech- ment by investing in designs and company image in
nology of its own products, such as the new line of EXUS® order to endow its own products with added value
panic bars. while maintaining highly competitive quality-price
The EXUS® panic bars are marked and according to Euro- ratios.
pean standard EN 1125:2008, which entered in effect Janu-
ary 01, 2010, and which prescribes a serious of substantial
changes that further extend the requirements for maximum
safety and ease of opening.
The KIT designed for your needs
When ordered separately from the door, the EXUS® series
of panic bars is provided in elegant and functional KITs
packaged for presentation in the most appropriate for-
mat for distribution.
Packaging in KITs ensures customers, installers and there-
fore the final users that they are receiving a complete an- Black NYLON handle ALUMINUM handle with STAIN-
ti-panic system with fully corresponding parts which are
LESS STEEL lever handle and
all certified.
chromed ALUMINUM backplate
Finishing
Attention to detail and proportions are highlighted by se-
lect materials and finishing.
In addition to the black NYLON version combined with
anodized ALUMINUM bars, new combinations include
the all satinized STAINLESS STEEL version and the pol- NOTE
ished chromed ALUMINUM version combined with the By default external door furni-
anodized ALUMINUM bar. Many other color and surface ture is provided with the same
combinations are possible for equally aesthetic solutions. finishing as the panic bar.
The particular aesthetics of soft forms is one of the exclu-
sive advantages of EXUS® panic bars, representing the
fruit of designs generated in collaboration with Studio
MM Design, which has been working with the company
for many years. Satinized STAINLESS STEEL handle
Certifications and replacements
Given the importance of maintaining the entire system’s
conformity, special attention has been paid to replace-
ment parts, which have been subjected to testing in ac-
cordance with the EN 1125:2008 standard due to their piv-
otal role in maintaining certification.
The only way to ensure that the products maintain their
original characteristics over time is by using original NINZ
replacement parts.
For this reason, the instructions for EXUS® panic bars in-
clude additional indications regarding proper installation
and maintenance plus a exploded assembly drawing that
specifies every smallest detail of the certified system with all
of the references required for ordering replacement parts.
127

130. EXUS® - Features, certifications
Panic bar
FEaTURES
EXUS®
-- Newly designed product with state of the art techno-
logical concept
-- Available several in color and surface combinations:
satinized stainless steel for the lever arms and the bar,
or aluminum with polished chrome lever arms and
anodized aluminum bar, and finally the classic ever-
green combination - black nylon lever arms with ano-
dized aluminum bar
-- Certified for internal lock with 40 or 65 mm entrances
for single leaves or active leaves, with 30 or 80 mm
entrance for secondary leaves and with square spin- EXUS® is a registered trademark owned by Ninz S.p.A.
dle rotation of up to 45°
-- Possibility of locking by key on the bar side as well
-- Reversible for Right or Left mounting Also suited for doors with fire ratings:
-- Protrusion 125 mm
REI 30 REI 60EI2120 smoke resistant 90
REI
-- Proposed together with the door or separately in a
complete KIT packaged in a black/yellow box
-- Label applied to the packaging to identify the prod-
uct‘s characteristics
-- Wide range of customizations: colored bar, colored or
stainless steel handles, lock with access control mech-
anisms, special coded or mastered cylinders
40
200
95
125 38
max. 1237
CERTIFICaTION
Suited for one-leaved doors or the active and secondary
leaves of two-leaved doors with dimensions up to 1350 x
2880 mm/leaf, masses of 300 kg/leaf
Denomination EXUS PANIC BAR
Manufacturer Ninz S.p.A. Corso Trento, 2/A
I-38061 ALA (TN)/ITALY
Year application trademark 08
Nr. and year of the standard EN 1125:2008
Certifying body 0425
certificate Nr. 1228-CPD-2007
Classification 377B1321AA
1st Category of use very frequent
2nd Durability 200.000 cycles
3rd Door mass over 200 kg
4th Suitable for fire/smoke rated doors
5th Safety, suitable for evacuation routes
6th High corrosion resistance 96 h
7th Material safety 1000 N
8th Bar protrusion up to 150 mm
9th Activation type with push bar
10th Suited for one- or two-leaved doors
128

131. EXUS® LP BLACK NYLON
Panic bar for internal locks - EN 1125:2008
EXUS® LP IN BLACK NYLON EXUS LP (SUPPLIED WITH THE DOOR)
EXUS®
For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved
doors:
Included (mounted on the door):
Included (in the package): Nr. 2 door command mechanisms, Nr. 2
black nylon carter covers, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodi-
zed aluminum bar, Nr. 1 black nylon door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder
with 3 keys, Nr. 1 double cylinder with 3 keys (DC version only), Nr. 1
drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of
installation/maintenance instructions
Versions available: BM, BSP, BS, BMC, BC, B (for Proget doors only),
Description DC BM, DC BSP, DC BS, DC ELM, ELM.
The EXUS LP panic exit device consists of an anodized aluminum ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages
horizontal bar that inserts into the lever arms attached to the
command mechanisms which activate the lock. For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors:
-- Reversible for right or left opening Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm
-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors entrance, the upper re-latch device, the upper strike plate and the ver-
-- Suited for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other types of tical rods
panic exit doors Included (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black
-- The horizontal bar is made of extruded anodized alumi- nylon carter covers, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized alumi-
num with an elliptical cross-section measuring 40 x 20 num bar, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (for fire
mm and a length of 1150 mm doors only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green
-- Two black nylon lever arms with galvanized steel core arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions
-- The two command mechanisms are made of galvanized Versions available: A
steel with black nylon cover plates, one of which has an
EXIT label that identifies the lock side
-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cylinders EXUS LP KIT
-- External door furniture and the backplate are made of (SUPPLIED SEPARATELY FROM THE DOOR)
black nylon, while the internal installation plate is made
of galvanized steel KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors:
-- DC version with double cylinder to pass Please specify leaf thickness and door type - REVER, UNIVER or PRO-
GET - in the order
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike
VERSIONS AVAILABLE plate insert, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter co-
vers, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1
black nylon external door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr.
1 double cylinder with 3 keys (DC version only), Nr. 1 drilling template,
Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/main-
tenance instructions
Versions available: BM, BSP, BS, BMC, BC, DC BM, DC BSP, DC BS
BM BSP BS BMC
KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors, suited for RE-
VER, UNIVER and PROGET fire and multipurpose doors (pro-
duced after 01.01.2005): specify door type on the order form
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr.
2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 2 black
nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 upper re-latch
device, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (exclu-
BC B A DC BM ding REVER and UNIVER MULTIPURPOSE), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr.
1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/mainte-
nance instructions
Versions available: A
KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors and suited for
other types of multipurpose doors:
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr.
DC BSP DC BS DC ELM ELM 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 2 black
nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 upper re-latch
device, Nr. 1 upper strike plate, Nr. 1 angular support bracket, Nr. 1
Variations on request (see dedicated page) upper rod, Nr. 1 lower rod, Nr. 2 extension rods, Nr. 1 floor-mounted
floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhe-
-- Aluminum bar painted in RAL colors sive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance
-- External BM and BSP door furnitures in satinized stainless steel instructions
-- External BM and BSP door furnitures painted in RAL colors Versions available: A
-- MAC1 panic lock with access control system, combinable with the
BM and DC BM versions
-- Mastered or coded cylinders
-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the door is open
129

132. EXUS® LA ALUMINUM
Panic exit device for internal locks - EN 1125:2008
EXUS® LA IN ALUMINUM EXUS LA (SUPPLIED WITH THE DOOR)
EXUS®
For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved
doors:
Included (mounted on the door): the anti-panic lock with 65 mm en-
trance and the backplate insert
Included (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished
chrome aluminum carter covers, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum lever
arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 stainless steel/aluminum
door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 double cylinder
with 3 keys (DC version only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive
pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of instructions for installation/main-
Description tenance.
The EXUS LA panic bar consists of an anodized aluminum Versions available: BM, BSP, B (for Proget doors only), DC BM, DC BSP,
horizontal bar that inserts into lever arms attached to the DC ELM, ELM.
command mechanisms which activate the lock. ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages
-- Reversible for right or left opening For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors:
-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm en-
-- Suited for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other types trance, the upper re-latch device, the upper strike plate and the vertical rods
of panic exit doors Included (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished
-- The horizontal bar is made of extruded anodized alu- chrome aluminum carter covers, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum lever
minum with an elliptical cross-section measuring 40 x arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch,
20 mm and a length of 1150 mm Nr. 1 companion arm (excluding REVER and UNIVER MULTIPURPOSE),
-- The two lever arms are made of an aluminum alloy Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1
with a polished chrome finish set of installation/maintenance instructions
-- The two command mechanisms are made of galva- Versions available: A
nized steel with aluminum alloy cover plates with a
polished chrome finish, one of which has an EXIT label
to identify the lock side EXUS LA KIT
-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cyl-
inders (SUPPLIED SEPARATELY FROM THE DOOR)
-- The door furniture consist of the AISI 304 stainless
steel handle or knob and the aluminum alloy back- KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors:
plate with polished chrome finish Please specify leaf thickness and door type - REVER, UNIVER or PRO-
-- The arms, backplates and handle caps are finished GET - in the order
with tri-valent chrome in compliance with the ROSH KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike
regulation plate insert, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished chrome alumi-
-- DC version with double cylinder to pass num carter covers, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum lever arms, Nr. 1
anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 stainless steel/aluminum external door
furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 double cylinder with 3
VERSIONS AVAILABLE keys (DC version only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram
(green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions
Versions available: BM, BSP, DC BM, DC BSP
KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors, suited for REVER,
UNIVER and PROGET fire and multipurpose doors (produced
after 01.01.2005): specify door type on the order form
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2
BM BSP B A command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum carter covers,
Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum
bar, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1
companion arm (excluding REVER and UNIVER MULTIPURPOSE), Nr. 1
drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of
installation/maintenance instructions
Versions available: A
DC BM DC BSP DC ELM ELM
KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors and suited for
other types of multipurpose doors:
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2
Variations on request (see dedicated page) command mechanisms, Nr. 2 chromed aluminum carter covers, Nr. 2
chromed aluminum lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1
-- Aluminum bar painted in RAL colors
upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 upper strike plate, Nr. 1 angular support
-- MAC1 panic lock with access control system, combin-
bracket, Nr. 1 upper rod, Nr. 1 lower rod, Nr. 2 extension rods, Nr. 1
able with the BM and DC BM versions
floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm, Nr. 1 drilling tem-
-- Mastered or coded cylinders
plate, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/
-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the
door is open
maintenance instructions
Versions available: A
130

133. EXUS® LX STAINLESS STEEL
Panic exit device for internal locks - EN 1125:2008
EXUS® LX IN STAINLESS STEEL EXUS LX (SUPPLIED WITH THE DOOR)
EXUS®
For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved
doors:
Included (mounted on the door): the anti-panic lock with 65 mm en-
trance and the backplate insert
Included (in the package): Nr. 2 stainless steel command mechanisms,
Nr. 2 stainless steel carter covers, Nr. 2 stainless steel lever arms, Nr. 1
stainless steel bar, Nr. 1 stainless steel door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylin-
der with 3 keys, Nr. 1 double cylinder with 3 keys (DC version only), Nr.
1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set
of installation/maintenance instructions
Description Versions available: BM, BSP, B (for Proget doors only), DC BM, DC BSP,
The entire EXUS LX panic bar is made of stainless steel, and DC ELM, ELM.
consists of a horizontal bar that inserts into lever arms at- ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages
tached to the command mechanisms which activate the lock.
For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors:
-- Maximum corrosion resistance and noteworthy robust- Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm
ness of the entire set entrance, the upper re-latch device, the upper strike plate and the ver-
-- Optimal aesthetic appearance tical rods
-- Reversible for right or left opening Included (in the package): Nr. 2 stainless steel command mechanisms,
-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors Nr. 2 stainless steel carter covers, Nr. 2 stainless steel lever arms, Nr. 1
-- Suited for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other types of stainless steel bar, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion
panic exit doors arm (for fire doors only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive picto-
-- The horizontal bar is made of AISI 304 satinized stainless
gram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions
steel with an elliptical cross-section measuring 40 x 20
Versions available: A
mm, length of 1150 mm
-- The two lever arms are made of AISI 304 satinized stain-
less steel
-- The two command mechanisms are made of AISI 304 EXUS LX KIT
stainless steel
-- The two backplates and the cover caps are made of AISI
(SUPPLIED SEPARATELY FROM THE DOOR)
304 satinized stainless steel, and one is labeled with EXIT
KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors:
to identify the lock side
-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cylinders
Please specify leaf thickness and door type - REVER, UNIVER or PRO-
-- The door furnitures and related backplate are made of GET - in the order
AISI 304 satinized stainless steel, while the internal instal- KIT contents: Nr. 1 reversible anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr.
lation plate is made of galvanized steel 1 strike plate insert, Nr. 2 stainless steel command mechanisms, Nr. 2
-- DC version with double cylinder to pass stainless steel carter covers, Nr. 2 stainless steel lever arms, Nr. 1 stain-
less steel bar, Nr. 1 stainless steel external door furniture, Nr. 1 half-
cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 double cylinder with 3 keys (DC version
VERSIONS AVAILABLE only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow),
Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions
Versions available: BM, BSP, DC BM, DC BSP
KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors, suited for REVER,
UNIVER and PROGET fire and multipurpose doors (produced af-
ter 01.01.2005): specify door type on the order form
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2
BM BSP B A stainless steel command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel carter covers,
Nr. 2 stainless steel lever arms, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar, Nr. 1 upper
re-latch device, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm
(excluding REVER and UNIVER MULTIPURPOSE), Nr. 1 drilling template,
Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/mainte-
nance instructions
Versions available: A
DC BM DC BSP DC ELM ELM
KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors and suited for
other types of multipurpose doors:
Variations on request (see dedicated page) KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2
stainless steel command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel carter cov-
-- MAC1 panic lock with access control system, combin- ers, Nr. 2 stainless steel lever arms, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar, Nr. 1 upper
able with the BM and DC BM versions re-latch device, Nr. 1 upper strike plate, Nr. 1 angular support bracket,
-- Mastered or coded cylinders Nr. 1 upper rod, Nr. 1 lower rod, Nr. 2 extension rods, Nr. 1 floor-
-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr.
door is open 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/mainte-
nance instructions
Versions available: A
131

134. KIT EXUS® LP and LA for glazed doors
Panic exit device for internal locks - EN 1125:2008
EXUS® LP KIT IN BLACK NYLON EXUS® LA KIT IN ALUMINUM
EXUS®
Description Description
The EXUS LP panic exit device consists of an anodized The EXUS LA panic exit device consists of a horizontal bar
aluminum horizontal bar that inserts into the lever arms that inserts into the lever arms attached to the command
attached to the command mechanisms which activate mechanisms which activate the lock.
the lock.
-- Reversible for right or left opening
-- Reversible for right or left opening -- For application to the glazed door locks on single or
-- For application to the glazed door locks on single or two-leaved doors
two-leaved doors -- The horizontal bar is made of extruded anodized alu-
-- The horizontal bar is made of extruded anodized alu- minum with an elliptical cross-section measuring 40 x
minum with an elliptical cross-section measuring 40 x 20 mm and a length of 1150 mm
20 mm and a length of 1150 mm -- The two lever arms are made of an aluminum alloy
-- Two black nylon lever arms with galvanized steel core with a polished chrome finish
-- The two command mechanisms are made of galva- -- The two command mechanisms are made of galva-
nized steel with black nylon cover plates, one of which nized steel with aluminum alloy backplates with pol-
has an EXIT label that identifies the lock side ished chrome finishing, one of which has an EXIT label
-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for glass door locking to identify the lock side
mechanisms and uses Euro profile cylinders -- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for glass door locking
-- The door furnitures are made of glossy black resin mechanisms and uses Euro profile cylinders
-- Door furnitures made of satinized stainless steel
-- The arms and carters are finished with tri-valent
chrome in compliance with the ROSH regulations
VERSIONS AVAILABLE VERSIONS AVAILABLE
KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors: KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors:
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 40 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 40 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike
plate insert, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon backplates, plate insert, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished chrome alu-
Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 ex- minum carter covers, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum lever arms, Nr.
ternal handle with black resin rosette, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 external handle with stainless steel
arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions rosette, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installa-
tion/maintenance instructions
Article Nr. Bar KIT Thicknesses up to
4204306.001 EX LP BM V 70 mm Article Nr. Bar KIT Thicknesses up to
4204306.002 EX LP DC BM V 70 mm 4204306.004 EX LA BM V 70 mm
4204306.005 EX LA DC BM V 70 mm
DC - Versions for cylinders to pass (cylinder not included), AISI stainless
steel mechanisms DC - Versions for cylinders to pass (cylinder not included), AISI stainless
steel mechanisms
KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors:
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 30 mm entrance, Nr. KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors:
2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 2 black KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 30 mm entrance, Nr. 2
nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 upper re-latch command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum carter covers,
device, Nr. 1 upper strike box, Nr. 1 upper rod, Nr. 1 lower rod, Nr. 1 Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum
extension rod, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 adhesive picto- bar, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 upper strike plate, Nr. 1 upper
gram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions rod, Nr. 1 lower rod, Nr. 1 extension rod, Nr. 1 recessed floor-mounted
floor catch, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of instal-
Article Nr. Bar KIT Thicknesses up to lation/maintenance instructions
4204306.003 EX LP A V 70 mm
Article Nr. Bar KIT Thicknesses up to
4204306.006 EX LA A V 70 mm
132

135. KIT EXUS® LX for glazed doors
Panic exit device for internal locks - EN 1125:2008
EXUS® LX KIT IN STAINLESS STEEL DOOR FURNITURES FOR GLAZED DOORS
EXUS®
Description
The entire EXUS LX panic exit device is made of stainless
steel, and consists of a horizontal bar that inserts into the Article Nr. Description
lever arms attached to the command mechanisms which Stainless steel handle with rosette, satinized finish,
activate the lock. 4211104.002
standard for KIT EXUS LA and LX
Glossy black resin handle with rosette, standard for
-- Maximum corrosion resistance and noteworthy ro- 4211104.001
EXUS LP
bustness of the entire set
-- Optimal aesthetic appearance
-- Reversible for right or left opening
-- For application to the glazed door locks on single or
two-leaved doors
-- The horizontal bar is made of AISI 304 satinized stain-
less steel with a 40 x 20 mm elliptical cross-section and
a length of 1150 mm
-- The two lever arms are made of AISI 304 satinized BM DC BM A
stainless steel
-- The two command mechanisms are made of AISI 304
stainless steel Variations on request (see dedicated page)
-- The two carters and cover caps are made of AISI 304
satinized stainless steel, and one is labeled with EXIT -- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the
to identify the lock side door is open
-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for glazed door locks -- The horizontal bar of LP and LA versions can be pain-
and uses Euro profile cylinders ted an RAL tint
-- External door furniture made of satinized stainless steel -- The handle of LP versions can be in satinized stainless
steel
VERSIONS AVAILABLE
NOTE
KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors: It is obligatory for secondary leaves to include a companion arm to
KIT contents: Nr. 1 reversible anti-panic lock with 40 mm entrance, ensure correct functioning of the closing regulator and, if necessary,
Nr. 1 lock strike plate, Nr. 2 stainless steel command mechanisms, also to keep the two leaves from getting blocked when opened simul-
Nr. 2 stainless steel carter covers, Nr. 2 stainless steel lever arms, Nr. taneously.
1 stainless steel bar, Nr. 1 external handle with stainless steel rosette,
Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/main-
tenance instructions
Article Nr. Bar KIT Thicknesses up to
4204306.007 EX LX BM V 70 mm
4204306.008 EX LX DC BM V 70 mm
DC - Versions for cylinder to pass (cylinder not included)
KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors:
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 30 mm entrance, Nr.
2 stainless steel command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel carter
covers, Nr. 2 stainless steel lever arms, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar, Nr.
1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 upper strike plate, Nr. 1 upper rod, Nr.
1 lower rod, Nr. 1 extension rod, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr.
1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/mainte-
nance instructions
Article Nr. Bar KIT Thicknesses up to
4204306.009 EX LX A V 70 mm
133

136. Twist
134

137. Presentation
TWIST panic bars
PRESENTATION
Twist
TWIST panic bars
TWIST panic bars are marked in accordance with Euro- With the new packaging of the TWIST panic exit device, NINZ
pean standard EN 1125:2008, which entered in effect January S.p.A. demonstrates its intent to believe in market develop-
01, 2010, and which prescribes a series of substantial changes ment by investing in designs and company image in order to
that further extend the requirements for maximum safety endow its own products with added value while maintaining
and ease of opening. highly competitive quality-price ratios.
The KIT designed for your needs
When ordered separately from the door, the TWIST series
of panic bars is provided in elegant and functional KITs
packaged for presentation in the most appropriate format NOTE
for distribution. The TWIST exit device series is
Packaging in KITs ensures customers, installers and there- combined with a black NYLON
fore the final users that they are receiving a complete anti- handle.
panic system with fully corresponding parts that are all
certified.
Finishing Black NYLON handle
The TWIST panic exit device series is proposed in a black
NYLON version combined with an anodized ALUMINUM
bar. On request, the bar and the door furniture may be
painted an RAL colors, opening up an infinite variety of aes-
thetic solutions.
Certifications and replacements
Given the importance of maintaining the entire system’s
conformity, special attention has been paid to replace-
ment parts, which have been subjected to testing in ac-
cordance with the EN 1125:2008 standard due to their piv-
otal role in maintaining certification.
The only way to ensure that the products maintain their
original characteristics over time is by using original NINZ
replacement parts.
For this reason, the instructions for TWIST panic bars in-
clude additional indications regarding proper installation
and maintenance plus a explosion assembly drawing that
specifies every smallest detail of the certified system with all
of the references required for ordering replacement parts.
135

138. TWIST - Features, certifications
Panic bar
FEaTURES
TWIST
-- The classic line of panic bars, an ever-green, available
in the standard combination with black nylon arms/caps
and anodized aluminum bar
-- Certified for internal locks with a 65 mm entrance for
single leaves or active leaves, and with an 80 mm en-
trance for secondary leaves
-- Reversible for mounting on Right or Left doors
-- Protrusion 100 mm
-- Proposed together with the door or separately in a com-
plete KIT packaged in a single black/green box
-- Packaging is labeled to identify product characteristics
-- Wide range of customizations: colored bar, colored or Also suited for doors with fire ratings:
stainless steel handles, locks with access control systems,
special coded or mastered cylinders REI 30 REI 60EI2120 smoke resistant 90
REI
40
85
200
100 38
max. 1238
CERTIFICaTION
Suited for one-leaved doors or the active and secondary
leaves of two-leaved doors with dimensions up to 1350 x
2880 mm/leaf, masses of 300 kg/leaf
Denomination TWIST PANIC BAR
Manufacturer Ninz S.p.A. Corso Trento, 2/A
I-38061 ALA (TN)/ITALY
Year application trademark 08
Nr. and year of the standard EN 1125:2008
Certifying body 0425
certificate Nr. 1228-CPD-2007
Classification 377B1321AA
1st Category of use very frequent
2nd Durability 200.000 cycles
3rd Door mass over 200 kg
4th Suitable for fire/smoke rated doors
5th Safety, suitable for evacuation routes
6th High corrosion resistance 96 h
7th Material safety 1000 N
8th Bar protrusion up to 150 mm
9th Activation type with push bar
10th Suitable for one- or two-leaved doors
136

139. TWIST
Panic exit device for internal locks - EN 1125:2008
TWIST IN BLACK NYLON TWIST (SUPPLIED WITH THE DOOR)
Twist
For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved
doors:
Included (mounted on the door): the anti-panic lock with 65 mm en-
trance and the backplate insert
Included (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black
nylon carter covers, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized alumi-
num bar, Nr. 1 black nylon external door furniture door furniture, Nr. 1
half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive picto-
gram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions
Versions available: BM, BSP, BS, BMC, BC, B (for Proget doors only),
Description ELM/mt and ELM/cisa.
The TWIST nylon panic bar consists of an anodized alumi- ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages
num horizontal bar that inserts into the lever arms attached
to the command mechanisms used to activate the lock. For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors:
Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm
-- Reversible for right or left opening entrance, the upper re-latch device, the upper strike plate and the ver-
-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors tical rods
-- Suited for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other types Included (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black
of panic exit doors nylon carter covers, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized alu-
-- The horizontal bar is made of extruded anodized alu- minum bar, Nr. 1 floor-mounted door catch, Nr. 1 companion arm
minum with an elliptical cross-section measuring 40 x (for fire doors only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram
20 mm and a length of 1150 mm (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions
-- Two black nylon lever arms with galvanized steel core Versions available: A
-- The two command mechanisms are made of galva-
nized steel with black nylon backplates, one of which
has an EXIT label that identifies the lock side
-- The lock is anti-panic/fire resistance for Euro profile
TWIST KIT
cylinders (SUPPLIED SEPARATELY FROM THE DOOR)
-- Door furnitures and the backplate are made of black
nylon, while the installation plate is made of galva-
KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors:
nized steel
Please specify leaf thickness and door type - REVER, UNIVER or PRO-
GET - in the order
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike
VERSIONS AVAILABLE plate insert, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter cov-
ers, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1
black nylon external door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr.
1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set
of installation/maintenance instructions
Versions available: BM, BSP, BS, BMC, BC
BM BSP BS BMC KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors, suited for REVER,
UNIVER and PROGET fire and multipurpose doors (produced af-
ter 01.01.2005): specify door type on the order form
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr.
2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 2 black
nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 upper re-latch
device, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (exclud-
ing REVER and UNIVER MULTIPURPOSE), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr.
BC B A ELM
1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/mainte-
nance instructions
Versions available: A
VARIATIONS ON REQUEST (see dedicated page)
KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors and suited for
-- Aluminum bar painted in RAL colors other types of multipurpose doors:
-- External BM and BSP commands in satinized stainless KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr.
steel 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 2 black
-- External BM and BSP commands painted in RAL colors nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 upper re-latch
-- MAC1 panic lock with access control mode, combin- device, Nr. 1 upper strike plate, Nr. 1 angular support bracket, Nr. 1
able with the BM version upper rod, Nr. 1 lower rod, Nr. 2 extension rods, Nr. 1 floor-mounted
-- Mastered or encrypted cylinders floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 ad-
-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the hesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance
door is open instructions
Versions available: A
137

140. slash
138

141. Presentation
SLASH panic bars
PRESENTATION
slash
SLASH panic bars
Ninz S.p.A. is a leader in fire doors, and has once again reas- With the expansion of the line and the new packaging of the
serted itself as a visionary company with a strong identity SLASH panic bar, NINZ S.p.A. demonstrates its faith in market
created by its continuous research into the design and tech- development by investing in designs and company image in
nology of its own products, such as the new line of SLASH order to endow its fire doors and the series of accessories
panic bars. with added value while continuing to maintain highly com-
All SLASH handles are marked and pre-certified accord- petitive quality-price ratios.
ing to European standard EN 1125:2008, which entered in ef-
fect January 01, 2010, to prescribe a serious of substantial
changes that further extend the requirements for maximum
safety and ease of opening.
The KIT designed for your needs
When ordered separately from the door, the SLASH se-
ries of panic bars is provided in elegant and functional KITs
packaged for presentation in the most appropriate distribu-
tion format.
Packaging in KITs ensures customers, installers and there-
fore the final users that they are receiving a complete anti-
panic system with fully corresponding parts that are all
certified. Black NYLON handle ALUMINUM handle with STAINLESS
STEEL lever handle and chromed
ALUMINUM plate
Finishing
In addition to the black NYLON version combined with
anodized ALUMINUM bars, new combinations include
the satinized STAINLESS STEEL version and the pol-
ished chromed ALUMINUM version combined with the
anodized ALUMINUM bar. Many other color and sur-
face combinations are possible for equally aesthetic solu- NOTE
tions. The external door furnitures for
this series are provided with the
same finishing as the panic bar.
Certifications and replacements
Given the importance of maintaining the entire system’s
conformity, special attention has been paid to replace-
ment parts, which have been subjected to testing in ac-
Satinized STAINLESS STEEL handle
cordance with the EN 1125:2008 standard due to their piv-
otal role in maintaining certification.
The only way to ensure that the products maintain their
original characteristics over time is by using original NINZ
replacement parts.
For this reason, the instructions for SLASH panic bars in-
clude additional indications regarding proper installation
and maintenance plus a blow-up drawing that specifies
every smallest detail of the certified system with all of the
references required for ordering replacement parts.
139

142. SLASH - Features, certifications
Panic bar
FEaTURES
SLaSH
-- Panic bar that stands out from the others due to its
particular design and the rounded shapes of the car-
ters. This characteristic not only improves aesthetic ap-
peal, but it also eliminates any risk of injury during use
-- Available in different color and surface combinations,
in satinized stainless steel for the cover carters and
the bar, or with polished chromed aluminum carters
and anodized aluminum bar, and then there is always
the classic combination that is still in fashion - black
nylon carters with anodized aluminum bar
-- Certified for internal locks with a 65 mm entrance for
single leaves or active leaves, and with an 80 mm en- Also suited for doors with classifications up to:
trance for passive leaves
-- Reversible for Right or Left mounting REI 30 REI 60EI2120 smoke resistant 90
REI
-- Protrusion 75 mm
-- Proposed together with the door or separately in a
complete KIT packaged in a single black/orange box
-- Label applied to the packaging to identify the pro-
duct’s characteristics
-- Wide range of customizations: colored bar, colored or
stainless steel handles, lock with access control me-
chanisms, special encrypted or mastered cylinders
•-
60
•- 75
W
27 110
40
max. 1354
55
reduced
version
(AR) ALU max. 400, S.STEEL max. 434
CERTIFICaTION
Suited for one-leaved doors or the active and passive le-
aves of two-leaved doors with dimensions up to 1350 x
2880 mm/leaf, masses of 300 kg/leaf.
Denomination SLASH PANIC BAR
Manufacturer Ninz S.p.A. Corso Trento, 2/A
I-38061 ALA (TN)/ITALY
Year application trademark 08
Nr. and year of the standard EN 1125:2008
Certifying body 0425
CE certificate Nr. 1308-CPD-2007
Classification 377B1322BA
1st Category of use very frequent
2nd Durability 200.000 cycles
3rd Door mass over 200 kg
4th Suitable for fire/smoke rated doors
5th Safety, suitable for evacuation routes
6th High corrosion resistance 96 h
7th Material safety 1000 N
8th Bar protrusion up to 100 mm
9th Activation type with touch bar
10th Suitable for one- or two-leaved doors
140

143. SLASH BLACK NYLON
Panic bar for internal locks - EN 1125:2008
SLASH IN BLACK NYLON SLASH (SUPPLIED WITH THE DOOR)
slash
For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved doors:
Included (mounted on the door): the anti-panic lock with 65 mm en-
trance and the backplate insert
Included (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black
nylon carter covers, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar with connection tube
and spacer, Nr. 1 backplate in RAL 9006 colored nylon with internal
installation plate (for REVER and UNIVER doors), Nr. 1 black nylon
external door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 drilling
template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installa-
tion/maintenance instructions
Description Versions available: BM, BSP, BS, BMC, BC, B (for Proget doors only), ELM/
The SLASH panic bar consists of an anodized aluminum mt and ELM/cisa.
horizontal bar and an internal connection tube that inserts ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages
into the command mechanisms which activate the lock.
For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors:
-- Reversible for right or left opening Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm
-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors entrance, the upper re-latch device, the upper strike plate and the ver-
-- Suited for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other types tical rods
of panic exit doors Included (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black
-- The horizontal bar is made of extruded anodized alu- nylon carter covers, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar with connection tube
minum with an elliptical cross-section measuring 40 x and spacer, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm
20 mm and a length of 1150 mm, equipped with a (for fire doors only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram
connection tube (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions
-- The two command mechanisms are made of gal- Versions available: A, AR (reduced) for secondary leaves with FM L2
vanized steel with black nylon carter covers, one of width ≤ 500mm
which has a green label that identifies the lock side
-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cyl-
inders SLASH KIT
-- The door furnitures and the backplate are made of
black nylon, while the internal installation plate is (SUPPLIED SEPARATELY FROM THE DOOR)
made of galvanized steel
KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors:
Please specify leaf thickness and door type - REVER, UNIVER or PRO-
GET - in the order
VERSIONS AVAILABLE KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike
plate insert, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter cov-
ers, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr.
1 backplate in RAL 9006 colored nylon with internal installation plate,
Nr. 1 black nylon door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1
drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of
installation/maintenance instructions
BM BSP BS BMC Versions available: BM, BSP, BS, BMC, BC
KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors, suited for REVER,
UNIVER and PROGET fire and multipurpose doors (produced af-
ter 01.01.2005): specify door type on the order form
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2 com-
mand mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum
BC B A AR ELM bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 floor-
mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (excluding REVER and UNIVER
MULTIPURPOSE), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green ar-
row), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions
VARIATIONS ON REQUEST (see dedicated page) Versions available: A, AR (reduced) for use with passive leaves with FM L2
width ≤ 500mm
-- Aluminum bar painted in RAL colors
-- External BM and BSP commands in satinized stainless steel KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors and suited for
-- External BM and BSP commands painted in RAL colors other types of multipurpose doors:
-- MAC1 panic lock with access control mode, combin- KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2
able with BM versions command mechanisms, Nr. 2 black nylon carter covers, Nr. 1 anodized alu-
-- Mastered or encoded cylinders minum bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device,
-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the Nr. 1 upper strike plate, Nr. 1 angular support bracket, Nr. 1 upper rod,
door is open Nr. 1 lower rod, Nr. 2 extension rods, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr.
1 companion arm, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green
arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions
Versions available: A, AR (reduced) for use with passive leaves with FM L2
width ≤ 500mm
141

144. SLASH ALU ALUMINUM
Panic bar for internal locks - EN 1125:2008
SLASH IN ALUMINUM SLASH ALU (SUPPLIED WITH THE DOOR)
slash
For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved
doors:
Included (mounted on the door): the anti-panic lock with 65 mm en-
trance and the backplate insert
Included (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished
chrome aluminum cover plates, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar with
connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 backplate in black nylon with in-
ternal installation plate (for REVER and UNIVER doors), Nr. 1 stainless
steel/aluminum external door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys,
Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1
set of installation/maintenance instructions
Description Versions available: BM, BSP, B (for Proget doors only), ELM/mt and ELM/cisa.
The SLASH ALU panic bar consists of an anodized aluminum
ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages
horizontal bar and an internal connection tube that inserts
into the command mechanisms which activate the lock.
For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors:
-- Reversible for right or left opening Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm en-
-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors trance, the upper re-latch device, the upper strike plate and the vertical rods
-- Suited for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other types Included (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished
of panic exit doors chrome aluminum cover plates, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar with
-- The horizontal bar is made of extruded anodized alu- connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1
minum with an elliptical cross-section measuring 40 x companion arm (for fire doors only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 ad-
20 mm and a length of 1150 mm, equipped with a hesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance
connection tube instructions
-- The two command mechanisms are made of galva- Versions available: A, AR (reduced) for secondary leaves with FM L2
nized steel with aluminum alloy cover plates with pol- width ≤ 500mm
ished chrome finishing, one of which has a green label
to identify the lock side SLASH ALU KIT
-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cylinders
-- The external door furniture consist of the AISI 304 (SUPPLIED SEPARATELY FROM THE DOOR)
stainless steel handle or knob and aluminum alloy KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors:
plate with polished chrome finish Please specify leaf thickness and door type - REVER, UNIVER or PRO-
-- The carters and handle plate are finished with tri-
GET - in the order
valent chrome in compliance with the ROSH regulation
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr. 1 strike
box insert, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished chrome alu-
minum cover plates, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar with connection
VERSIONS AVAILABLE tube and spacer, Nr. 1 backplate in black nylon with internal installa-
tion plate, Nr. 1 stainless steel/aluminum external door furniture, Nr. 1
half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive picto-
gram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions
Versions available: BM, BSP
KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors, suited for REVER,
BM BSP B UNIVER and PROGET fire and multipurpose doors (produced af-
ter 01.01.2005): specify door type on the order form
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2
command mechanisms, Nr. 2 polished chrome aluminum cover plates,
Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1
upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion
arm (excluding REVER and UNIVER MULTIPURPOSE), Nr. 1 drilling tem-
A AR ELM plate, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/
maintenance instructions
Versions available: A, AR (reduced) for use with passive leaves with
FM L2 width ≤ 500mm
VARIATIONS ON REQUEST (see dedicated page)
KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors and suited for
-- Aluminum bar painted in RAL colors other types of multipurpose doors:
-- MAC1 panic lock with access control system, combin- KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2
able with BM versions command mechanisms, Nr. 2 chromed aluminum cover plates, Nr. 1 ano-
-- Mastered or encoded cylinders dized aluminum bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 upper re-
-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the latch device, Nr. 1 upper strike plate, Nr. 1 angular support bracket, Nr. 1
door is open upper rod, Nr. 1 lower rod, Nr. 2 extension rods, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor
catch, Nr. 1 companion arm, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pic-
togram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions
Versions available: A, AR (reduced) for use with passive leaves with
FM L2 width ≤ 500mm
142

145. SLASH STAINLESS STEEL
Panic bar for internal locks - EN 1125:2008
SLASH IN STAINLESS STEEL SLASH STAINLESS STEEL (SUPPLIED WITH THE DOOR)
slash
For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf) of two-leaved
doors:
Included (mounted on the door): the anti-panic lock with 65 mm en-
trance and the backplate insert
Included (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless
steel cover plates, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar with connection tube and
spacer, Nr. 1 backplate in black-colored nylon with internal installation
plate (for REVER and UNIVER doors), Nr. 1 stainless steel external door
furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr.
1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/mainte-
Description nance instructions
The SLASH STAINLESS STEEL panic bar consists of a stainless Versions available: BM, BSP, B (for Proget doors only), ELM/mt and
steel horizontal bar and an internal connection tube that in- ELM/cisa.
serts into the command mechanisms which activate the lock. ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages
-- Optimal corrosion and shock resistance For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors:
-- State of the art aesthetics Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance,
-- Secure attachment of carters the upper re-latch device, the upper strike plate and the vertical rods
-- Reversible for right or left opening Included (in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel
-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors cover plates, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1
-- Suited for Rever/Univer/Proget doors and other types floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (for fire doors only), Nr. 1
of panic exit doors drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installa-
-- The horizontal bar is made of AISI 304 satinized stain- tion/maintenance instructions
less steel with a 40 x 20 mm elliptical cross-section and Versions available: A, AR (reduced) for secondary leaves with FM L2
a length of 1150 mm, equipped with a connection tube
width ≤ 500mm
-- The two command mechanisms are made of galvanized
steel with AISI 304 stainless steel cover plates, one of
which has a green label that identifies the lock side SLASH STAINLESS STEEL KIT
-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cylinders
-- The external door furniture and related backplate are (SUPPLIED SEPARATELY FROM THE DOOR)
made of AISI 304 satinized stainless steel, while the
internal installation plate is made of galvanized steel KIT for single leaf or the active leaf of two-leaved doors:
Please specify leaf thickness and door type - REVER, UNIVER or PRO-
GET - in the order
VERSIONS AVAILABLE KIT contents: Nr. 1 reversible anti-panic lock with 65 mm entrance, Nr.
1 strike plate insert, Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel
cover plates, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar with connection tube and spacer,
Nr. 1 backplate in black nylon with internal installation plate, Nr. 1 stain-
less steel door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 drilling
template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installa-
tion/maintenance instructions
Versions available: BM, BSP
BM BSP B
KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors, suited for
REVER, UNIVER and PROGET fire and multipurpose doors (pro-
duced after 01.01.2005): specify door type on the order form
KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2
command mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel cover plates, Nr. 1 stainless
steel bar with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device,
A AR ELM Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm (excluding REVER
and UNIVER MULTIPURPOSE), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pic-
togram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions
VARIATIONS ON REQUEST (see dedicated page) Versions available: A, AR (reduced) for use with passive leaves with FM L2
width ≤ 500mm
-- MAC1 panic lock with access control system, combinable KIT for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors and suited for
with BM versions other types of multipurpose doors:
-- Mastered or coded cylinders KIT contents: Nr. 1 anti-panic safety lock with 80 mm entrance, Nr. 2 com-
-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the door mand mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel cover plates, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar
is open
with connection tube and spacer, Nr. 1 upper re-latch device, Nr. 1 upper
strike plate, Nr. 1 angular support bracket, Nr. 1 upper rod, Nr. 1 lower rod,
Nr. 2 extension rods, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm,
Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of
installation/maintenance instructions
Versions available: A, AR (reduced) for use with passive leaves with FM L2
width ≤ 500mm
143

146. General information
Panic bars - System components
EXIT DEVICES
COMPONENTS OF THE CERTIFIED SYSTEM
All NINZ panic bars are supplied in complete KITs to ensure on the leaf and/or doorframe.
conformity with EN 1125:2008 standards and certifi- The purpose of the following examples is to help clarify
cation of the product. When supplied together with the what panic bars must include to comply with certified
door, several of these components are already mounted samples.
Components of the EXUS system for one-leaved doors
Components of the EXUS system for the passive leaf of two-leaved doors
144

147. Variations on request
For panic bars
EXIT dEVICES
STaINLESS STEEL EXTERNaL dOOR FURNITURE
For all black nylon exit devices (except for those designed
for glazed doors), satinized stainless steel external BM and
BSP commands are available on request.
BM stainless steel BSP stainless steel
COLOREd PLaSTIC EXTERNaL dOOR FURNITURE
For all black nylon exit devices (except for those designed
for glazed doors), painted polypropylene PP external BM
and BSP commands are available on request.
Colors available:
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
1023 7016 7035 9006* 9010
*light aluminum
BMC colored RAL1023 BSPC colored RAL1023
PaINTEd HORIZONTaL BaR
For all exit devices (except for those with a stainless steel
bar), the aluminum horizontal bar may be painted in the
RAL color of your choice.
VERSION „E“ WITH MICROSWITCH
All exit devices may be equipped with a microswitch incor-
porated in the hinge side mechanism for signaling when
the door is open. The cable and cable sleeve for the elec-
trical connection between the exit device and the wall are
included.
“MaC1®” aCCESS CONTROL SySTEM
For all exit devices with type BM external door furniture
(except for those designed for glazed doors), the panic
lock is also available with the access control function. The
KIT contents include the MAC1 lock, the external door fur-
niture and, when supplied together with a door, the con-
nection cable with connector and cable sleeve. The lock is
not reversible, so the opening direction of the door needs
to be specified.
MAC1: - Powered at 12-24 V DC, 12-24 V AC Handle for MAC1 lock with LED
- 250 mA absorption with startup at 500 mA
- Timer incorporated, time set at 30 seconds
- Possibility for continuous power supply (open setting) For sizes, information and technical
data consult the dedicated pages
145

148. Dimensional drawings
For panic exit device components
EXIT DEVICES
Article Nr. Description
3201001.016 Lock for one-leaved doors and active leaves (AP 16/18)
3201001.024 Safety lock for secondary leaves (AP 020 P)
3201001.008 Safety lock for secondary leaves of UNIVER multipurpose and REVER (AP 020 U)
3201001.041 MAC1 Left lock
3201001.042 MAC1 Right lock
2401001.001 Lower floor catch for secondary leaf of PROGET and MULTIPURPOSE
3105019.001 Lower floor catch for secondary leaf of UNIVER
3105020.001 Lower floor catch for secondary leaf of REVER
2401006.001 Strike plate insert for one-leaved doors of PROGET and MULTIPURPOSE
3105080.001 Upper re-latch device for secondary leaf of PROGET and MULTIPURPOSE
3105024.001 Upper re-latch device for secondary leaf of UNIVER and REVER
2401046.001 Upper strike box for passive leaf of PROGET and MULTIPURPOSE
3305001.001 Companion arm for passive leaf
85 98
65 4 77
9 9
37
111
185
185
33
265
209
235
239
24
17
17
34
Lock for one-leaved doors and active leaves Safety lock for secondary leaf
96 85 25
4 75 65
9 9
37
37
72
185
209
235
185
265
239
19
17
24
30
Safety lock for secondary leaf of UNIVER multipurpose and REVER MAC1 lock (LX example)
146

149. Dimensional drawings
For panic exit device components
EXIT DEVICES
12
37 5
13
22
15
Ø18
40
70
40
13
10
35 51 26
Lower floor catch for passive leaf of PROGET and MULTIPURPOSE Upper re-latch device for secondary leaf of PROGET and MULTIPURPOSE
Ø63
38
14
Lower floor catch for passive leaf of UNIVER Upper re-latch device for secondary leaf of UNIVER and REVER
18
52
12
18
56 36 20
29
32
13
51
21
Lower floor catch for passive leaf of REVER Upper strike box for secondary leaf of PROGET and MULTIPURPOSE
220
63
59
55
Ø18
14
Ø20
34 15
21
20
10-20
Strike plate insert for one-leaved doors of PROGET and MULTIPURPOSE Companion arm for secondary leaf
147

150. Glass door dimensional drawings
For panic exit device components
EXIT DEVICES
Article Nr. Description
4506002.17(V) Lock for single leaf or active leaf
4506002.18(V) Safety lock for secondary leaf
4506006(V) Strike box for one-leaved doors
3105000 Upper re-latch device and upper strike box for secondary leaf
3105099 Lower floor catch for secondary leaf
3
103
9
45
45 52 30
40 57,5
313
195
283
195
345
375
3
59 32,5 92
124,5
100
129
15
40 22 90 10
16
30 28
Lock for single leaf or active leaf Safety lock for secondary leaf
22 3
2
28
Ø19
40
240
29
Ø10
24
Strike box for one-leaved door Upper re-latch device for secondary leaf
45
30
22
Ø18
17
Ø25
1
Upper strike box for secondary leaf Lower floor catch for secondary leafleaf
148

151. Notices
For panic exit device components
EXIT DEVICES
NOTICES
For panic exit devices, the human safety features are of Panic exit device components that are produced in con-
fundamental importance in terms of their conformity formity with European standards will provide a high level
with EN 1125:2008, which permits no modifications of any of human safety and an appropriate level of safety for
kind except for those described in the manufacturer’s in- material goods, as long as the doors and frames they are
stallation instructions. mounted on are in good condition.
All of NINZ’s installation instructions for panic exit devices Installation should only be carried out by qualified per-
include a list of elements that have been tested and ap- sonnel and in strict conformity with the manufacturer’s
proved for use with panic exit devices and that can be instructions.
packaged separately.
After installation is complete, a dynamometer is used to
No modifications to the certified system are permitted, measure the force required to release the lock by pressing
and every component must remain unchanged. on the horizontal bar and the measured forces are record-
ed in the maintenance register.
No uncertified components are applicable, and therefore
the package contains certified components only. The instructions must be kept on file by the owner of the
activity.
149

152. “the fire barrier
for any size”

153. NINZ sliding gates
FiRE dOORs
FEATURES 152 - 155
OPERATING MODE 156
OPTIONAL - MANDATORY ACCESSORIES 157 - 161
PEDESTRIAN DOORS 162 - 163
EXPLOSIVE COMPONENTS DRAWING 164 - 165
All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced technical changes to the contents of this brochure.
Fire rated closures are typically used for internal compartmentalization and have been designed for this purpose.

154. Features
Sliding gates
WHAT DEFINES THEM? Sliding gates available in the following classes:
sliding
gates
REI 30 REI 30 60
REI REI 180 REI 180 REI 90 REI 90
REI120 and REI180 fire rated gates are available with hori-
zontal sliding.
The field of application includes the closure of large open-
ings and/or special usage conditions in the dimensions re-
quested by the customer. Gates are supplied with leaves
made with flush panels of insulated sheet metal, top tu-
bular tracks, protective carters, counterweights, thermal
or electromagnetic fuses and finished with a base coat or
RAL colors, plus other accessories required for the correct
functioning of the product.
Standards
The gates are certified in accordance with the UNI 9723
standard in compliance with the ministerial provisions in
effect.
Opening direction
The opening direction needs to be specified when the or-
der is placed.
Left opening direction - one-leaved Right opening direction - one-leaved gate
Two-leaved gates
ATTENTION
left leaf right leaf
Fire compartmentalization elements should always be used properly.
They are only designed for installation in spaces and constructions that
are vertically aligned and flush.
Compartmentalization for interiors is for areas that are not subject to
strong air currents. Installation to be executed by specialized techni-
cians only. For special applications consult with our technical office.
Two-leaved gates available in the following classes: The holding system for the gate is chosen by the customer to conform
with their own worksite needs and the anti-fire design (thermal fuse
REI 60 REI 90
or electromagnet).
NOTE
Fire rated gates require careful design which reflects their dimensions that might hinder the operation or free movement of the gates. Given
and special functions. Every installation site should be measured and the considerable weight of gates, the bearing capacity of the walls and
checked for vertical alignment of the walls and gradients of the floor- crossbeams involved should be checked for the mounting of top guide
ing. Particular care must be taken to check for protrusions or blockages tracks and overlapping labyrinths.
152

155. Features
Sliding gates
REI 120 ONE-LEAVED VERSION Walls with a weight-bearing portion
sliding
suited for attachment of the sliding guide
gates
The sliding gates series has the following characteristics:
Installation
On weight-bearing masonry walls or insulated steel or in-
sulated steel structure.
Gate leaves
Made of continuous panels of hollow-core sheet metal
insulated with appropriate materials. Assembly involves
screwing the structure to pre-prepared horizontal pro-
files. Leaf thickness 80 mm.
Top guide track
300
For horizontal sliding, made of press-folded steel with pre-
drilled holes for attachment using plugs (not included). Over-
head sliding on low friction carriages. The extension of the 1015
floor-mounted guide track beyond the opening ensures the
perpendicularity of the leaf. The top guide track is covered
by a protection carter made of press-folded sheet metal.
NB: Guide track gradient of 2 mm/ml
Overlapping labyrinths
Made of press-folded steel.
Counterweight 150
For adjustable closure and protected by press-folded sheet
metal carters, with counterstrike inset.
Weight-bearing 230
Door handles beam
Recessed on both sides.
Wall opening H (min. 500)
Opening
Sealing
Thermo-expanding on all overlapping labyrinths and un-
derneath the leaf.
Identification plate 80
Marking with reference information that is applied di-
rectly to the handle.
FFL
Finishing 120
With a base coat thermoset in a 160 degree C furnace,
light turquoise pastel color (similar to NCS4020-B50G).
Packaging
Modules in disposable metal container.
120
Wall opening dimensions
150
Min. 600 x 500 mm, max. 6000 x 6000 mm
(larger sizes on request). 51 51
250* Wall opening L L + 250
Operation mode
Of the gate series with thermal fuse: the gate can stand still
at any position. The counterweight remains hooked to the
thermal fuse and only closes the gate when the fuse fails. *Variable dimensions for larger-sized gates
Weight
Of the sliding door: REI 120 approx. 50 kg/m² of wall
opening.
NOTE
Additional accessories are usually dependent on the size dimensions
of the gates
153

156. Features
Sliding gates
REI 180 ONE-LEAVED VERSION Walls with a weight-bearing portion
sliding
suited for attachment of the sliding guide
gates
In conformity with UNI 9723, the sliding gates series has
the following features:
Installation
On walls consisting of weight-bearing masonry.
Gate leaves
Made of continuous modules of hollow-core sheet metal
panels insulated with the appropriate materials. Assembly
involves screwing the structure to pre-prepared horizon-
tal profiles. Leaf thickness 140 mm.
Top guide track
300
For horizontal sliding, made of press-folded steel with pre-
drilled holes for attachment using plugs (not included).
Overhead sliding on low friction carriages. The extension
1015
of the floor-mounted guide track beyond the opening en-
sures the perpendicularity of the leaf. The top guide track
is covered by a protection carter made of press-folded
sheet metal.
NB: Guide track gradient of 2 mm/ml
Overlapping labyrinths
Made of press-folded steel.
210
Counterweight
For adjustable closure and protected by press-folded sheet Weight-bearing
230
metal carters, with counterstrike inset. beam in masonry or
reinforced cement
Door handles
Recessed on both sides.
Opening
Wall opening H
(min. 500)
Sealing
Thermo-expanding on all overlapping labyrinths and un-
derneath the leaf. 140
FFL
Identification plate
Marking with reference information that is applied di- 180
rectly to the handle.
Finishing
With a base coat thermoset in a 160 degree C furnace,
light turquoise pastel color (similar to NCS4020-B50G).
Packaging
210
180
Modules in disposable metal container.
51 51
Wall opening dimensions
Min. 600 x 500 mm, max. 6000 x 6000 mm 250* Wall opening L L + 250
(larger sizes on request).
Operation mode
Of the gate series with thermal fuse: *Variable dimensions for larger-sized gates
the gate can stand still at any position. The counterweight
remains hooked to the thermal fuse and only closes the
gate when the fuse fails.
Weight
Of the sliding door: REI 180 approx. 75 kg/m² of wall opening
NOTE
Additional accessories are usually dependent on the size dimensions
of the gates
154

157. Features
Sliding gates
REI 120 TWO-LEAVED VERSION Walls with a weight-bearing portion
sliding
suited for attachment of the top guide track.
gates
In conformity with UNI 9723, the sliding gates series has
the following characteristics:
Application
On weight-bearing masonry walls or insulated steel or in-
sulated steel structure.
Gate leaves
Made of continuous modules of hollow-core sheet metal
panels insulated with the appropriate materials. Assembly
involves screwing the structure to pre-prepared horizon-
tal profiles. Leaf thickness 80 mm.
300
Top guide track
For horizontal sliding, made of press-folded steel with
pre-drilled holes for attachment using plugs (not in-
1015
cluded). Overhead sliding on low friction carriages. The
extension of the floor-mounted guide track beyond the
opening ensures the perpendicularity of the leaves. The
top guide track is covered by a protection carter made of NB: Guide track gradient of 2 mm/ml
press-folded sheet metal. Also executable with unequal leaves
Overlapping labyrinths
Made of press-folded steel.
150
Counterweights
For adjustable closure and protected by press-folded sheet
metal carters.
Weight-bearing
230
beam
Door handles
Recessed on both sides of the leaves.
Wall opening H (min. 500)
Opening
Sealing
Thermo-expanding on all overlapping labyrinths and un-
derneath the leaves.
80
Identification plate
Marking with reference information that is applied di- FFL
rectly to the handle.
120
Finishing
With a coat of paint thermoset in a 160 degree C furnace,
light turquoise pastel color (similar to NCS4020-B50G).
Packaging
150
120
Modules in disposable metal container.
Wall opening dimensions
Min. 1200 x 500 mm, max. 8000 x 6000 mm 51 51
(larger sizes on request).
1/2 L + 350 min.* Wall opening L 1/2 L + 350 min.*
Operation mode
Of the gate series with thermal fuse:
the leaves stand still at any position. The counterweights
remain hooked to the related thermal fuse and only closes *Variable dimensions for larger-sized gates
the gate when the fuse fails.
Weight NOTE
Of the sliding door: REI 120 approx. 50 kg/m² of wall opening. Additional accessories are usually dependent on the size dimensions of
the gates
155

158. Operation mode
Sliding gates
OPERATION MODE OF SLIDING FIRE GATES WITH 5 3
4
sliding
ONE OR TWO LEAVES
gates
6
The selection of the holding system should reflect the cus-
tomer’s worksite needs and the anti-fire project. Opening
1
2
Operation mode of gates equipped with thermal fuse:
The counterweight (1) does not load the gate and the
operator (2) manually opens and closes the gates, which
remains in the position it is left in. When the thermal fuse NOTE
(3) is subjected to temperatures greater than 70° C, it The thermal fuse is only triggered when the temperature in the immedi-
breaks and causes the cable (4) to be released, so that the ate vicinity rises above 70° C, and it does not respond to smoke. Its ap-
counterweight drags the gates to the closed position. The plication, therefore, is not advisable when the gates are located outside
feed speed brake (5) prevents the gates from accelerat- the compartmentalization space and when a reaction to cold smoke is
ing during closure. The feed-in impact absorber (6) softens required.
the final feed-in impact of the closure.
Operation mode of gates equipped with electromagnet: Control unit and external RFC sensor
The counterweight (1) continuously loads the gate. The
gate usually remains open, held in place by the electro-
magnet (2). The counterweight closes the gate whenever 4 2
the electromagnet lacks impulse current from the control
unit or when the release button (3) is pressed. The feed 5
speed brake (4) prevents the gate from accelerating dur- Opening
ing closure. The feed-in impact absorber (5) softens the fi- 1 3
nal feed-in impact of the closure. The electromagnet must
be connected with a power control unit and the related
external smoke and heat detectors.
NOTE
The gate closes on impulse from a control unit controlled by an external
RFC detector, thus permitting automatic closure at temperatures lower
than 70° C as well in the presence of cold smoke. This means that the
gate can be installed in any position, even outside the compartmentaliza-
tion space.
TOP GUIDE TRACK
Detail of the upper guide track for one and two-leaved perfectly vertically aligned, installed properly and should
sliding gates. The heights refer to wall openings which are those values should be considered indicative.
150
210
REI 120
REI 180
90
90
230
230
85
85
35
35
156

159. Optional accessories
Sliding gates
PAinTing
sliding
gates
With ecologically formulated anti-corrosive epoxide prim-
er. Minimum resistance to salt fog exposure: 300 hours
(A.S.T.M. B - 117 - 61). Basic anti-corrosion coating: Light
turquoise pastel. Optional: finishing with satin topcoats
from the selection of furnace polymerized RAL colors.
Group 01:
Gates color: light turquoise pastel (similar to NCS4020B50G)
Group 03 (Basic anti-corrosion coating + satin topcoat finishing):
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
1004 1005 1006 1007 9006*
*Pre-approval of the sample is required.
Group 04 (Basic anti-corrosion coating + satin topcoat finishing):
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
Group 02 (Basic anti-corrosion coating + satin topcoat finishing): 1003 1012 1016 1021 1023 5002
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
1001 1013 1015 3000 3003 3020 5010 5012
Group 05 (Basic anti-corrosion coating only):
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
5015 5024 6000 6005 7001 7004 7011 7016
Basic anti-corrosion coating is available for all colors listed in group 02.
In general, all RAL tints are useable except for: RAL 1018, RAL
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL 5005 and RAL 9007
7024 7030 7032 7035 7037 7038 7040 7042
NOTE
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
Due to artifacts of the printing process, the colors depicted here may
7047 8011 8017 8019 9001 9002 9005 9010
not correspond exactly to the colors of actual doors. Please see the RAL
or NCS samples.
RAL RAL RAL
9011 9016 9018
Retouching
On request, Ninz also provides touch-up paint (nitro/syn-
thetic) in 1,00 kg cans in the necessary RAL tint.
Cleaning Protection
Water and neutral soap are recommended for the regu- Since the gates are designed for internal usage, they
lar cleaning of our products. Do not use common clean- should always be protected from atmospheric agents and
ing products (see detergents) and/or other solvents. We direct sunlight.
shall not be held responsible for any problems that arise if Exterior uses require paints that are specially designed for
these guidelines are not respected. this type of use (on request).
Re-painting ATTENTION
For re-painting, use the following procedure: External installation of gates require various measures for preventing prod-
-- sand and carefully wipe away any dust from the sur- uct degradation, such as:
faces 1. The gates should always be protected from bad weather. Permanent
-- apply a base layer of opaque 2-component epoxide damage may result if water seeps inside the door leaf. Provide canopies or
we recommend EPOX product Nr. 5203 beige 0059 roofing to protect newly installed and existing products.
made by ALCEA in Milan 2. Avoid darker colors for gates which will be exposed to direct sunlight.
-- repaint the surfaces with your choice of lacquers or Sheet metal can heat up and cause warping of the door leaf which could
paints. compromise the functionality of the door itself.
157

160. Mandatory accessories
Sliding gates
PULLEY TACKLES FOR SELF-CLOSURE
sliding
gates
Pulley tackles serve to ensure the full self-closure of sliding
gates which are wider than they are tall.
Maximum width WITHOUT TACKLES: (H-800) x 2
Normal pulley tackles
2 pulleys and standard counterweight box: Clamp
-- for gates wider than (height H - 800) x 2 and shorter
than (height H - 800) x 4
-- minimum space required on rebate side 250 mm
-- for geared counterweight: required space on the
opening side L + 400 mm
Special pulley tackles Normal/special pulley tackles
2 pulleys and augmented counterweight box:
-- for gates wider than (height H - 800) x 4 and shorter
than (height H - 1150) x 6
-- minimum space required on rebate side 350 mm
-- for geared counterweight: required space on the
opening side L + 500 mm
R pulley tackles Clamp
3 pulleys and larger counterweight box:
-- for gates wider than (height H - 1150) x 6 and shorter
than L=7000 mm
-- minimum space required on rebate side 350 mm
-- for geared counterweight: required space on the
opening side L + 500 mm
R pulley tackles
VT - VISCOTROLER®
ACCIDENT PREVENTION DEVICE
Gates should always be equipped with an automatic de-
vice that controls the feed speed of the door during au-
tomatic closing.
After the critical moment when automated re-closure
has been initiated, door speed increases progressively
in proportion to opening time and door weight. During
emergency situations, the energy that develops could
cause serious injury/damage to people or objects within
its range of motion. The hydraulic V.T. VISCOTROLLER®
rotor makes it possible to set a constant closing speed in
the range of 0.05 to 0,25 m/sec.
ATTENTION
For purposes of accident prevention, gates should always be equipped
with a feed-in brake to regulate closing speed. Customers who choose
not to include the feed-in brake assume full responsibility for possible
consequences.
158

161. Mandatory and optional accessories
Sliding gates
FEED-IN IMPACT ABSORBER
sliding
gates
Mandatory accessory for one- and two-leaved sliding
gates. Compression energy on the shaft is absorbed by
slowing the flow of a fluid by means of an adjustable Feed-in
limiter valve. The shock absorber of the shaft is re-armed impact
when the gate is re-opened. absorber
ATTENtion: be careful not to damage the impact absorber shaft
Tuning
L/2 + 200 (Normal counterweight)
L/2 + 350 (Geared counterweight)
ELECTROMAGNETS
Gates operation mode with electromagnets (on request):
the gate is usually left open. The counterweight is always
hooked to the leaf and closure occurs whenever the electric Position of
current to the electromagnet is interrupted. the EM
H +90
For smoke/heat detection systems, control unit and power electric
supply, see the dedicated page in the accessories doors sec- cable exit
tion of the present brochure.
Technical data for the CC600N electromagnet
per leaf up to 12 m² of wall opening
Electromagnet CC600N primary power supply 24 V DC
voltage tolerance ± 10%
nominal current 125 mA
nominal power 3W
insertion duration 100%
withstand force approx. 61 Kg.
operational temperature 0°C ÷ +50°C
operational temperature at 20°C 45°C
magnetic residue null
Technical data for the CC1400N electromagnet
per leaf up to 12 m² of wall opening
primary power supply 24 V DC
voltage tolerance ± 10%
Electromagnet CC1400N
nominal current 200 mA
nominal power 5W
insertion duration 100%
withstand force approx. 143 Kg.
operational temperature 0°C ÷ +50°C
operational temperature at 20°C 60°C
magnetic residue null
EC marked in conformity with STANDARD EN 1155
159

162. Optional accessories
Sliding gates
GEARED REI 120 AND REI 180 COUNTERWEIGHTS
100 Wall opening L
sliding
gates
On request due to space limitations on the rebate side,
sliding gates may also be supplied with geared and/or out-
of-alignment counterweights.
A 100 mm overlap of the leaf must be ensured regardless.
While ordering, please specify whether the rebate is NOR- L + 250 ~
MAL or SPECIAL.
Version with out-of-alignment REI 120 counterweight on the opposite side
100 Wall opening L 100 Wall opening L
40
L + 400* ~ L + 250 ~
Opposite-side counterweight version with normal rebate, REI 120 and REI 180 Out-of-alignment counterweight version, REI 120
100 Wall opening L 100 Wall opening L 100
min.130 L + 400* ~
1/2 L + 200 1/2 L + 200
Opposite-side counterweight version with special rebate, REI 120 and REI 180 Two-leaved out-of-line counterweight version, REI 120
*Variable dimensions for larger-sized gates.
NORMAL/SPECIAL REBATE
100 The building of the additional
apron after installation of
the gates is the buyer's
responsibility and duty
min.130
Normal rebate in the presence of a 90° wall Special rebate in the absence of a 90° wall or any obstacles
160

163. Optional accessories
Sliding gates
CROSS BEAM AND WEIGHT-BEARING STRUCTURE
sliding
gates
Cross beam made of 100 x 200 mm insulated steel profiles Cross beam measuring
for REI 120 one- or two-leaved sliding gates. Up to L = 100 x 200 mm
230
2500 ready for lateral attachment, plus additional ceiling
attachment for greater widths. Covering/finishing of the Two sheets of
beam with 2 sheets of 12.5 mm plasterboard is the cus- plasterboard sheets,
tomer‘s responsibility. 12.5 mm thick each
Mineral wool 150 kg/mc
Opening
Wall opening H
Lateral installation plate
(*)
Cross beam Example of weight-bearing structu
res: static calculation of the structure
is the customer‘s responsibility Leaf of sliding gates
(*) These profiles may also be used for the construction of a weight-
bearing structure. Spaces between the various profiles outside of the
span may be closed with any REI 120 wall type (plasterboard, panels,
etc.)
FFL
INTERNAL NIGHT LOCK
On request, Sliding gates may be equipped with night
locks with cylinders to pass.
Utilization of this type of mechanism with gates should be
indicated while ordering.
EXTERNAL NIGHT LOCK
The presence of external night lock on gates need not
necessarily be indicated during the ordering phase, and
is only useable from the side illustrated in the drawing.
161

164. Pedestrian door
Sliding gates
PEDESTRIAN DOOR
850
sliding
gates
REI 120 sliding gates, with one or two leaves, may be 1140
equipped with a pedestrian door with or without a lower
threshold. Pedestrian doors with thresholds and panic
bars are not suitable for escape routes. The right or left
2000
opening direction should be specified by the customer
during the ordering phase. By default pedestrian doors
are inserted in the second panel, which is next to the pan-
el with the handle. For additional information about the
SLASH panic exit device, please see the dedicated pages
in the panic exit device section of the present brochure. One-leaved gates
850
1140
Left Right Left Right
2000
Opening direction SLASH panic bar Two-leaved gates
Minimum gate dimensions required for insertion
of pedestrian doors with or without threshold
Pedestrian minimum FM dimensions
door size one leaved sliding gate two-leaved sliding gate
850 1700 2800
width
88
98
1140 2000 3350
height with
2090 2200*/2250** 2200*/2250**
threshold
height without
2000 2450 2450
threshold With lower threshold Without lower threshold
* opening on wall side
** opening on side opposite the wall
Pedestrian door with threshold: If the FM H height lower to the measures
listed, the height of the pedestrian door is reduced
Pedestrian doors used along escape routes are at the customer’s own risk!
VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL SHIMMING
60 150
Mandatory for gates with pedestrian doors equipped with
panic bars and/or pedestrian doors towards the wall side.
The counterweight box and the sliding leaf labyrinths are
increased by 60 mm.
NOTE
For two-leaved sliding doors, vertical shimming should be calculated
230
for both leaves. *
Shimming needs to be ordered separately. 95
ATTENTION
*The plasterboard finishing (not included) should be installed on site
after the guide track has been installed.
162

165. Pedestrian door
Sliding gates
OPENING OF PEDESTRIAN DOOR TOWARDS THE 150 150
sliding
OPPOSITE WALL WITH THE HANDLE
gates
230
230
Horizontal and vertical shimming is not necessary.
Wall opening L
Wall opening H (MIN. 2450 mm)
Net pedestrian opening
Wall opening H
250* FML + 250 ~
H handle 1000
H handle 1078
98
OPENING OF PEDESTRIAN DOOR TOWARDS THE 60 150 60 150
OPPOSITE WALL WITH THE SLASH PANIC BAR
230
230
The horizontal and vertical shimming is mandatory.
Wall opening L
Wall opening H (MIN. 2450 mm)
Net pedestrian opening Wall opening H
250* FML + 250 ~
H handle 1000
H handle 1078
98
OPENING OF PEDESTRIAN DOOR TOWARDS THE 60 150 60 150
SAME WALL WITH THE SLASH PANIC EXIT DEVICE
230
230
The horizontal and vertical shimming is mandatory.
Wall opening L
Wall opening H (MIN. 2450 mm)
Wall opening H
H handle 1000
H handle 1078
250* Net pedestrian FML + 250 ~
opening
98
Attention The threshold version of the pedestrian door with a panic bar is not suited for escape routes.
163

166. Explosive components drawing
Sliding gates
sliding gATEs WiTH OnE lEAF
sliding
gates
1. panel with handle 17. feed-in impact absorber SAM
2. intermediate panel 18. VT feed speed braking device (brake line belt device)
3. final panel 19. thermal fuse or electromagnet
4. Z overlapping labyrinth (wall) 20. floor-mounted guide track
5. vertical L overlapping labyrinth (leaf posterior) 21. counterweight plate 105x105 or 205x105 mm
6. horizontal L overlapping labyrinth (upper leaf) 22. return pulley standard diam. 60 mm
7. horizontal overlapping labyrinth underneath the guide track 23. counterweight return pulley returned diam. 50 mm
8. counterweight box 24. normal carriage diam. 75 mm
9. guide track box 25. double-grooved carriage for VT diam. 75 mm
10. sliding guide track 26. cable clamp
11. lower tube 27. cable
12. upper tube 28. guide-cover support
13.
14. rebate profile for NORMAL returned counterweight 29. rebate sealing 100 mm
15. rebate profile for SPECIAL returned counterweight 30. Recessed pair of handles
16. pair of lateral caps 31. End of guiding track device
Wall opening H
Normal rebate Special rebate
Wall opening L
164

167. Component positioning
Sliding gates
sliding gATEs WiTH TWO lEAVEs
sliding
gates
1F. panel with handle, female leaf 12M. upper tube for male leaf
1M. panel with handle, male leaf 16. pair of lateral caps
2F. intermediate panel, female leaf 17. afeed-in impact absorber SAM
2M. intermediate panel, male leaf 18. VT feed-in brake (brake line belt device)
3F. final panel, female leaf 19. thermal fuse or electromagnet
3M. final panel, male leaf 20. floor-mounted guide track
4. Z overlapping labyrinth (wall) 21. counterweight plate 105x105 or 205x105 mm
5. vertical L overlapping labyrinth (leaf posterior) 22. return pulley standard diam. 60 mm
6. horizontal overlapping L labyrinth (upper leaf) 24. normal carriage diam. 75 mm
7. horizontal overlapping labyrinth beneath the guide 25. double-grooved carriage for VT diam. 75 mm
8. counterweight box 26. cable clamp
9. guide cover 27. cable
10. sliding guide track 28. guide-cover support
11F. lower tube for female leaf 30. molded pair of handles
11M. lower tube for male leaf 31. L end of guiding track
12F. upper tube for female leaf
Foro muro H
The "male" and "female" leaf position is not fixed, and
the orientation depicted in the drawing may be inverted.
Wall opening L
GENERAL NOTES Installation should be executed by qualified technicians.
All rights reserved. Modifications may only be made as indicated in the installation inst-
No reproduction (partial or total) without prior authorization by Ninz. ructions.
Ninz reserves the right to modify the product. Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.
165

168. “the ideal solution with
minimal space requirements”
telescopic
gates

169. NINZ telescopic gates
FiRe DooRs
FEATURES 168
REI 120 MONOLATERAL GATES 169
REI 120 BILATERAL GATES 170
OPERATION MODE 171
OPTIONAL - MANDATORY ACCESSORIES 172 - 175
All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced technical changes to the contents of this brochure.
Fire rated closures are typically used for internal compartmentalization and have been designed for this purpose.

170. Features
Telescopic gates
WHAT DEFINES THEM? Mono-lateral telescopic gates available in class:
telescopic
gates
REI 30 REI 60 REI 90
REI120 telescopic fire rated gates are available as horizon-
tal sliding doors.
The field of use includes large openings and/or special us-
age conditions in customer-specified dimensions. Gates
are supplied with leaves made of flush insulated sheet
metal panes, sliding guides, protective carters, counter-
weights, thermal fuses or electromagnets and finished
in a base coat or RAL colors, plus other accessories as re-
quired for correct product functioning.
Standards
The gates are certified in accordance with UNI 9723 stand- left opening direction – mono-lateral telescopic gates
ards in compliance with the current ministerial provisions
in force.
Opening direction
Opening direction needs to be indicated while placing the
order. right opening direction – mono-lateral telescopic gates
left opening direction – mono-lateral telescopic gates
Bilateral telescopic gates
right opening direction – mono-lateral telescopic gates
Bilateral telescopic gates available in class:
REI 60 REI 90
NOTE ATTENTION
Fire rated gates require careful design which reflects their dimensions Fire compartmentalization elements should always be used properly.
and special functions. Every installation site should be measured and They are only designed for installation in spaces and constructions that
checked for vertical alignment of the walls and gradients of the floor- are vertically aligned and flush.
ing. Particular care must be taken to check for protrusions or blockages Compartmentalization for interiors is for areas that are not subject to
that might hinder the operation or free movement of the gates. Given strong air currents. Installation to be executed by specialized techni-
the considerable weight of gates, the bearing capacity of the walls and cians only. For special applications consult with our technical office.
crossbeams involved should be checked for the mounting of top guide The holding system for the gate is chosen by the customer to conform
tracks and overlapping labyrinths. with their own worksite needs and the anti-fire design (thermal fuse
or electromagnet).
168

171. Features
Telescopic gates
Rei 120 MoNolAteRAl VeRsioN WitH tWo leAVes
telescopic
Walls with a weight-bearing portion
suited for attachment of the sliding guide
gates
In conformity with UNI 9723 for two leaves, the telescopic
mono-lateral gates series has the following characteristics:
Installation
On weight-bearing masonry walls or ceilings.
300
Gates leaves
Made of continuous panels of hollow-core sheet metal
insulated with appropriate materials. Assembly involves
screwing the structure to pre-prepared horizontal pro-
1015
files. Leaf thickness 80 mm.
Top guide track NB: Guide track gradient of 2 mm/ml
For horizontal sliding, made of press-folded steel with pre-
drilled holes for attachment using plugs (not included). Over- Wall opening L
head sliding on low friction carriages. The extension of the
floor-mounted guide track beyond the opening ensures the 260
perpendicularity of the leaf. The top guide track is covered
by a protection carter made of press-folded sheet metal.
250* L/2 + 250 min
Overlapping labyrinths
Made of press-folded steel. *Variable dimensions for larger-sized gates
260
Counterweight
220
For adjustable closure and protected by press-folded sheet
metal carters, with counterstrike inset and shimming inset.
230
Door handles
Recessed on both sides of the first leaf.
Sealing
Thermo-expanding on all overlapping labyrinths and un-
Wall opening H
derneath the leaf.
Identification plate
Marking with reference information that is applied di-
rectly to the handle. FFL
Finishing
With a base coat thermoset in a 160 degree C furnace,
light turquoise pastel color (similar to NCS4020-B50G).
5100
5000
4900
Packaging 4800
4700
Modules on disposable metal container. 4600
4500
4400
4300
4200
Wall opening dimensions 4100
4000
On request as shown in the table to the side (smaller and 3900
Wall opening H
3800
larger sizes on request). 3700
3600
3500
3400
3300
Operation mode 3200
3100
field of application price list
Of the gate series with thermal fuse: the gate can stand still 3000
2900
at any position. The counterweight remains hooked to the 2800
2700
thermal fuse and only closes the gate when the fuse fails. 2600
2500
2400
2300
2200
Weight 2100
2000
For the telescopic gates, approx. 50 kg/m² of wall opening 1900
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
4100
4200
4300
4400
4500
4600
4700
4800
4900
5000
5100
5200
5300
5400
5500
5600
5700
5800
5900
6000
6100
Wall opening L
NOTE
Additional accessories are usually dependent on the size dimensions
of the gates
169

172. Features
Telescopic gates
Rei 120 BilAteRAl VeRsioN WitH FoUR leAVes
telescopic
Walls with weight-bearing zones are
suitable for attachment of the sliding guide
gates
Conforms with UNI 9723 for four leaves, the telescopic bi-
lateral gates series has the following features:
Installation
On weight-bearing masonry walls or ceilings.
Gate leaves
Four leaves made of continuous modules of hollow-core
1015 300
sheet metal panels insulated with the appropriate materials.
Assembly involves screwing the structure to pre-prepared
horizontal hollow metal profile. Leaf thickness 80 mm.
Top guide track NB: Guide track gradient of 2 mm/ml
Double-guide for horizontal sliding made of press-folded
steel with pre-drilled holes for attachment using plugs Wall opening L
(not included). Overhead sliding on low friction carriages.
The extension of the floor-mounted guide track beyond
the opening ensures the perpendicularity of the leaves.
The top guide track is covered by a protection carter made
of press-folded sheet metal. 150* 150*
Overlapping labyrinths L/4 +320 min* L/4 +320 min*
Made of press-folded sheet metal.
*Variable dimensions for larger-sized gates
Counterweights 260
For adjustable closure and protected by press-folded sheet
metal carters, with for the counterstrike and shimming insets.
220
Door handles
230
Recessed on both sides of the first two leaves.
Sealing
Thermo-expanding on all overlapping labyrinths and un-
derneath the leaves.
Wall opening H
Identification plate
Marking with reference information that is applied direct-
ly to one of the handles.
Finishing FFL
With a base coat thermoset in a 160 degree C furnace,
light turquoise pastel color (similar to NCS4020-B50G).
Packaging
Modules on disposable metal container. 4400
4300
4200
4100
Wall opening dimensions 4000
3900
On request as shown in the table to the side (smaller and 3800
3700
larger measures available on request). 3600
3500
3400
Operation mode 3300
3200
Of the gate series with thermal fuse: the gate can stand 3100
3000
still at any position. The counterweight remains hooked 2900 field of application price list
2800
to the thermal fuse and only closes the gate when the 2700
fuse fails. 2600
2500
2400
2300
Weight 2200
2100
For the telescopic gates, approx. 50 kg/m² of wall opening 2000
1900
3200
3300
3400
3500
3600
3700
3800
3900
4000
4100
4200
4300
4400
4500
4600
4700
4800
4900
5000
5100
5200
5300
5400
5500
5600
5700
5800
5900
6000
6100
6200
6300
6400
6500
6600
NOTE Wall opening L
Additional accessories are usually dependent on the size dimensions
of the gates
170

173. Operation mode
Telescopic gates
5 3
OPERATION MODE OF TELESCOPIC FIRE GATES 4
telescopic
6
gates
The selection of the holding system should reflect the cus-
tomer’s worksite needs and the anti-fire project. Opening
1
2
Operation mode of gates equipped with thermal fuse:
The counterweight (1) does not load the gate and the
operator (2) manually opens and closes the gates, which
remains in the position it is left in. When the thermal fuse
(3) is subjected to temperatures greater than 70° C, it NOTE
breaks and causes the cable (4) to be released, so that the The thermal fuse is only triggered when the temperature in the immedi-
counterweight drags the gates to the closed position. The ate vicinity rises above 70° C, and it does not respond to smoke. Its ap-
feed speed brake (5) prevents the gates from accelerat- plication, therefore, is not advisable when the gates are located outside
ing during closure. The feed-in impact absorber (6) softens the compartmentalization space and when a reaction to cold smoke is
the final feed-in impact of the closure. required.
Control unit and external RFC sensor
Operation mode of gates with electromagnet:
The counterweight (1) continuously loads the gate. The
gate usually remains open, held in place by the electro- 4 2
magnet (2). The counterweight closes the gate whenever
the electromagnet lacks impulse current from the control 5
unit or when the release button (3) is pressed. The feed
speed brake (4) prevents the gate from accelerating dur-
Opening
1 3
ing closure. The feed-in impact absorber (5) softens the fi-
nal feed-in impact of the closure. The electromagnet must
be connected with a power control unit and the related
external smoke and heat detectors.
NOTE
The gate closes on impulse from a control unit controlled by an exter-
nal RFC detector, thus permitting automatic closure at temperatures
lower than 70° C as well in the presence of cold smoke. This means
that the gate can be installed in any position, even outside the com-
partmentalization space.
INSTALLATION
Frontal installation Ceiling attachment
260 260
22 104 104 30
230
230
230
Wall Opening H
Opening
Wall
H
171

174. Optional accessories
Telescopic gates
pAiNtiNG
telescopic
gates
With ecologically formulated anti-corrosive epoxide prim-
er. Minimum resistance to salt fog exposure: 300 hours
(A.S.T.M. B - 117 - 61). Basic anti-corrosion coating: Light
turquoise pastel. Optional: finishing with satin topcoats
from the selection of furnace polymerized RAL colors.
Group 01:
Gates color: light turquoise pastel (similar to NCS4020B50G)
Group 03 (Basic anti-corrosion coating + satin topcoat finishing):
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
1004 1005 1006 1007 9006*
*Pre-approval of the sample is required.
Group 04 (Basic anti-corrosion coating + satin topcoat finishing):
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
Group 02 (Basic anti-corrosion coating + satin topcoat finishing): 1003 1012 1016 1021 1023 5002
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
1001 1013 1015 3000 3003 3020 5010 5012
Group 05 (Basic anti-corrosion coating only):
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
5015 5024 6000 6005 7001 7004 7011 7016
Basic anti-corrosion coating is available for all colors listed in group 02.
In general, all RAL tints are useable except for: RAL 1018, RAL
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL 5005 and RAL 9007
7024 7030 7032 7035 7037 7038 7040 7042
NOTE
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL Due to artifacts of the printing process, the colors depicted here may
7047 8011 8017 8019 9001 9002 9005 9010 not correspond exactly to the colors of actual doors. Please see the RAL
or NCS samples.
RAL RAL RAL
9011 9016 9018
Retouching
On request, Ninz also provides touch-up paint (nitro/syn-
thetic) in 1,00 kg cans in the necessary RAL tint.
Cleaning Protection
Water and neutral soap are recommended for the regu- Since the gates are designed for internal usage, they
lar cleaning of our products. Do not use common cleaning should always be protected from atmospheric agents and
products (see detergents) and/or other solvents. We shall direct sunlight.
not be held responsible for any problems that arise if these Exterior uses require paints that are specially designed for
guidelines are not respected. this type of use (on request).
Re-painting
For re-painting, use the following procedure: ATTENTION
- sand and carefully wipe away any dust from the sur- External installation of gates require various measures for preventing
faces product degradation, such as:
- apply a base layer of opaque 2-component epoxide 1. The gates should always be protected from bad weather. Permanent
we recommend EPOX product Nr. 5203 beige 0059 damage may result if water seeps inside the door leaf. Provide canopies
made by ALCEA in Milan or roofing to protect newly installed and existing products.
- repaint the surfaces with your choice of lacquers or 2. Avoid darker colors for gates which will be exposed to direct sunlight.
paints. Sheet metal can heat up and cause warping of the door leaf which could
compromise the functionality of the door itself.
172

175. Mandatory accessories
Telescopic gates
pUlleY tAcKles FoR selF-closURe
telescopic
gates
Pulley tackles serve to ensure the full self-closure of tel-
escopic gates which are wider than they are tall.
Maximum width WITHOUT TACKLES: (H-800) x 2
Normal pulley tackles
2 pulleys and standard counterweight box: Clamp
- for gates wider than (height H - 800) x 2 and shorter than
(height H - 800) x 4
- minimum space required on rebate side 250 mm
- for geared counterweight: required space on the open-
ing side L + 400 mm
Special pulley tackles Normal/special pulley tackles
2 pulleys and augmented counterweight box:
- for gates wider than (height H - 800) x 4 and shorter than
(height H - 1150) x 6
- minimum space required on rebate side 350 mm
- for geared counterweight: required space on the open-
ing side L + 500 mm
R pulley tackles Clamp
3 pulleys and larger counterweight box:
- for gates wider than (height H - 1150) x 6 and shorter
than L=7000 mm
- minimum space required on rebate side 350 mm
- for geared counterweight: required space on the
opening side L + 500 mm
R pulley tackles
Vt - ViscotRoleR®
AcciDeNt pReVeNtioN DeVice
Gates should always be equipped with an automatic de-
vice that controls the feed speed of the door during au-
tomatic closing.
After the critical moment when automated re-closure has
been initiated, door speed increases progressively in pro-
portion to opening time and door weight. During emer-
gency situations, the energy that develops could cause se-
rious injury/damage to people or objects within its range
of motion. The hydraulic V.T. VISCOTROLLER® rotor makes
it possible to set a constant closing speed in the range of
0.05 to 0,25 m/sec.
ATTENTION
For purposes of accident prevention, gates should always be equipped
with a feed-in brake to regulate closing speed. Customers who choose not
to include the feed-in brake assume full responsibility for possible conse-
quences.
173

176. Mandatory and optional accessories
Telescopic gates
FEED-IN IMPACT ABSORBER
telescopic
gates
Mandatory accessory for one- and two-leaved telescopic
gates. The compression energy on the shaft is absorbed
by slowing the flow of a fluid by means of an adjustable Feed-in
limiter valve. The shock absorber of the shaft is re-armed impact
when the gates is re-opened. absorber
ATTENTION: be careful not to damage the impact absorber shaft
Tuning
L/2 + 200 (Normal counterweight)
L/2 + 350 (Delayed counterweight)
ELECTROMAGNETS
Gates operation mode with electromagnets (on request):
the gate is usually left open. The counterweight is always
hooked to the leaf and closure occurs whenever the electric Position of
current to the electromagnet is interrupted. the EM
H + 90
For smoke/heat detection systems, control unit and power electric
supply, see the dedicated page in the accessories doors sec- cable exit
tion of the present brochure.
Electromagnet
CC600N
Technical data for the CC600N electromagnet
per leaf for up to 12 m² of wall opening
primary power supply 24 V DC
voltage tolerance ± 10%
nominal current 125 mA
nominal power 3W
insertion duration 100%
withstand force approx. 61 Kg.
operational temperature 0°C ÷ +50°C
operational temperature at 20°C 45°C
magnetic residue null
Electromagnet Technical data for the CC1400N electromagnet
CC1400N per leaf for more than 12 m² of wall opening
primary power supply 24 V DC
voltage tolerance ± 10%
nominal current 200 mA
nominal power 5W
insertion duration 100%
withstand force approx. 143 Kg.
operational temperature 0°C ÷ +50°C
operational temperature at 20°C 60°C
magnetic residue null
EC marked in conformity with STANDARD EN 1155
174

177. Optional accessories
Telescopic gates
GEARED REI 120 MONOLATERAL
telescopic
TELESCOPIC GATES
gates
On request due to space limitations on the rebate side, slid- A 100 mm overlap of the leaf must be ensured regardless.
ing gates may also be supplied with geared and/or out-of- While ordering, please specify whether the rebate is NOR-
alignment counterweights. MAL or SPECIAL.
Wall opening L Wall opening L
100 100
111
111
*
40 FM L /2 + 400* ~ FM L /2 + 400* ~
Counterweight version, opposite side with normal rebate Counterweight version, opposite side with special rebate
*After the gate has been installed, building of the additional apron is
the buyer’s responsibility and duty
INTERNAL NIGHT LOCK
On request, telescopic gates may be equipped with night
locks with cylinders to pass.
Utilization of this type of mechanism with gates should be
indicated while ordering.
CROSS BEAMS
Cross beam made of 100 x 200 mm insulated hollow metal
profile for REI 120 one- or two-leaved telescopic gates. Up
to L = 2500 ready for lateral attachment, plus additional
Cross beam
230
ceiling attachment for greater widths. Covering/finishing
of the beam with 2 sheets of 12.5 mm plasterboard is the measuring
customer’s responsibility. 100 x 200mm
Two sheets of
plasterboard
sheets, 12.5 mm
thick each
Mineral wool
150 kg/mc
Opening
Wall opening H
Lateral
Cross beams attachment plate
GENERAL NOTES Leaf of
All rights reserved. telescopic gate
No reproduction (partial or total) without prior authorization by Ninz.
Ninz reserves the right to modify the product.
Installation should be executed by qualified technicians.
Modifications may only be made as indicated in the installation in-
FFL
structions.
Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.
175

178. “simple solutions
for complex needs”

179. NINZ hinged gates
FiRe dOORS
Gates with hollow metal profile frames
FEATURES 184 - 186
ENCUMBRANCES AND APPLICATIONS 187 - 188
MANDATORY - OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 189 - 191
Gates with angular metal profile frames
FEATURES 192 - 193
ENCUMBRANCES AND APPLICATIONS 194 - 195
MANDATORY - OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 196 - 199
All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced technical changes to the contents of this brochure.
Fire rated closures are typically used for internal compartmentalization and have been designed for this purpose.

180. Features
Hinged gates with hollow metal profile frames
WHAT deFineS THeM? Hinged one-leaved gate with hollow metal profile frame:
Hinged
gates
REI 30 REI 60 REI 90
The field of use includes large openings and/or special us-
age conditions in customer-specified dimensions. Gates
are supplied with leaves made of flush insulated sheets
of metal panes, jointed and attached to each other with
screws, “L”-profile hollow metal frames on three sides
and finished with a base coat or RAL tints and other acces-
sories as required for proper functioning of the product.
Standards
The gates are certified in accordance with UNI 9723 stand-
ards in compliance with the current ministerial provisions
in force.
Opening direction, pull
Opening direction needs to be specified while ordering.
Left Right
Hinged two-leaved gate with hollow metal profile frame:
REI 30 REI 60 REI 90
NOTE
Fire rated gates require careful design which reflects their dimensions
and special functions. Every installation site should be measured and
checked for vertical alignment of the walls and gradients of the floor-
ing. Given the considerable weight of gates, the bearing capacity of the
walls should also be checked.
ATTENTiON
Gates are supplied as a single pre-assembled unit, which should be
kept in mind for purposes of handling. The customer assumes all risks
entailed by the use of Hinged gates along escape routes.
Fire compartmentalization elements should always be used properly.
They are only designed for installation in spaces and constructions that
are vertically aligned and flush.
Compartmentalization for interiors is for areas that are not subject to
strong air currents. Installation to be executed by specialized techni-
cians only. For special applications consult with our technical office.
184

181. Features
Hinged gates with hollow metal profile frames
Rei 120 One-LeAVed VeRSiOn
Hinged
gates
This hinged gates series has the following features:
Application
For masonry walls, use plugs inside the span and corner
steel outside the span (to be specified while ordering).
Door leaf
Leaf unit made of continuous modules of hollow-core
sheet metal panels insulated with appropriate materials,
without lower rebate. Leaf thickness 72 mm. Nr. 2 extra-
strong hinges for each leaf.
Doorframe
Made of galvanize “L”-shaped hollow metal profiles.
Hinges
Nr. 2 extra-strong hinges.
Sealing
Thermo-expansive, inserted into the leaf rebate.
Door handle
Accident-prevention shape, made of stainless steel with a
double lever with return spring and set of plates.
Handle height = 1050 mm.
Lock
marked lock with cylinder to pass.
Identification plate
Marking with reference information that is applied to the
leaf’s rebate.
Vertical section for installation with block frame
Finishing
With a base coat thermoset in a 160 degree C furnace,
light turquoise pastel color (similar to NCS4020-B50G).
Order measurements L
Packaging
Leaf unit on disposable metal container. 100 Doorframe opening = L - 200 100
Wall opening dimensions
72
Min. 1000 X 1750 mm, max. 5000 X 2500 mm, larger sizes
on request.
Mandatory accessories
1 -marked door closer per leaf.
Maximum opening
120° with door closer only, and 110° additional coil spring.
90
Weight
Gate weight, approx. 60 kg/m² of wall opening.
30
Detail of section for Detail of panel joints
installation with block frame
185

182. Features
Hinged gates with hollow metal profile frames
REI 120 TWO-LEAVED VERSION
Hinged
gates
This two-leaved vertically sliding gates series has the follow-
ing features:
Installation
For masonry walls, use plugs inside the span and corner steel
outside the span (to be specified while ordering).
Door leaf
Leaf unit made of continuous modules of hollow-core sheet
metal panels insulated with appropriate materials, without
lower rebate. Leaf thickness 72 mm. Unequal divisions avail-
able on request.
Doorframe
Made of galvanized “L”-shaped hollow metal profiles.
Hinges
Nr. 2 extra-strong hinges for each leaf.
Sealing
Thermo-expansive, inserted into the leaf rebate.
Door handle
Accident-prevention shape, made of stainless steel with a
double lever with return spring and set of plates.
Handle height = 1050 mm.
Lock
Active (main) leaf: marked lock with cylinder to pass
Secondary leaf: “Flush-bolt” lock for automatic upper and
lower blocking of the leaf.
Identification plate
Marking with reference information that is applied to the
rebate of one of the leaves.
Vertical section for installation with block frame
Finishing
With a base coat thermoset in a 160 degree C furnace color
turquoise pastel, light tone (similar to NCS4020-B50G). Order measurements L (L1 + L2)
Packaging 100 Doorframe opening = L - 200 100
Leaf unit on disposable metal container.
Wall opening dimensions
72
Min. 2000 X 1750 mm, max. 5000 X 5000 mm, larger sizes on
request.
Minimum division: 1000 mm.
Mandatory accessories
1 door closer per leaf and 1 closing regulator for proper se-
quencing of leaf closure. 90
Maximum opening
120° with door closer only, and 110° additional coil spring.
Weight
Gate weight, approx. 60 kg/m² of wall opening. 30
Detail of section for installation Detail of panel joints
with block frame
186

183. Installations and encumbrances
Hinged one-leaved gate with hollow metal profile frame
ONE-LEAVED INSTALLATION ONE-LEAVED INSTALLATION ON BLOCK FRAME
BEYOND THE REVEAL ON BLOCK FRAME
Hinged
gates
*
100
Order measurement L
Order measurement L
100 Doorframe opening = L - 200 100
100 Doorframe opening = L - 200 100
* *
Doorframe exterior = L + 40 Doorframe exterior = L - 20
*After the gate has been installed, the building of the additional apron
ONE-LEAVED DOOR ENCUMBRANCES is the buyer’s responsibility and duty
WITH 90° OPENING
Order measurement L
100 Doorframe opening = L - 200 100
Door closer
90 70 mm protrusion
10
44
Coil spring
protrusion 70 mm
EXUS
panic bars
64 protrusion 125 mm
Door handle
70
protrusion 75 mm
187

184. Installations and encumbrances
Hinged two-leaved gates with hollow metal profile frames
TWO-LEAVED INSTALLATION BEYOND THE REVEAL TWO-LEAVED INSTALLATION IN THE REVEAL
Hinged
gates
*
100
Order measurement L (L1 + L2)
Order measurements L (L1 + L2)
100 Doorframe opening = L - 200 100
100 Doorframe opening = L - 200 100
* *
72
*After the gate has been installed, the building of the additional apron
90 is the buyer’s responsibility and duty
TWO-LEAVED DOOR ENCUMBRANCES
WITH 90° OPENING
Order measurement L
30
100 Doorframe opening = L - 200 100
L2 = secondary leaf section L1 = active leaf section
Detail of section for installation Detail of panel joints
with block frame
L2 + 100
Door closer
70 mm protrusion
90 10
44 Coil spring
protrusion 70 mm
EXUS
panic bars
64 protrusion 125 mm
64 70
Door handle
70 protrusion 75 mm
188

185. Mandatory accessories
Hinged gates with hollow metal profile frames
TS93 dOOR CLOSeR
Hinged
gates
Door closer (1) with slide channel for large sizes, with regu-
lation of opening force, closing velocity and final closure.
Silver color.
EC certification 0432-BPR 0008 EN 1154:1996 + A1:2002
SR390 CLOSing RegULATOR
To ensure automatic closure of two-leaved fire rated
gates, a door closing regulation is mandatory. The two-
leaved gates door series, therefore, is provided with a
Dorma SR 390 closing regulator (2), equipped with feed-in
impact absorber and all mechanical functioning, mounted
visibly on the doorframe. Silver-colored galvanized finish-
ing, for on-site installation.
EC certification 0432-BPR 0026 EN 1158:1997+A1:2002
COiL SPRing
Coil spring (3) for large sized Leaves to reinforce the door
closer, with mechanical functioning and positioned high
up on the hinge-side of the leaf (pull-side of the door).
The steel tension cable is attached to the cross beam of
the doorframe. Finished in the same color as the door leaf
(except for replacements).
NOTE
The accessories require assembly.
189

186. Optional accessories
Hinged gates with hollow metal profile frames
PAinTing
Hinged
gates
With ecologically formulated anti-corrosive epoxide prim-
er. Minimum resistance to salt fog exposure: 300 hours
(A.S.T.M. B - 117 - 61). Basic anti-corrosion coating: Light
turquoise pastel. Optional: finishing with satin topcoats
from the selection of furnace polymerized RAL colors.
Group 01:
Gate color: light turquoise pastel (similar to NCS4020B50G)
Group 03 (Basic anti-corrosion coating + satin topcoat finishing):
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
1004 1005 1006 1007 9006*
*Pre-approval of the sample is required.
Group 04 (Basic anti-corrosion coating + satin topcoat finishing):
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
Group 02 (Basic anti-corrosion coating + satin topcoat finishing): 1003 1012 1016 1021 1023 5002
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
1001 1013 1015 3000 3003 3020 5010 5012
in general, all RAL tints are useable except for: RAL 1018, RAL
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL 5005 and RAL 9007
5015 5024 6000 6005 7001 7004 7011 7016
NOTE
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
Due to artifacts of the printing process, the colors depicted here may
7024 7030 7032 7035 7037 7038 7040 7042
not correspond exactly to the colors of actual doors. Please see the RAL
or NCS samples.
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
7047 8011 8017 8019 9001 9002 9005 9010
Retouching
On request, Ninz also provides touch-up paint (nitro/syn-
RAL RAL RAL thetic) in 1,00 kg cans in the necessary RAL tint.
9011 9016 9018
Protection
Since the gates are designed for internal usage, they
should always be protected from atmospheric agents and
direct sunlight.
Cleaning Exterior uses require paints that are specially designed for
Water and neutral soap are recommended for the regu- this type of use (on request).
lar cleaning of our products. Do not use common cleaning
products (see detergents) and/or other solvents. We shall
not be held responsible for any problems that arise if these ATTENTiON
guidelines are not respected. External installation of gates require various measures for preventing
product degradation, such as:
1. The gates should always be protected from bad weather. Permanent
Re-painting damage may result if water seeps inside the door leaf. Provide cano-
For re-painting, use the following procedure: pies or roofing to protect newly installed and existing products.
- sand and carefully wipe away any dust from the 2. Avoid darker colors for gates which will be exposed to direct sun-
surfaces light. Sheet metal can heat up and cause warping of the door leaf
- apply a base layer of opaque 2-component epoxide which could compromise the functionality of the door itself.
- we recommend EPOX product Nr. 5203 beige 0059
made by ALCEA in Milan
- repaint the surfaces with your choice of lacquers or
paints.
190

187. Optional accessories
Hinged gates with hollow metal profile frames
CC600n And CC1400 n WALL-MOUnTed eLeC-
Hinged
TROMAgneTS WiTH STRiKe PLATe AnCHORS
gates
For smoke/heat detection systems, central control units
and power supply, see the dedicated page in the acces-
sories section of the present brochure.
Technical data for the CC600N electromagnet per leaves up to 5 m² of
wall opening with a maximum leaf width of 1700 mm
primary power supply 24 Vcc
voltage tolerance ± 10%
65
nominal current 125 mA
nominal power 3W
insertion duration 100%
withstand force approx. 61 Kg.
operational temperature 0°C ÷ +50°C
operational temperature at 20°C 45°C
magnetic residue null
Technical data for the CC1400N electromagnet for leaves up to 5 m² of
wall opening or with leaf width greater than 1700 mm
primary power supply 24 Vcc
voltage tolerance ± 10%
nominal current 200 mA 70
nominal power 5W
insertion duration 100%
withstand force approx. 143 Kg.
operational temperature 0°C ÷ +50°C
operational temperature at 20°C 60°C
magnetic residue null
NOTE
Position the anchor 200 mm from the external edge of the leaf and as
far as possible from the hinges.
EC marked in conformity with STANDARD EN 1155
eXUS LP/LA/LX PAniC BARS
For more information, please see the “EXUS panic bars”
section of the present brochure. Certification: suited for
one-leaved gates or the active and secondary leaves of
two-leaved gates with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880 mm/
leaf and masses of 300 kg/leaf. Height of central bar, 955
mm from the finished floor surface.
191

188. Features
Hinged gates with angular frames
WHAT DEFINES THEM? Hinged two-leaved gate with angular frame:
Hinged
gates
REI 30 REI 60 REI 90
The field of use includes large openings and/or special us-
age conditions in customer-specified dimensions. Gates
are supplied with leaves made of flush insulated sheets
of metal panes jointed and soldered together, “Z”-profile
hollow metal frames on three sides and finished with a
base coat or RAL tints and other accessories as required
for proper functioning of the product.
Standards
The gates are certified in accordance with UNI 9723 stand-
ards in compliance with the current ministerial provisions
Left Right
in force.
Opening direction, pull
Opening direction needs to be specified while ordering.
Left Right
NOTE
Fire rated gates require careful design which reflects their dimensions
and special functions. Every installation site should be measured and
checked for vertical alignment of the walls and gradients of the floor-
ing. Given the considerable weight of gates, the bearing capacity of the
walls should also be checked.
Attention
Gates are supplied as a single pre-assembled unit, which should be
kept in mind for purposes of handling. The customer assumes all risks
entailed by the use of Hinged gates along escape routes.
Fire compartmentalization elements should always be used properly.
They are only designed for installation in spaces and constructions
that are vertically aligned and flush.
Compartmentalization for interiors is for areas that are not subject to
strong air currents. Installation to be executed by specialized techni-
cians only. For special applications consult with our technical office.
192

189. Features
Hinged gates with angular frames
REI 120 TWO-LEAVED VERSION
Hinged
gates
This hinged gates has the following characteristics:
Application
On masonry walls with frame to be cemented or with
frame attached to a subframe with plasterboard finishing.
Door leaves
Leaf unit made of continuous modules of hollow-core
sheet metal panels insulated with the appropriate materi-
als, without lower rebate. Leaf thickness 73 mm. Unequal
divisions available on request.
Doorframe
Made of galvanized sheet metal with a “Z”-shaped profile.
Hinges
Doorframe exterior = H + 40
Nr. 2 extra-strong drain-type hinges for each leaf.
Customer is
Doorframe opening = H - 50
responsible
Sealing Wall opening H
Thermo-expansive, inserted into the leaf rebate. for the ma-
sonry work
Door handle
Accident-prevention shape, made of stainless steel with a
double lever with return spring and set of plates.
Handle height = 1050 mm.
Lock
Active (main) leaf: -marked lock with cylinder to pass
Secondary leaf: “Flush-bolt” lock for automatic upper and
lower blocking of the leaf.
Wall opening L (L1 + L2)
Identification plate
Marking with reference information that is applied to the Doorframe opening = L - 100
rebate of one of the leaves.
= L1 - 85
Finishing
With thermoset epoxy-polyester powders, with orange
72
skin anti-scratch finishing, turquoise pastel color - light
tone (NCS4020-B50G) for gates maximum H = 4500 mm.
Anti-rust coating, light tone turquoise pastel for gates
with height H greater than 4500 mm.
Packaging
Leaf unit on disposable metal container.
Doorframe exterior = L + 80
Dimensions L x H Customer is responsible
Min. 2000 X 1750 mm, max. 5000 X 5000 mm, larger sizes for the masonry work
on request.
Minimum division: 1000 mm. 50
Mandatory accessories 38
1 door closer per leaf and 1 closing regulator for proper
sequencing of leaf closure.
27
Maximum opening
120° with door closer only.
40
Weight Wall opening L
Gate weight, approx. 60 kg/m² of wall opening.
Doorframe exterior
= L + 80
193

190. Installation
Hinged two-leaved gates with angular frames
DOORFRAME FOR EMBEDDING IN MASONRY SUBFRAME-MOUNTED DOORFRAME
Hinged
gates
50
*
100
*
Doorframe exterior = H + 40
Doorframe exterior = H + 40
Space to create = H + 50
Customer is
Doorframe opening = H - 50
Order measurement H
Doorframe opening = H - 50
responsible
Wall opening H
for the ma-
sonry work
Wall opening L (L1 + L2) 50 Order measurement L (L1 + L2) 50
Doorframe opening = L - 100 50 Doorframe opening = L - 100 50
= L1 - 85 = L1 - 85
72
72
*
*
50
*
*
Doorframe exterior = L + 80
Doorframe exterior = L + 80
Space to create = L + 100
*Subframe 50x50 and plasterboard finishing are the customer’s re-
sponsibility unless ordered separately.
194

191. Encumbrances
Hinged two-leaved gates with angular frames
TWO-LEAVED DOOR ENCUMBRANCES
Hinged
WITH 90° OPENING
gates
50 Order measurements L 50
L2 = secondary leaf section L1 = active leaf section
50 Doorframe opening = L - 100 50
43
Door closer
protrusion 62 mm
EXUS
panic bar
Chiudiporta protrusion 125 mm
sporgenza 82 mm
Door handle
protrusion 75 mm
195

192. Mandatory accessories
Hinged gates with angular frames
DS-RYOBI 3550 DOOR CLOSER
Hinged
gates
The DS RYOBI door closer has a 2 to 6 force range that
can be adjusted by means of a convenient external tun-
ing screw, is ambidextrous and is available with different
accessories and color choices. It comes with an ABS design
cover with a standard scissor arm.
It is also available with slide-channel, which requires or-
dering the D-3550T series door closer.
298
The D-3550 door closer has two screws for separate regu-
lation of the closing speed and the feed-in speed increase.
It is also equipped with a regulator screw for deceleration
while opening, to avoid shocks to the door, and a regula-
tor screw for delaying the initiation of the closing cycle.
62
DS RYOBI D-3550 door closers are guaranteed for 2,000,000
operational cycles, and are certified for use with fire doors
BS476 part 22/87 ANSI A 156.4 grade 1 UL and ADA, and as
further assurance of their quality they are also marked
1720-CPD-0001 Rev A in accordance with EN 1154.
75
304
480
SR90 CLOSING REGULATOR
35
To ensure automatic closure of two-leaved fire rated gates,
a door closing regulators obligatory. The two-leaved fire
gates series, therefore, is provided with a Dictator SR90 128
79
closing regulator, equipped with feed-in impact absorber
and all-mechanical functioning, mounted visibly on the
doorframe. Silver-colored galvanized finishing and for
on-site installation. EC Certification 0432-BPR 0109.02 EN 1158:1997/A1:2004/04
VS 2000 SHOCK ABSORBER
For large doors to soften the final shock of door closure,
positioned on the hinge-side of the leaf. The
strike plate is attached to the doorframe.
52
Doorframe
168
Door leaf
53
NOTE
The accessories require assembly.
196

193. Optional accessories
Hinged gates with angular frames
ELECTROMAGNET 70 KG WALL-MOUNTED WITH 70
Hinged
STRIKE PLATE 53
gates
65
EM wall-mounted electromagnet with white plastic casing 25
and unlock button. Anchor consisting of a nickel-plated
plate and jointed baseboard.
102
65
Technical data
power supply 24 Vcc
absorption 67 mA
minimum withstand force approx. 71 kg
EC marked in conformity with STANDARD EN 1155
EXUS LP/LA/LX PANIC BARS
For more information, please see the “EXUS panic bars”
section of the present brochure. Certification: suited for
one-leaved gates and the active and secondary leaves of
two-leaved gates with dimensions up to 1350 x 2880 mm/
leaf and masses of 300 kg/leaf.
Height of central bar, 955 mm from finished floor surface.
PEDESTRIAN DOOR
REI 120 two-leaved hinged gate with angular doorframes 1140
can be equipped with pedestrian doors with a lower 900
threshold. The right or left opening direction should be
chosen by the customer and indicated while ordering. The
pedestrian door series is for insertion into the secondary
leaf. It opens towards the hinge-side of the gate and can
be equipped with a window, on request.
For additional information concerning the EXUS panic exit
device, please see the dedicated pages in the panic exit
device section of the present brochure.
Minimum dimensions (L2 and FM H) for the insertion of
pedestrian doors:
Pedestrian door size minimum dimensions
width 900 L2 > 1680
width 1140 L2 > 1980
height 2000 FMH > 2230
attention
The threshold makes pedestrian doors with panic bars unsuitable for
escape routes.
197

194. Painting
Hinged gates with angular frames
Hinged
Painting
gates
The hinged gates series of gates is painted with thermoset powders, with anti-
scratch finish and semi-glossy embossing (except for certain colors). The paint is
especially resistant and offers a pleasant finish for interior applications. Choose
from a wide range of RAL colors.
STAndARd TinTS WiTH nO PRiCe SUPPLeMenT
Interior painting with epoxy-polyester powders in tur-
quoise pastel - light tone (NCS4020- B50G). The tonalities
of the frame and the door leaf are represented in the
photo to the side
SPeCiAL TinTS WiTH PRiCe SUPPLeMenT Group 02:
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
Interior paints (groups 02 and 03) available in a variety of
1013 1015 5010 5024 6000 7016 7024 7035
RAL tints with epoxy-polyester powders.
Distinct from other RALs, metallic tinted paints RAL 9006, RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
RAL 9007 (group 3) and RAL 9006 E (group 04) present a 7038 8011 9001 9002 9010 9011 9016 9018
finish with a wrinkled structure that requires pre-approval
of a sample.
Group 03:
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
1001 1003 3000 3003 3020 5012 5015 6005
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
7001 7004 7011 7030 7032 7037 7040 7042
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
7047 8017 8019 9005 9006* 9007*
*requires pre-approval of a sample.
198

195. Painting
Hinged gates with angular frames
SPeCiAL TinTS FOR eXTeRiOR USe Group 04:
Hinged
WiTH PRiCe SUPPLeMenTS
gates
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
1013E 3000E 5010E 6005E 7016E 7024E 7035E 9002E
Exterior painting with polyester powders in various RAL
tints.
RAL RAL NCS NCS
9006E* 9010E 4020E 5020E
*pre-approval of the sample is required.
SPeCiAL TinTS BY ReQUeST Group 05:
WiTH PRiCe SUPPLeMenTS Colors by request only
Painting available for interior and exterior with epoxy-
polyester and polyester (respectively) powders in the
requested RAL tints. Group 05 does not include special NOTE
colors, such as metallic, mica, smooth or wrinkled texture Due to artifacts of the printing process, the colors depicted here may
and other sample tints like Pantone, NCS, etc. not correspond exactly to the colors of actual doors. Please see the
RAL or NCS samples.
Cleaning Retouching
Water and neutral soap are recommended for the regu- On request, Ninz also provides touch-up paint (nitro/syn-
lar cleaning of our products. Do not use common clean- thetic) in 1,00 kg cans in the necessary RAL tint.
ing products (see detergents) and/or other solvents. We
shall not be held responsible for any problems that arise if
these guidelines are not respected.
Riverniciatura Protezione
In caso di riverniciatura procedere come segue: Le porte sono previste per un normale impiego interno,
- carteggiare e spolverare accuratamente le superfici per questo motivo devono essere protette dagli agenti at-
- applicare una mano di fondo epossidico opaco a 2 mosferici e dai raggi solari diretti.
componenti, proponiamo il prodotto EPOX nr. 5203 Nei casi di applicazione all’esterno, si dovranno utilizzare
colore beige 0059 della ditta ALCEA di Milano. vernici particolari adatte a questo tipo di impiego (vedi
- riverniciare le superfici con smalti o pittura a propria fascia 04, 05).
scelta.
WARNiNG!
External installation of gates require various measures for preventing 2. Avoid darker colors for gates which will be exposed to direct sun-
product degradation, such as: light. Sheet metal can heat up and cause warping of the door leaf
1. The gates should always be protected from bad weather. Permanent which could compromise the functionality of the door itself. Gates with
damage may result if water seeps inside the door leaf. Provide cano- a height of FM H > 4500 mm are only available with anti-rust finish in
pies or roofing to protect newly installed and existing products. the light tone turquoise pastel color.
GENERAL NOTES
All rights reserved.
No reproduction (partial or total) without prior authorization by Ninz.
Ninz reserves the right to modify the product.
Installation should be executed by qualified technicians.
Modifications may only be made as indicated in the installation in-
structions.
Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.
199

197. “fire protection
comes from above”
NINZ vertically sliding gates
Fire DOOrS
FEATURES 178
REI 120 VERTICALLY SLINDING GATES 179
ELECTROMAGNETS, VISCOTROLLER 180
PAINTING 181
All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced technical changes to the contents of this brochure.
Fire rated closures are typically used for internal compartmentalization and have been designed for this purpose.

198. Features
Vertically sliding gates
WHAT DEFINES THEM? Vertically sliding gates lift closure is available in classes:
Vertically
sliding gates
REI 30 REI 60 REI 90
REI120 fire rated gates are available with a vertically slid-
ing system.
The field of use includes large or small openings and/or
special usage conditions in customer-specified size dimen-
sions. Gates are supplied with flush insulated sheet metal
panes, sliding guides, protective carters, counterweights,
thermal fuses or electromagnets and finished with a base
coat or RAL colors, plus other accessories as required for
correct product functioning.
Standards
The gates are certified in accordance with UNI 9723 stand-
ards in compliance with the current ministerial provisions
in force.
ATTENTION
Vertically sliding gates are supplied as a single pre-assembled unit,
which must be taken into consideration for purposes of handling.
Fire compartmentalization elements should always be used properly.
They are only designed for installation in spaces and constructions that
are vertically aligned and flush.
Compartmentalization for interiors is for areas that are not subject to
strong air currents. Installation to be executed by specialized techni-
cians only. For special applications consult with our technical office.
The holding system for the gate is chosen by the customer to conform
with their own worksite needs and the anti-fire design (thermal fuse
or electromagnet).
NOTE
Fire rated gates require careful design which reflects their dimensions
and special functions. Every installation site should be measured and
checked for vertical alignment of the walls and gradients of the floor-
ing. Particular care must be taken to check for protrusions or blockages
that might hinder the operation or free movement of the gates. Given
the considerable weight of gates, the bearing capacity of the walls
involved should be checked for the mounting of guide tracks and over-
lapping labyrinths.
178

199. Features
Vertically sliding gates
REI 120 VERSION
Vertically
sliding gates
The vertically sliding gate series has the following features:
Door leaf
Single unit made of continuous modules of hollow-core
sheet metal panels insulated with appropriate materials.
Leaf thickness 80 mm.
Guide track
Sliding on lateral guide tracks and flame-resistant anti-
friction anti-skid plates.
Overlapping labyrinths
Made of press-folded sheet metal.
Counterweights
Counterweights with adjustable balancing
Door handles
Recessed on both sides.
H + 225
Doorframe exterior min. 1225
Sealing
Thermo-expanding on all overlapping labyrinths.
Wall opening
Identification plate
Marking with reference information that is applied di-
rectly to the handle.
Wall opening =
H min. 500
Finishing
With a base coat thermoset in a 160 degree C furnace,
light turquoise pastel color (similar to NCS4020-B50G).
Wall opening dimensions
Min. 300 X 500 max. 3000 X 3000
Larger sizes on request. 'Windowsill' made of masonry
provided by customer
Normal operation mode
The gate remains in the open position, held by a thermal
fuse located at the top on the labyrinth distancer. The
gate can be closed manually. In case of fire the gate closes
as soon as the thermal fuse fails. Wall opening = L
Packaging
80
On disposable metal container.
150
Weight
REI 120 vertical lift - approx. 50 kg/m² wall opening, ex-
cluding guides and counterweights.
30 30
200* 200*
NOTE Doorframe exterior = L + 400
Additional accessories are usually dependent on the size dimensions
of the gate
*Variable dimensions for larger-sized gates
179

200. Optional accessories
Vertically sliding gates
VT - VISCOTROLER®
Vertically
sliding gates
ACCIDENT PREVENTION DEVICE
Gates should always be equipped with an automatic device
that controls the feed speed of the door during automatic Feed-in brake
closing. V.T. Viscotroller®
After the critical moment when automated re-closure has
been initiated, door speed increases progressively in pro-
portion to opening time and door weight. During emer-
gency situations, the energy that develops could cause seri-
ous injury/damage to people or objects within its range of
motion. The hydraulic V.T. VISCOTROLLER® rotor makes it
possible to set a constant closing speed in the range of 0.05
to 0,25 m/sec.
Tuning
ATTENTION
For purposes of accident prevention, gates should always be equipped
with a feed-in brake to regulate closing speed. Customers who choose
not to include the feed-in brake assume full responsibility for possible
consequences.
ELECTROMAGNETS
counterweight
Gates should always be equipped with an automatic device
that controls the feed speed of the door during automatic container
closing.
After the critical moment when automated re-closure has electromagnet
been initiated, door speed increases progressively in pro- strike plate
portion to opening time and door weight. During emer-
gency situations, the energy that develops could cause seri-
ous injury/damage to people or objects within its range of
motion. The hydraulic V.T. VISCOTROLLER® rotor makes it
possible to set a constant closing speed in the range of 0.05
to 0,25 m/sec.
Technical data for the CC600N electromagnet per leaf up to 1.0 m² of wall opening
primary power supply 24 V DC
voltage tolerance ± 10%
nominal current 125 mA
nominal power 3W
insertion duration 100%
withstand force approx. 61 Kg.
operational temperature 0°C ÷ +50°C
operational temperature at 20°C 45°C
magnetic residue null
Electromagnet KIT
Dati tecnici dell’elettromagnete CC1400N per anta oltre 1,0 m² di foro muro 60 kg or 140 kg
primary power supply 24 V DC
voltage tolerance ± 10%
nominal current 200 mA
nominal power 5W
insertion duration 100%
withstand force approx. 143 Kg.
operational temperature 0°C ÷ +50°C
operational temperature at 20°C 60°C
magnetic residue null
Marchiato CE in conformità alla NORMA EN 1155
180

201. Optional accessories
Vertically sliding gates
PaiNtiNG
Vertically
sliding gates
With ecologically formulated anti-corrosive epoxide prim-
er. Minimum resistance to salt fog exposure: 300 hours
(A.S.T.M. B - 117 - 61). Basic anti-corrosion coating: Light
turquoise pastel. Optional: finishing with satin topcoats
from the selection of furnace polymerized RAL colors.
Group 01:
Gate color: light turquoise pastel (similar to NCS4020B50G)
Group 03 (Basic anti-corrosion coating + satin topcoat finishing):
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
1004 1005 1006 1007 9006*
*Pre-approval of the sample is required.
Group 04 (Basic anti-corrosion coating + satin topcoat finishing):
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
Group 02 (Basic anti-corrosion coating + satin topcoat finishing): 1003 1012 1016 1021 1023 5002
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
1001 1013 1015 3000 3003 3020 5010 5012
NOTE
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL For printing-related reasons, the colors depicted should only be consid-
5015 5024 6000 6005 7001 7004 7011 7016 ered as indicative. Consult the RAL or NCS samples.
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
7024 7030 7032 7035 7037 7038 7040 7042 Protection
Since the gates are designed for internal usage, they
should always be protected from atmospheric agents and
RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL direct sunlight.
7047 8011 8017 8019 9001 9002 9005 9010 Exterior uses require paints that are specially designed for
this type of use (on request).
RAL RAL RAL
9011 9016 9018
Cleaning ATTENTION
Water and neutral soap are recommended for the regu- External installation of gates require various measures for preventing
lar cleaning of our products. Do not use common clean- product degradation, such as:
ing products (see detergents) and/or other solvents. We 1. The gates should always be protected from bad weather. Permanent
shall not be held responsible for any problems that arise if damage may result if water seeps inside the door leaf. Provide cano-
these guidelines are not respected. pies or roofing to protect newly installed and existing products.
2. Avoid darker colors for gates which will be exposed to direct sun-
light. Sheet metal can heat up and cause warping of the door leaf
Re-painting which could compromise the functionality of the door itself.
For re-painting, use the following procedure:
- sand and carefully wipe away any dust from the sur-
faces GENERAL NOTES
- apply a base layer of opaque 2-component epoxide All rights reserved.
we recommend EPOX product Nr. 5203 beige 0059 No reproduction (partial or total) without prior authorization by Ninz.
made by ALCEA in Milan Ninz reserves the right to modify the product.
- repaint the surfaces with your choice of lacquers or Installation should be executed by qualified technicians.
paints. Modifications may only be made as indicated in the installation in-
structions.
Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.
Retouching
On request, Ninz also provides touch-up paint (nitro/syn-
thetic) in 1,00 kg cans in the necessary RAL tint.
181

202. “simplicity
leads to savings”

203. NINZ windows
FiRE RATEd windows
REI 30 OR REI 60 WITH BLOCK FRAME 202
REI 60 AND REI 120 WITH FRAME EMBEDDED INTO THE WALL 203
All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced
technical changes to the contents of this brochure.

204. Features
Steel windows
REI 30 OR REI 60 WITH BLOCK FRAME
windows
--
steel
Frame with a weight-bearing cold-formed hollow
steel profile frame of 15/10 mm thickness, internally
insulated with asbestos-free inorganic silicate mate-
rial. Cross beams and/or uprights are positioned ac-
cording to manufacturing criteria.
-- Fire resistant glazing is supplied un-mounted, and
consists of extra-clear float panels with thermo-ex-
pansive fire-proof material interposed.
-- Special finishing with thermoset powders, color cho-
sen from our wide variety (see “painting” page).
-- Subframe to be ordered separately, made of hollow
galvanized steel profiles with anchors for mortar fixing.
-- NON-CERTIFIED EXECUTION. Goods come with the
glazing producer’s certification only, with no declara-
tion of conformity or identification plate.
Data table REI 30 REI 60
casing thickness 50 mm 50 mm
glass door weight 40 kg/m² 55 kg/m²
74
approx. glass thickness 15 mm 23 mm
maximum dimensions L x H 1600 x 2300 1600 x 2800
maximum dimensions recommended
Subframe opening H
for each glazed pane approx. 2 m² approx. 2 m²
25 Subframe opening L
50
74
25
NOTE
For purposes of handling, transport and installation plus the risk of
breaking the glass, the manufacturer reserves the right, on a case by
case basis, to decide whether to use 2 or more glazed panes while Application (1)
making windows. Mounting on external rebate
The transverse and/or upright inside each window are invoiced as
separate items. Price supplements are required for glazed panes with
surface areas greater than 2.0 m².
Any telescopic joints which might be required to reduce the size re- Application (2)
quirements for transport and on-site maneuvering shall be invoiced as Mounting onto block frame
separate items.
ATTENTION Application (3)
These types of fire closures are required for internal compartmentaliza- Mounting on internal rebate
tion and should be installed in areas that are protected from direct
sunlight, other sources of heat and atmospherics agents. The use of
suitable colors and glasses is required for windows located in areas
which are partially exposed to direct sunlight.
202

205. Features
Steel windows
REI 60 WITH FRAME EMBEDDED INTO THE WALL
windows
--
steel
Frame made of 50 x 30 mm hollow steel profile with
glass stops and 10 x 3 mm aerstop sealing.
-- Fire rated glass is supplied un-mounted, and consists
of float panels with the interposition of thermo-ex-
Wall opening H
pansive fire proof material.
-- Prepared for attachment with plugs and inside the
wall beyond the reveal on block frames.
-- Frame finished with green anti-rust (primer).
-- NON-CERTIFIED EXECUTION. Goods come with the
glass producer’s certification only, with no declara-
tion of conformity or identification plate.
55
Data table REI 60
casing thickness 50 mm
glass door weight 55 kg/m²
Wall opening L
approx. glass thickness 21 mm 55
maximum dimensions L x H 1200 x 2100
NOTE
Execution is only possible with a single glazed pane without any trans-
verse and/or upright dividers.
This glass type is for internal use only.
REI 120 WITH FRAME EMBEDDED INTO THE WALL
-- Frame made of 80 x 30 mm hollow steel profiles with
glass stops and 10 x 3 mm aerstop sealing.
-- Fire rated glass is supplied un-mounted, and consists
of float panels with the interposition of thermo-ex-
Wall opening H
pansive fire proof material.
-- Prepared for attachment with plugs and inside the
wall (out of sight).
-- Frame finished with green anti-rust (primer).
-- NON-CERTIFIED EXECUTION. Goods come with the
glazing producer’s certification only, with no declara-
tion of conformity or identification plate.
Data table
55
REI 120
casing thickness 80 mm
glass door weight 120 kg/m² Wall opening L
approx. glass thickness 52 mm 55
maximum dimensions L x H 1200 x 2100
NOTE
Execution is only possible with a single glazed pane without any trans-
verse and/or upright dividers.
GENERAL NOTES
The use of suitable colors and glasses is required for doors located in All rights reserved. No reproduction (partial or total) without prior au-
areas that are partially exposed to direct sunlight or other heat sources. thorization by Ninz.
The casing must not be exposed to atmospheric agents in any case. For Ninz reserves the right to modify the product. Installation should be
special instructions and recommendations regarding fire rated glass, executed by qualified technicians. Modifications may only be made as
see the “Notices” reported on the last page of the glass door acces- indicated in the installation instructions.
sories section of the present brochure. Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.
203

206. “elegant luminosity
that knows no boundaries”

207. NINZ aluminum windows
FiRE RATEd windows
REI 60 BLOCK FRAME 206
REI 90 OR REI 120 BLOCK FRAME 207
All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced
technical changes to the contents of this brochure.

208. Features
Aluminum windows
REI 60 WITH BLOCK FRAME
windows
aluminium
Aluminum windows, REI 60 (MI Circ. 91) mounted on sub-
frame composed of:
-- REI 60 window with fire resistant casing, manufac-
tured with special steel/aluminum profiles. Cross-
beams and/or uprights are positioned in accordance
with manufacturing criteria.
-- Fire resistant glass is supplied un-mounted and consists of
extra-clear float panels with thermo-expansive fire proof
material interposed for a total thickness of approx. 23mm.
-- Special finishing with thermoset powders, colors to
select from our wide variety (see “painting” page).
-- Subframe to be ordered separately, made of hollow gal-
vanized steel profiles with anchors for mortar fixing.
Data table REI 60
ATTENTION
casing thickness 70 mm These types of fire closures are
glass door weight 75 kg/m² required for internal compart-
mentalization and should be
approx. glass thickness 23 mm
installed in areas that are pro-
maximum dimensions L x H 1600 x 2800 tected from direct sunlight, other
sources of heat and atmospheric
Subframe opening H
maximum dimensions recommended
for each glazed pane approx. 2 m² agents. The use of suitable colors
and glasses is required for doors
located areas that are partially
exposed to direct sunlight.
25 Subframe opening L
70
25
65
NOTE Application (1)
For purposes of handling, transport and installation plus the risk of Mounting on external rebate
breaking the glass, the manufacturer reserves the right, on a case by
case basis, to decide whether to use 2 or more glazed panes while
making windows.
Application (2)
Mounting onto block frame
The transverse and/or upright dividers inside each window are invoiced
as separate items. Price supplements are required for panels with sur-
face areas greater than 2 m².
Application (3)
Any telescopic joints which might required to reduce the size require- Mounting on internal rebate
ments for transport and on-site maneuvering shall be invoiced as sepa-
rate items.
206

209. Features
Aluminum windows
REI 90 OR REI 120 WITH BLOCK FRAME
windows
aluminium
Glazed pane fixed in aluminum REI 90 or REI 120 (MI Circ.
91) mounted on subframe composed of:
-- REI 90 or REI 120 fire rated glass casing made of special
hollow steel/aluminum profiles. Cross beams and/or up-
rights, when necessary, are positioned according to man-
ufacturing criteria. Total thickness of the casing 95 mm.
-- Fire resistant glass is supplied un-mounted and consists
of extra-clear float panels with thermo-expansive fire
proof material interposed for a total thickness of approx.
48 mm for REI 90 and approx. 52 mm for REI 120.
-- Special finishing with thermoset powders, colors to se-
lect from our wide variety (see “painting” page).
-- Subframe to be ordered separately, made of hollow gal-
vanized steel profiles with anchors for mortar fixing.
Data table REI 90 REI 120 ATTENTION
These types of fire closures are re-
casing thickness 95 mm 95 mm quired for internal compartmen-
glass door weight 125 kg/m² 135 kg/m² talization and should be installed
in areas that are protected from
approx. glass thickness 48 mm 52 mm
direct sunlight, other sources of
Subframe opening H
maximum dimensions L x H 1400 x 2000 1400 x 2000 heat and atmospheric agents. The
maximum dimensions recommended use of suitable colors and glasses
approx. 1,2 m² approx. 1,2 m² is required for doors located in
for each glazed pane
areas that are partially exposed
to direct sunlight.
25 Subframe opening L
95
25
65
Application (1)
Mounting on external rebate
NOTE
For purposes of handling, transport and installation plus the risk of
breaking the glass, the manufacturer reserves the right, on a case by Application (2)
case basis, to decide whether to use 2 or more glazed panes while Mounting onto block frame
making windows.
The transverse and/or upright dividers inside each window are invoiced
as separate items. Price supplements are required for panels with sur- Application (3)
face areas greater than 1.2 m². Mounting on internal rebate
Any telescopic joints which might required to reduce the size require-
ments for transport and on-site maneuvering shall be invoiced as sepa-
rate items.
GENERAL NOTES
The use of suitable colors and glasses is required for doors located in All rights reserved. No reproduction (partial or total) without prior au-
areas that are partially exposed to direct sunlight or other heat sources. thorization by Ninz.
The casing must not be exposed to atmospheric agents in any case. For Ninz reserves the right to modify the product. Installation should be
special instructions and recommendations regarding fire rated glass, executed by qualified technicians. Modifications may only be made as
see the “Notices” reported on the last page of the glass door acces- indicated in the installation instructions.
sories section of the present brochure. Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.
207

210. “the strength of steel and
the transparency of glass”

211. NINZ glazed steel doors
FIRe Rated
ONE-LEAVED REI 30 AND REI 60 210
TWO-LEAVED REI 30 AND REI 60 211
REI 30 AND REI 60 WITH FIXED ELEMENTS 212
REI 30 AND REI 60 INSTALLATIONS 213
All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced
technical changes to the contents of this brochure.

212. Features
Glazed steel doors
Glazed steel
ONE-LEAVED REI 30 AND REI 60
doors
One leaf REI 30 and REI 60 glazed steel fire door in con-
formity with UNI 9723, consisting of:
-- REI 30 or REI 60 fire rated glass casing, consisting of
a 15/10 mm thick weight-bearing cold-formed hollow
steel profile frame that is internally insulated with
90
asbestos-free inorganic silicate material and provided
with grooves for the rebate sealing and thermo-ex-
pansive materials.
-- Heavy steel three-wing hinges screwed onto the pro-
785
file rotate on thrust-bearing cushions and stainless
steel pivots.
-- Self-locking lock, to be opened by simple rotation of
the handle.
--
70
‘Yale’ cylinder in nickel-plated brass.
-- Stainless steel handle mounted at 1040 mm above
the finished floor level or at 900 mm when combined
with Touchbar panic bars.
-- Automatic closing mechanism via overhead door-
closer with scissor arm.
-- Rebate sealing and thermo-expansive materials.
--
25
Fire rated glass consisting of extra-clear float pan-
Subframe opening = ordered wall opening = H
els with thermo-expansive fire proof material inter-
posed.
-- Special finishing with thermoset powder paints.
-- Subframe to be ordered separately, made of hollow
galvanized steel profiles with anchors for mortar fix-
ing (38 x 17 x 2 mm).
Opening = H - 74
Dimensions
minimum width L = 630
minimum width with panic bar L = 650
maximum width with or without panic bar L = 1400
minimum height allowed H = 1812
minimum height for escape routes H = 2074
FFL
maximum height allowed H = 2400
Net passage with 90° opening
with EXUS panic bar L – 313 mm
with TOUCHBAR panic bar L – 262 mm
without panic bar L – 188 mm
25
Data table REI 30 REI 60
Opening = L - 148
casing thickness 50 mm 50 mm
Subframe opening =
door weight 45 kg/m² 60 kg/m²
ordered wall opening = L
approx. glass thickness 15 mm 23 mm
210

213. Features
Glazed steel doors
Glazed steel
TWO-LEAVED REI 30 AND REI 60
doors
REI 30 and REI 60 glazed fire door in conformity with UNI
9723 in steel with two leaves, consisting of:
-- REI 30 or REI 60 fire rated glass casing, consisting of
a 15/10 mm thick weight-bearing cold-formed hollow
steel profile that is internally insulated with asbestos-
90
free inorganic silicate material and provided with
grooves for the rebate sealing and thermo-expansive
materials.
-- Heavy steel three-wing hinges screwed on to the pro-
785
file rotate on thrust-bearing cushions and stainless
steel pivots.
-- Self-locking lock, to be opened by simple rotation of
the handle.
--
70
‘Yale’ cylinder in nickel-plated brass.
-- Stainless steel handle mounted on main leaf at 1040
mm above the finished floor level or at 900 mm when
NOTE
combined with Touchbar panic bars.
-- Automatic closing mechanism via overhead door-
With L1 main leaf less than 700
closer with scissor arm. mm or with L2 secondary leaf less
-- Self-locking latch on secondary leaf and visible clos- than 580 mm, the door closers
ing regulator. are on the non-hinge side and
25
-- Rebate sealing and thermo-expansive materials. prevent opening beyond 110°.
--
Subframe opening = ordered wall opening = H
Fire resistant glass consisting of extra-clear float pan-
els with thermo-expansive fire proof material inter- For size’s reasons, the SR390 clos-
posed. ing regulator (included) can’t be
-- Special finishing with thermoset powder paints. used in combination with the CP2
-- Subframe to be ordered separately, made of hollow door closers. Use the RC2 system.
galvanized steel profiles with anchors for mortar fix-
ing (38 x 17 x 2 mm).
Opening = H - 74
Dimensions
min. width L = 950 (L1 = 569 L2 = 381)
min. width with panic bar L = 1200 (L1 ≥ 600 L2 ≥ 400)
max. width with or without panic bar L = 2600 (L1 = 1300 L2 = 1300)
min. height allowed H = 1812
min. height for escape routes H = 2074 FFL
max. height allowed H = 2400
Net passage with 90° opening Data table REI 30 REI 60
with 2 EXUS panic bars L – 478 mm casing thickness 50 mm 50 mm
with 2 TOUCHBAR panic bars L – 376 mm door weight 45 kg/m² 60 kg/m²
without panic bars L – 228 mm approx. glass thickness 15 mm 23 mm
L2 L1
25
Main leaf doorframe opening = L1 - 89
Opening = L - 148
Subframe opening = ordered wall opening = L
211

214. Features
Glazed steel doors
Glazed steel
REI 30 AND REI 60 WITH FIXED ELEMENTS
doors
REI 30 and REI 60 fire rated complex glazed pane in con-
formity with UNI 9723 in steel, consisting of:
-- REI 30 or REI 60 fire rated glass casing made of a 15/10
mm thick weight-bearing cold-formed hollow steel
profiles that are internally insulated with asbestos-
free inorganic silicate material and provided with
channels for the rebate sealing and thermo-expan-
sive materials.
-- Heavy steel three-wing hinges screwed onto the pro-
90
file rotate on thrust-bearing cushions and stainless
steel pivots.
-- Self-locking lock, to be opened by simple rotation of
the handle.
--
785
‘Yale’ cylinder in nickel-plated brass.
-- Stainless steel handle mounted on main leaf at 1040
mm above the finished floor level or at 900 mm when
combined with Touchbar panic bars.
--
70
Automatic closing mechanism via overhead door-
closer with scissor arm. NOTE
-- Self-locking latch on secondary leaf or visible closing With L1 main leaf less than 700
regulator. mm or with L2 secondary leaf less
-- Rebate sealing and thermo-expansive materials. than 580 mm, the door closers are
-- Fire rated glass composed of extra-clear float panels on the non-hinge side and prevent
25
with thermo-expansive fire proof material interposed. opening beyond 110°.
-- Special finishing with thermoset powder paints.
-- For purposes of handling, trans-
Subframe opening = ordered wall opening = H
H2
Subframe to be ordered separately, made of hollow
galvanized steel profiles with anchors for mortar fix- port and installation plus the risk
ing (38 x 17 x 2 mm). of breaking the glass, the manu-
facturer reserves the right, on a
case by case basis, to execute fixed
Dimensions glazed doors with the necessary
min. width L = 950 ( a = 569 p = 381) number of panels.
min. width with panic bar L = 1200 ( a ≥ 600 p ≥ 400)
max. width with or without panic bar L = 2600 ( a = 1300 p = 1300) The transverse and/or upright di-
min. leaf height allowed viders inside each glass door are
H1 = 1812
Opening = H1- 70
invoiced as separate items.
min. leaf height for escape routes H1 = 2070 The glass for the fixed parts re-
max. leaf height allowed H1 = 2400 quires assembly.
H1
L2, L3 and H2 measurements min. 300
recommended maximum (others on request) L = 6000 H = 4000 area=18 m² Wall opening dimensions may vary
as a function of lateral and/or up-
per fixtures and their width and/or
Net passage with 90° opening FFL height.
with 2 EXUS panic bars L1 – 470 mm
with 2 TOUCHBAR panic bars L1 – 368 mm
without panic bars L1 – 220 mm For size’s reasons, the SR390 closing regulator (included) can’t be used in
combination with the CP2 door closers. Use the RC2 system.
Data table REI 30 REI 60
casing thickness 50 mm 50 mm Any telescopic joints that might be required to reduce size requirements
door weight 45 kg/m² 60 kg/m² for transport and on-site maneuvering shall be invoiced as separate
approx. glass thickness 15 mm 23 mm items (maximum possible size without junctions is 2500 x 3000 mm).
passive leaf = p active leaf = a
25 Opening = L1 - 140 25
L3 L1 L2
Subframe opening = ordered wall opening = L
212

215. Installations
Glazed steel doors
Glazed steel
STEEL REI 30 AND REI 60 INSTALLATIONS
doors
REI 30 and REI 60 fire rated glass closures are custom built in the order. It is also important that the sections they are
which means that the required dimensions must be specified applied to consist of weight bearing walls.
Installation (1): mounting on external rebate
Subframe in hollow galvanized profiles Subframe in hollow
galvanized profiles
Wall opening = Subframe opening
REI 30 or REI 60 glass 38 x 17 x 2
4
50
130
50
20 50 50
130
20
4
Wall opening = Subframe opening REI 30 or REI 60 glass
horizontal cross section vertical cross section
Application (2): mounting onto block frame
Limited opening beyond 90°
horizontal cross section vertical cross section
Application (3): mounting on internal rebate
Limited opening beyond 90°
horizontal cross section vertical cross section
GENERAL NOTES
The use of suitable colors and glasses is required for doors located in All rights reserved. No reproduction (partial or total) without prior au-
areas that are partially exposed to direct sunlight or other heat sources. thorization by Ninz.
The casing must not be exposed to atmospheric agents in any case. For Ninz reserves the right to modify the product. Installation should be
special instructions and recommendations regarding fire rated glass, executed by qualified technicians. Modifications may only be made as
see the “Notices” reported on the last page of the glass door acces- indicated in the installation instructions.
sories section of the present brochure. Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.
213

216. “the top of the line
in transparent safety”

217. NINZ glazed aluminum doors
FIRe RaTed
ONE- AND TWO-LEAVED REI 60 216 - 217
REI 60 WITH FIXED ELEMENTS 218
REI 60 INSTALLATIONS 219
ONE- AND TWO-LEAVED REI 90 AND REI 120 220 - 221
REI 90 AND REI 120 WITH FIXED ELEMENTS 222
REI 90 AND REI 120 INSTALLATIONS 223
All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced
technical changes to the contents of this brochure.

218. Features
Glazed aluminum doors
ONE-LEAVED REI 60
Glazed alu
doors
One leaf REI 60 fire-rated aluminum glazed doors in con-
formity with UNI 9723 and consisting of:
-- REI 60 fire-rated glazed casing made of special steel/
aluminum profiles.
-- Heavy steel two-wing hinges welded onto the profile
rotate on thrust-bearing cushions and stainless steel
pivots.
-- Self-locking lock, to be opened by simple rotation of
the handle.
--
710
‘Yale’ cylinder in nickel-plated brass.
-- Stainless steel handle mounted at 1040 mm above
the finished floor level or at 965 mm when combined
with Touchbar panic bars.
-- Automatic closing mechanism via overhead door-
closer with scissor arm.
-- Rebate sealing and thermo-expansive materials.
-- Fire rated glass composed of extra-clear float panels
with thermo-expansive fire proof material interposed.
-- Special finishing with thermoset powder paints.
--
25
Subframe to be ordered separately, made of hollow
galvanized steel profiles with anchors for mortar fix-
ing (60 x 20 x 2 mm).
ordered wall opening = H
Subframe opening =
Dimensions
minimum width L = 630 Opening = H - 65
minimum width with panic bar L = 650
maximum width with or without panic bar L = 1400
minimum height allowed H = 1809
170
minimum height for escape routes H = 2065
maximum height allowed H = 2400 FFL
Net passage with 90° opening
with EXUS panic bar L – 327 mm Subframe opening =
ordered wall opening = L
with TOUCHBAR panic bar L – 276 mm
without panic bar L – 202 mm
70
Data table REI 60
casing thickness 70 mm
door weight 80 kg/m²
25 25
approx. glass thickness 23 mm
Opening = L - 130
216

219. Features
Glazed aluminum doors
Glazed alu
REI 60 WITH TWO LEAVES
doors
Two leaves REI 60 fire rated aluminum glass door in con-
formity with UNI 9723 consisting of:
-- REI 60 fire rated glass casing made of special steel/alu-
minum profiles.
-- Heavy steel two-wing hinges welded on to the profile
rotate on thrust-bearing cushions and stainless steel
pivots.
-- Self-locking lock, to be opened by simple rotation of
the handle.
710
-- ‘Yale’ cylinder in nickel-plated brass.
-- Stainless steel handle mounted on main leaf at 1040
mm above the finished floor level or at 965 mm when
combined with Touchbar panic bars.
-- Automatic closing mechanism via overhead door-clos-
NOTE
er with scissor arm.
-- Self-locking latch on secondary leaf and visible closing
With L1 main leaf less than 700
mm or with L2 secondary leaf less
regulator.
-- Rebate sealing and thermo-expansive materials.
than 580 mm, the door closers
--
25
Fire rated glass composed of extra-clear float panels are on the non-hinge side and
with thermo-expansive fire proof material interposed. prevent opening beyond 110°.
--
ordered wall opening = H
Special finishing with thermoset powder paints.
-- For size’s reasons, the SR390
Subframe opening =
Subframe to be ordered separately, made of hollow
galvanized steel profiles with anchors for mortar fix- closing regulator (included) can’t
ing (60 x 20 x 2 mm).
Opening = H - 65 be used in combination with the
CP2 door closers. Use the RC2
system.
Dimensions
min. width L = 950 ( L1 = 567 L2 = 383)
min. width with panic bar L = 1500 ( L1 ≥ 750 L2 ≥ 600)
170
max. width with or without panic bar L = 2600 ( L1=1300 L2 = 1300)
min. height allowed H = 1809 FFL
min. height for escape routes H = 2065
max. height allowed H = 2400
Net passage with 90° opening Data table REI 60
with 2 EXUS panic bars L – 524 mm casing thickness 70 mm
with 2 TOUCHBAR panic bars L – 422 mm door weight 80 kg/m²
without panic bars L – 274 mm approx. glass thickness 23 mm
Subframe opening = ordered wall opening = L
L2 L1
70
25 25
Main leaf doorframe opening = L1 - 72,5
Opening = L - 130
217

220. Features
Glazed aluminum doors
REI 60 WITH FIXED ELEMENTS
Glazed alu
doors
Vetrata complessa tagliafuoco REI 60 conforme UNI 9723
in alluminio composta da:
-- REI 60 fire rated glass casing made of special steel/
aluminum profiles.
-- Heavy steel two-wing hinges welded on to the profile
rotate on thrust-bearing cushions and stainless steel
pivots.
-- Self-locking lock, to be opened by simple rotation of
the handle.
-- ‘Yale’ cylinder in nickel-plated brass.
-- Stainless steel handle mounted on main leaf at 1040
710
mm above the finished floor level or at 965 mm when
combined with panic bars.
-- Automatic closing mechanism via overhead door-
closer with scissor arm.
-- Self-locking latch on secondary leaf and visible clos-
ing regulator. NOTE
-- Rebate sealing and thermo-expansive materials. With L1 main leaf less than 700
-- Fire rated glass composed of extra-clear float pan- mm or with L2 secondary leaf less
els with thermo-expansive fire proof material inter- than 580 mm, the door closers are
25
posed. on the non-hinge side and prevent
-- Special finishing with thermoset powder paints. opening beyond 110°.
--
H2
Subframe to be ordered separately, made of hollow
galvanized steel profiles with anchors for mortar fix- For purposes of handling, transport
Subframe opening = ordered wall opening = H
ing (60 x 20 x 2 mm). and installation plus the risk of
breaking the glass, the manufac-
Dimensions turer reserves the right, on a case by
min. width L = 950 ( a = 567 p = 383) case basis, to execute fixed glazed
doors with the necessary number of
min. width with panic bar L = 1500 ( a ≥ 750 p ≥ 600)
panels.
max. width with or without panic bar L = 2600 ( a =1300 p =1300)
min. leaf height allowed H1 = 1809 The transverse and/or upright di-
min. leaf height for escape routes H1 = 2085 viders inside each glass door are
Opening = H1 - 85
max. leaf height allowed H1 = 2400 invoiced as separate items.
H1
L2, L3 and H2 measurements min. 300 The glass for the fixed parts requires
recommended maximum (others on request) L = 6000 H = 4000 area=18m² assembly.
Wall opening dimensions may vary
Net passage with 90° opening
as a function of lateral and/or up-
with 2 EXUS panic bars L1 – 564 mm per fixtures and their width and/or
with 2 TOUCHBAR panic bars L1 – 462 mm FFL height.
without panic bars L1 – 314 mm
Data table REI 60 For size’s reasons, the SR390 closing regulator (included) can’t be used in
casing thickness 70 mm combination with the CP2 door closers. Use the RC2 system.
door weight 80 kg/m² Any telescopic joints that might be required to reduce size requirements
approx. glass thickness 23 mm for transport and on-site maneuvering shall be invoiced as separate
items (maximum possible size without junctions is 2500 x 3000 mm).
passive leaf = p active leaf = a
152 65
70
25 25
Opening = L1 - 170
L3 L1 L2
Subframe opening = ordered wall opening = L
218

221. REI 60 Installations
Glazed aluminum doors
Glazed alu
REI 60 ALUMINUM INSTALLATIONS
doors
REI 60 fire rated glass closures made of aluminum are made they are applied to be support walls so that the installa-
to measure, which means that all dimensions need to be tion can be completed with the necessary cover strips.
specified in the order. It is also important that the sections
Installation (1): mounting on external rebate
Subframe in hollow galvanized profiles (60 x 20 x 2)
Subframe in hollow
REI 60 Glass galvanized profiles
70
Wall opening = Subframe opening
128
70
128
Wall opening = Subframe opening
horizontal cross section vertical cross section
Installation (2): mounting onto block frame
Limited opening beyond 90°
horizontal cross section vertical cross section
Applicazione (3): montaggio in battuta interna
Limited opening beyond 90°
horizontal cross section vertical cross section
219

222. Features
Glazed aluminum doors
ONE-LEAVED REI 90 AND REI 120
Glazed alu
doors
One leaf REI 90 and REI 120 fire rated glazed doors in con-
formity with UNI 9723 consisting of:
-- REI 90 or REI 120 fire rated glass casing made of special
steel/aluminum profiles.
-- Heavy steel three-wing hinges welded on to the profile ro-
tate on thrust-bearing cushions and stainless steel pivots.
-- Self-locking lock, to be opened by simple rotation of
the handle.
-- ‘Yale’ cylinder in nickel-plated brass.
--
710
Stainless steel handle mounted at 1040 mm above the
finished floor level or at 965 mm when combined with
Touchbar panic bars.
-- Automatic closing mechanism via overhead door-closer
with scissor arm.
-- Rebate sealing and thermo-expansive materials.
-- Fire rated glass composed of extra-clear float panels
with thermo-expansive fire proof material interposed.
-- Special finishing with thermoset powder paints.
-- Subframe to be ordered separately, made of hollow gal-
vanized steel profiles with anchors for mortar fixing (80
25
x 20 x 2 mm).
Subframe opening = ordered wall opening = H
Dimensions
minimum width L = 630
minimum width with panic bar L = 650
Opening = H - 65
maximum width with or without panic bar L = 1320
minimum height allowed H = 1809
minimum height for escape routes H = 2065
maximum height allowed H = 2200
Net passage with 90° opening
170
with EXUS panic bar L – 352 mm
with TOUCHBAR panic bar L – 301 mm
without panic bar L – 227 mm
FFL
Data table REI 90 REI 120
casing thickness 95 mm 95 mm
door weight 130 kg/m² 140 kg/m²
Subframe opening =
approx. glass thickness
ordered wall opening = L
48 mm 52 mm
95
ATTENTION
The considerable weight of glazed doors may make them more difficult
to use, especially for people with reduced motor capacities (disabled,
seniors, in poor health, etc.).
It is important to take this factor into consideration while planning the 25 25
use of this product and/or to always hold the leaves open by means of
electromagnets.
Opening = L - 130
220

223. Features
Glazed aluminum doors
Glazed alu
TWO-LEAVED REI 90 AND REI 120
doors
Two leaf REI 90 and REI 120 fire rated glazed door in con-
formity with UNI 9723consisting of:
-- REI 90 or REI 120 fire rated glass casing made of special
steel/aluminum profiles.
-- Heavy steel three-wing hinges welded onto the pro-
file rotate on thrust-bearing cushions and stainless
steel pivots.
-- Self-locking lock, to be opened by simple rotation of
the handle.
--
710
‘Yale’ cylinder in nickel-plated brass.
-- Stainless steel handle mounted on main leaf at 1040
mm above the finished floor level or at 965 mm when
combined with Touchbar panic bars.
-- Automatic closing mechanism via overhead door-closer
with scissor arm.
-- Self-locking latch on secondary leaf and visible clos- NOTE
ing regulator. With L1 main leaf less than 700
-- Rebate sealing and thermo-expansive materials. mm or with L2 secondary leaf
-- Fire rated glass composed of extra-clear float panels less than 580 mm, the door
with thermo-expansive fire proof material interposed. closers are on the non-hinge
-- Special finishing with thermoset powder paints. side and prevent opening be-
25
-- Subframe to be ordered separately, made of hollow gal-
Subframe opening = ordered wall opening = H
yond 110°.
vanized steel profiles with anchors for mortar fixing (80
x 20 x 2 mm).
For size’s reasons, the SR390
closing regulator (included)
Dimensions can’t be used in combination
Opening = H - 65
min. width L = 950 ( L1 = 567 L2 = 383) with the CP2 door closers. Use
min. width with panic L = 1600 ( L1 ≥ 800 L2 ≥ 700) the RC2 system.
max. width with or without panic bar L = 2400 ( L1=1200 L2=1200)
min. height allowed H = 1809
min. height for escape routes H = 2065
max. height allowed H = 2200
170
Net passage with 90° opening
with 2 EXUS panic bars L – 574 mm FFL
with 2 TOUCHBAR panic bars L – 472 mm
without panic bars L – 324 mm
ATTENTION
Data table REI 90 REI 120 The considerable weight of glazed doors may make them more difficult
casing thickness 95 mm 95 mm to use, especially for people with reduced motor capacities (disabled,
door weight 130 kg/m² 140 kg/m² seniors, in poor health, etc.).
approx. glass thickness 48 mm 52 mm It is important to take this factor into consideration while planning the
use of this product and/or to always hold the leaves open by means of
electromagnets.
Subframe opening = ordered wall opening = L
L2 L1
95
25 25
Main leaf doorframe opening = L1 - 72,5
Opening = L - 130
221

224. Features
Glazed aluminum doors
REI 90 AND REI 120 WITH FIXED ELEMENTS
Glazed alu
doors
REI 90 and REI 120 glazed door complex in conformity
with UNI 9723 in aluminum consisting of:
-- REI 90 or REI 120 fire rated glass casing made of spe-
cial steel/aluminum profiles.
-- Heavy steel three-wing hinges welded onto the pro-
file rotate on thrust-bearing cushions and stainless
steel pivots.
-- Self-locking lock, to be opened by simple rotation of
the handle.
-- ‘Yale’ cylinder in nickel-plated brass.
-- Stainless steel handle mounted on main leaf at 1040
710
mm above the finished floor level or at 965 mm when
combined with Touchbar panic bars.
-- Automatic closing mechanism via overhead door-
closer with scissor arm.
-- Self-locking latch on secondary leaf and visible clos-
ing regulator. NOTE
-- Rebate sealing and thermo-expansive materials. With L1 main leaf less than 700 mm or
-- Fire rated glass composed of extra-clear float panels with L2 secondary leaf less than 580
with thermo-expansive fire proof material interposed. mm, the door closers are on the non-
--
25
Special finishing with thermoset powder paints. hinge side and prevent opening be-
-- Subframe to be ordered separately, made of galva- yond 110°. For purposes of handling,
H2
nized steel tubing with anchors for mortar fixing (80 transport and installation plus the risk
Subframe opening = ordered wall opening = H
x 20 x 2 mm). of breaking the glass, the manufactur-
er reserves the right, on a case by case
basis, to execute fixed glazed doors
Dimensions with the necessary number of panels.
min. width L1 = 950 ( a = 567 p = 383) The transverse and/or upright dividers
min. width with panic bar L1 = 1600 ( a ≥ 800 p ≥ 700) inside each glass door are invoiced as
max. width with or without panic bar L1 = 2400 ( a =1200 p =1200) separate items. Price supplements are
min. leaf height allowed H1 = 1809 required for panels with surface areas
greater than 1.2 m². The glass for the
min. leaf height for escape routes H1 = 2085
fixed parts requires assembly.
Opening = H1 - 85
max. leaf height allowed H1 = 2200
H1
Any telescopic joints that might be re-
L2, L3 and H2 measurements min. 300 quired to reduce size requirements for
recommended maximum (others on request) L = 6000 H = 4000 area=18m² transport and on-site maneuvering shall
be invoiced as separate items (maxi-
mum possible size without junctions is
Net passage with 90° opening 2500 x 3000 mm). For size’s reasons,
with 2 EXUS panic bars L1 – 614 mm the SR390 closing regulator (included)
FFL can’t be used in combination with the
with 2 TOUCHBAR panic bars L1 – 512 mm
without panic bars L1 – 364 mm
CP2 door closers. Use the RC2 system.
For size’s reasons, the SR390 closing regulator (included) can’t be used
in combination with the CP2 door closers. Use the RC2 system.
Data table REI 90 REI 120
casing thickness
ATTENTION
95 mm 95 mm
The considerable weight of glazed doors may make them more difficult
door weight 130 kg/m² 140 kg/m² to use, especially for people with reduced motor capacities (disabled,
approx. glass thickness 48 mm 52 mm seniors, in poor health, etc.). It is important to take this factor into
consideration, therefore, while planning the use of this product and/or
to always hold the leaves open by means of electromagnets.
passive leaf = p active leaf = a
152 65
95
25 25
Opening = L1- 170
L3 L1 L2
Subframe opening = ordered wall opening = L
222

225. REI 90 and REI 120 installations
Glazed aluminum doors
Glazed alu
REI 90 AND REI 120 ALUMINUM INSTALLATIONS
doors
REI 90 ad REI 120 fire rated glass closures made of alumi- that they be applied to support walls so that the installa-
num are built to measure, which means that all dimen- tion can be completed with the necessary cover strips
sions need to be specified in the order. It is also important.
Installation (1): mounting on external rebate
Subframe in hollow galvanized profiles (80 x 20 x 2) Subframe in hollow
REI 90 or galvanized profiles
95
REI 120 glass
Wall opening = Subframe opening
128
128 95
Wall opening = Subframe opening
horizontal cross section vertical cross section
Installation (2): mounting onto block frame
Limited opening beyond 90°
horizontal cross section vertical cross section
Installation (3): mounting on internal rebate
Limited opening beyond 90°
horizontal cross section vertical cross section
GENERAL NOTES
The use of suitable colors and glasses is required for doors located All rights reserved. No reproduction (partial or total) without prior au-
in areas that are partially exposed to direct sunlight or other heat thorization by Ninz.
sources. The casing must not be exposed to atmospheric agents in Ninz reserves the right to modify the product. Installation should be
any case. For special instructions and recommendations regarding fire executed by qualified technicians. Modifications may only be made as
rated glass, see the “Notices” reported on the last page of the glass indicated in the installation instructions.
door accessories section of the present brochure. Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair work.
223

226. “quality accessories
distinguish the door“

227. Accessories for NINZ glazed doors
Fire rATeD
PAINTING 226
SPECIAL TREATMENTS - PYLON 227
SUBFRAMES 228 - 229
DOOR CLOSERS, CLOSING REGULATORS 230 - 231
ELECTRIC HANDLE 232
CONTROLLED ACCESS SYSTEMS 233
DOOR-HOLDING SYSTEMS 234 - 235
PANIC BARS 236 - 242
NOTICES - GLAZED DOORS 243
All measurements are in mm. We reserve the right to make unannounced
technical changes to the contents of this brochure.

228. Painting
For fire rated glazed doors
Accessories
glazed doors
PAiNTiNG For sTeeL GLAZeD Doors WiTH Colors always available:
BLocK FrAMe RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
1013 3000 5010 6005 7035
The glazed steel doors come with special finishing in ther-
moset powder paints. The colors reported in the table
(side) are always available. Other tints are available on RAL RAL RAL RAL
request only. 8017 9005 9006 9010
ATTENTION
The paint deteriorates upon exposure to direct sunlight or atmospheric NCS NCS
agents 4020- 5020-
B50G B50G
PAiNTiNG For sTeeL/ALUMiNUM GLAZeD Doors Colors available:
The glazed aluminum doors come with special finishing in RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL RAL
thermoset powder paints. The colors reported in the table 1013 3000 5010 6005 7035 8017 9010
(side) are always available. Other tints are available on re-
quest only.
NCS NCS
RAL RAL
4020- 5020-
9005 9006
ATTENTION B50G B50G
The paint deteriorates upon exposure to direct sunlight or atmospheric
agents
Anodized colors:
Due to artifacts of the printing process, the colors depicted here may light dark
silver black
bronze brown
not correspond exactly to the colors of actual doors. Please refer to
RAL or NCS samples.
226

229. Special treatments
For fire rated glazed doors
Accessories
TreATMeNTs For eXTerior Use
glazed doors
When glazed doors are used in locations exposed to di-
rect UV rays from sunlight or internal lighting, special
glass protection and coloration/paint is available to adapt
to this environment. The side of the glass that requires
special treatment will need to be specified (the glass-stop
side or the opposite side). If left unspecified, the special
treatment will be applied to the side opposite to the glass
stops. A sticker will be applied to indicate the protected
side for purposes of assembly and installation.
Glazed doors for external environments should always be
protected from water.
Painting and glass treatment for external environments is
only available for REI 30, REI 60 and REI 120 closures with
block frames!
FiLM
To reduce or prevent external visibility while maintaining
optimal internal visibility, REI 30, REI 60 and REI 120 glass-
es with block frames may be equipped with opacifying or
covering films (black or white) that have been designed
for the purpose. The side of the glass that requires special
treatment will need to be specified (the glass-stop side or
the opposite side). If left unspecified, the film will be ap-
plied to the glass-stop side.
Film application is only available for REI 30, REI 60 and REI
120 closures with block frames!
PYLoN
Pylon and/or transverse element for the reinforcement or
partitioning of complex elements. Made of an internal
steel profile measuring 80 x 80 x 3 mm and surfaced with
Promatec panels, with visible edges being finished with
painted metal plates with the same finishing as the casing
itself. Manufactured to measure and ready for attachment.
120
149
4 120 5 120
Pylon for REI 30 and REI 60 glazed doors, 120 x 120 section Pylon for REI 90 and REI 120 glazed doors, 120 x 149 section
227

230. Subframes
For fire rated glazed doors
Accessories
THree-siDeD sUBFrAMe
glazed doors
REI 30 or REI 60 in steel
Subframe ready for assembly for REI 30 and REI 60 one-
Required opening = FM H + 20
Wall opening ordered FM H
leaved, two-leaved and complex glazed doors made of
steel. Made of hollow galvanized steel profiles with a 38
subframe opening
x 17 x 2 mm shaped section. Includes spacers that can be
disassembled and anchors for mortar fixing.
Required opening = FM L + 40
38
Wall opening ordered FM L
subframe opening
REI 60 in steel/aluminum
Subframe for REI 60 steel/aluminum one-leaved, two-
leaved and complex glazed doors. Made of hollow gal-
vanized steel profiles with a 60 x 20 x 2 mm rectangular
Required opening = FM H + 25
section. Includes spacers that can be disassembled and an-
Wall opening ordered FM H
chors for mortar fixing.
subframe opening
Required opening = FM L + 50
60
Wall opening ordered FM L
subframe opening
REI 90 or REI 120 in steel/aluminum
Subframe for REI 90 and REI 120 one-leaved, two-leaved
and complex glazed doors made of steel. Made of hollow
galvanized steel profiles with a 80 x 20 x 2 mm rectangu-
Required opening = FM H + 25
lar section. Includes spacers that can be disassembled and
Wall opening ordered FM H
anchors for mortar fixing.
subframe opening
Required opening = FM L + 50
80
Wall opening ordered FM L
subframe opening
NOTE
The subframe optional accessory is to be ordered separately.
ATTENTION
Order measurements for subframes are the same as their internal
measurements, which correspond to the order measurements (FM) for
the glazed door.
228

231. Subframes
For fire rated glazed doors
Accessories
FoUr-siDeD sUBFrAMe
glazed doors
REI 30 or REI 60 in steel
Subframe ready for assembly for REI 30 and REI 60 steel
windows with block frame. Made of hollow galvanized
Required opening = FM H + 40
Wall opening ordered = FM H
steel profiles with a 38 x 17 x 2 mm shaped section. In-
cludes spacers that can be disassembled and anchors for
subframe opening
mortar fixing.
Required opening = FM L + 40
38
Wall opening ordered FM L
subframe opening
REI 60 in steel/aluminum
Subframe for REI 60 steel/aluminum windows with block
frame. Made of hollow galvanized steel profiles with a 60
x 20 x 2 mm rectangular section. Includes spacers that can
be disassembled and anchors for mortar fixing.
Required opening = FM H + 50
Wall opening ordered FM H
Required opening = FM L + 50
subframe opening
60
Wall opening ordered FM L
subframe opening
REI 90 or REI 120 in steel/aluminum
Subframe for REI 90 and REI 120 steel/aluminum windows
with block frame. Made of hollow galvanized steel profiles
with a 80 x 20 x 2 mm rectangular section. Includes spacers
that can be disassembled and anchors for mortar fixing.
Required opening = FM H + 50
Wall opening ordered FM H
Required opening = FM L + 50
subframe opening
80
Wall opening ordered FM L
subframe opening
NOTE
The subframe option needs to be expressly ordered.
ATTENTION
The order measurements for the subframe are equal to its internal
measurements, which correspond to the order measurements (FM) for
the glazed door.
229

232. Door closers
For fire rated glazed doors
Accessories
DOOR CLOSER maximum opening in the absence of obstacles
glazed doors
Model one-leaved door active leaf passive leaf
Door closers serve to ensure the automatic closing of CP1/CP1 (V) 180° 180° 180°
glazed doors and allow for the regulation of closure CP2 180° 180° 180°
force, speed and final impact. Door closer products are
CP2-EMF 120° 120° 120°
addressed by EU directive 89/106/CEE, which means they
are subject to marking.
Model power supply absorption EC certification standard
Color options: CP1 0432-BPR-0054
CP1 (V) - - EN 1154
RAL RAL RAL 0432-BPR-0007
dark bronze 9016 9005 CP2 - - 0432-BPR-0051 EN 1154
CP2-EMF 0432-BPR-0051 EN 1154
24 Vcc 58,3 mA
0432-BPR-0025 EN 1155
CP1 and CP1 (V) with scissor arm
marked in conformity with EN 1154.
Each leaf is equipped with an overhead CP1 door closer
with a silver-colored scissor arm. The CP1 is suited for use
on fire rated glazed doors and has been classified for 180°
closure with a force level of 3 or 4 for the CP1 and 2 or 6
for the CP1 (V).. Installation holes are pre-drilled into the
leaf and frame.
NOTE
Arm protrusion = 290 mm for the CP1 or 280 mm for the CP1 (V)
CP2 with slide channel
marked in conformity with EN 1154.
On request, glazed doors are available with overhead CP2
door closers with slide channels. Relative to the CP1, the ad-
vantage of this system is the absence of a protruding arm.
The CP2 is suited for use on fire rated glazed doors and has
been classified for 180° closure with force level 4.
Glazed doors ordered with CP2 are provided with pre-
drilled installation holes on the door leaf and the frame.
CP2-EMF with slide channel and electro-mechan-
ical check
marked in conformity with EN 1154 and EN 1155.
The CP2–EMF differs from the CP2 in that it has an electro-
mechanical hold-open device that allows the door leaf to
be locked at an angle ranging from 80° to 120°. During
alarms or power outages, the hold-open device is unlocked
and the door is closed by the door closer.
The CP2-EMF can be used on fire rated glazed doors and
has a maximum opening range of 120°, with a closing force
set at 4.
Glazed doors ordered with CP2-EMF are provided with pre-
drilled installation holes on the door leaf and the frame.
230

233. Closing regulators
For fire rated glazed doors
Accessories
CLOSING REGULATORS maximum opening in the absence of obstacles
glazed doors
Model active leaf passive leaf power supply
Closing regulators administer the closure of two-leaved SR390 180° 180° -
doors so that the secondary leaf is overlaid on the active RC2 180° 180° -
leaf upon final closure. This is why it is mandatory to apply RC2-EMF1 130° 120° 24 Vcc
closing regulators to all two-leaved fire doors.
There are two systems for applying it to the door:
- separated from the self-closing system of the door closer Model absorption EC certification standard
- incorporated into the closure system of the door closer SR390 - 0432-BPR-0026 EN 1154
Closing regulators are addressed by EU directive 89/106/
CEE, which means they are subject to marking. RC2 0432-BPR-0051 EN 1154
-
0432-BPR-0026 EN 1158
0432-BPR-0051 EN 1154
RC2-EMF1 58,3 mA 0432-BPR-0025 EN 1155
0432-BPR-0026 EN 1158
SR390 Closing regulator
The SR390 closing regulator device is distinct from the
door closer and is a standard element of all fire rated
glazed doors with two leaves. marked in conformity
with EN 1158.
480
35
128
79
The SR390 regulator is suited for fire doors and has been
classified for force levels ranging from 3 to 7.
RC2 system RC2–EMF1 System
marked in conformity with EN 1154 and EN 1158. marked in conformity with EN 1154, EN 1158 and EN
On request, two-leaved glazed doors are available with an 1155.
RC2 regulator in place of the SR390. The RC2–EMF1 system differs from the RC2 in that it has an
The RC2 closing regulator system is incorporated into the electro-mechanical hold-open device that allows the door
door closer, and consists of 2 CP2 with force EN 4 with a leaf to be locked at an angle ranging from approx. 80° to
slide channel and a regulator integrated into the upper 130°. The active leaf is held open by the closing regulator
sliding guide. The entire system is silver colored. system. During alarms or power outages, the hold-open
system is unlocked and the door is closed by the door closer.
The RC2 system presents clear advantages:- no protrud- The entire system is provided in the standard silver color.
ing door closer arms
- regulator concealed in the upper guide (even when the The RC2-EMF1 system presents multiple advantages:
door is open) -- possibility of holding the leaves open in the desired po-
- controlled closure of both leaves sition
The RC2 regulator is suited for use on fire rated doors -- no visible magnets
and has been classified for both door closers with force -- no protruding door closer arms
level EN 4. Minimum wall opening width of 1320 mm and -- regulator concealed in the upper guide (even when the
minimum of 420 mm for the secondary leaf. Glazed doors door is open)
ordered with RC2s come with pre-drilled holes for the ap- -- controlled closure of both leaves
plication of 2 CP2 door closers on the leaves and sliding
guide on the frame. The RC2-EMF1 system is suited for use on fire rated doors
and is classified for both door closers with force level EN 4.
Minimum wall opening of 1320 mm and minimum of 420
mm for the secondary leaf.
Glazed doors ordered with RC2-EMF1 are provided with pre-
drilled installation holes on the door leaf and the frame.
Color options for RC2 / RC2-EMF1:
RAL RAL RAL
dark bronze 9016 9005
RC2 / RC2-EMF1
231

234. Electric handle
For fire rated glazed doors
141.5 75
Accessories
ELM/CISA MULTI-VOLTAGE CISA ELECTRIC HANDLE
glazed doors
Controlled door opening system that employs an electron-
190
ic device to activate the handle. Equipped with a separate
277
timer (for insertion into the switch box) which can be set
92
for different opening times: from a minimum of 0,1 sec-
ond to a maximum of 10 days.
Equipped with green LED that signal activation of the
handle.
38 33
The ELM/cisa system includes: electric handles, 2 meters
of power cable, cable sleeve for the connection between
the leaf and the frame, 8/9 square spindle, fixing screws,
adjustable timer packaged separately.
Technical data
power supply 12 Vcc/Vca - 24 Vcc/Vca
current absorbed 330 mA
startup current 800 mA
operational temperature -20°C ÷ +80°C
max. relative ambient humidity 95%
NOTE
The electric handle requires assembly.
PANIC BARS FOR COMBINATION WITH ELECTRIC
HANDLE
Function
Controlled opening is only possible for the ‘pull’ direction
side (side on which the electric handle is installed) when
combined with panic bars. Locking the lock by key blocks
the electric handle functioning, while opening is still pos-
sible via the panic bar on the push side.
For additional information see the dedicated pages.
The Touchbar panic exit device can be installed with all glazed door types
Use
One- or two-leaved doors of emergency exits.
Exus panic bar can be installed with all glazed door types except for
REI 90 and REI 120
232

235. EM controlled opening
For fire rated glazed doors
Accessories
coNTroLLeD oPeNiNG sYsTeM 01
glazed doors
This system is for use in special situations when the glazed
doors remain closed and should only be opened with elec-
trical consent. The electrically powered electromagnet
holds the door closed with a holding force of approxi-
mately 300 kg, rendering the action of the handle ineffec-
tive. Only electrical commands (badge reader, key button,
etc.) or electrical consent from the fire detector system 02
can deactivate the electromagnet making a door opening 03
possible.
04
Operation
The door is held closed by the electromagnet (01) and the
bolt of the lock. Opening from the outside can happen
via magnetic card (04) using the Badge reader (02) of the
card control system or any other system of choice and by
retracting the bolt using the handle or key.
From the inside, the deactivation of the electromagnet is
caused by the unlock button (03) (also remotely) or with
the same system used for the pull side, while the locking
bolt must still be retracted using the handle or key. The NOTE
activated electromagnet signals its state with a red LED, Unblocking of the door is only possible if the door is not locked by key.
whereas the green LED signals the temporary deactiva-
tion. Further a relay n.o./n.c. signaling the electromag-
netic state is supplied.
Technical data
model 13700 TD withstand force up to 300 Kg.
power supply 12/24 Vcc time delay 0 ÷ 90 sec.
current absorbed at 12 V 500 mA electrom. compatib standard EMC - UNI CEI 70011
current absorbed at 24 V 250 mA certificate Nr. 0123/02
coMPoNeNTs For iNDiViDUAL orDeriNG
(01) Flat electromagnet
300 kg withholding force, 12/24 V DC for glazed doors
includes: anchor and attachment plate
(02) Unlock button
(art. GW 20 523)
(03) Card-based control system
(art. 55611 + 55613 + 55615)
(01) Electromagnet (02) Unlock button
with timer
includes: Badge reader, control unit, flat cable, external
230 V AC/15 V AC transformer, three blank badges and
one simple coded magnetic badge
(03) Card-based control system
233

236. Door-holding systems
For fire rated glazed doors
Accessories
c2 MoNo-ZoNe MicroProcessor
glazed doors
24
0
Certified in accordance with EN 1154-2 and EN 1154-4
standards.
The processor was designed and built in conformity with
UNI EN 1154 standards, which regulate processors for fire
150
alarms and related accessories which each must conform
with EN1154 standards.
Technical data 48
model 52002
primary power supply 230 dc, 100 mA, 50-60Hz This is a control unit which administers the door-holding electromagnets for fire
auxiliary power supply 2 batterie 12 Vcc/1,1 ÷ 1,3 Ah doors, where standards require consideration of every possible and imponder-
able event that could happen during normal functioning. The following, there-
minimum output current 264 mA
fore, are subject to constant monitoring: all exits towards the smoke and heat
maximum output current 424 mA detectors, the alarm and reset buttons, the external siren and the charge of the
buffer battery charger output 24 Vcc (27,6 Vcc) two batteries. The microprocessor itself, which functions as the brain of the
system, is constantly monitored at regular intervals by a specific system routine
protection rating IP30 that checks for proper functioning of the operational software. Any hitches,
operational temperature -5°C ÷ +40°C breakdowns or malfunctions are signaled by one of the ten LED diodes on the
operational zones single zone (mono-zone) front panel, and the internal buzzer provides an additional acoustic signal for
specific cases. Alarm or breakdown situations can then be reset at three differ-
acoustic alarm internal buzzer ent levels depending on the seriousness of the event: by a button located near
"low battery" signal intermittent internal buzzer the microprocessor, by a first button on the front of the microprocessor unit and
EC certification by a second button on the same panel that requires key selector activation (key
0051-CPD-0264
in possession of the safety manager). A fourth reset level is then supplied for
conformity with standards EN 1154-2 +A1:2006 the circuit only (operation executable by authorized technical personnel only).
EN 1154-4:1997 + A1:2002 + A1:2006
ATTENTION MANAGES
According to standard EN 1154-4, it is obligatory for the mono-zone - max. Nr. 5 RFC heat/smoke detectors
processor to be equipped with: - max. Nr. 5 alarm activation buttons
- Nr. 1 heat/smoke detector RFC certif. EN 1154-7 - max. Nr. 2 electronic sirens
- Nr. 1 pair of buffer batteries - Nr. 4 EM or EMP electromagnets
- Nr. 1 external electronic siren certif. EN 1154-3 - Nr. 2 buffer batteries
- Nr. 1 alarm activation button certif. EN 1154/11
rFc HeAT AND sMoKe DeTecTor
Certified in accordance with UNI EN 1154-5 and EN 1154-7 Ø110
standards.
RFC heat and smoke detector characterized by white ABS
casing. Optical/thermic operation with intervention tem-
perature to be set between 54 and 65°C. To ensure proper
functioning, the detectors must be subjected to regular
6-month maintenance checks. Please note that it is inad-
54
visable to position the sensor where strong air currents
are present.
Technical data Technical data
operational voltage 10 ÷ 30 Vcc, tipico 24 Vcc operational temperature -40°C ÷ +60°C
consumption at rest, at 24 V DC 70 µA conformity with EN 1154-5, EN 1154-7
absorption of alarm at 24 V DC 50 mA
BUFFer BATTeries
Pair of rechargeable buffer batteries, 12 V DC/1.2 Ah
NOTE
All DOOR-HOLDING SYSTEMS are supplied in separate packaging and
require on-site assembly.
234

237. Door-holding systems
For fire rated glazed doors
Accessories
eLecTroNic sireN
glazed doors
With 28 or 32 selectable to-
Includes a volume control function for installation in inter- nes and a second tone for
nal and external environments. The connection is made us- two-phase alarms.
ing double clamps (6) for branching.
Dimensions:
Technical data Ø 91 x 91mm.
power supply 9 ÷ 28 Vcc
absorption by alarm at 12 V DC 8 mA
absorption by alarm at 24 V DC 16 mA
protection rating IP65
operational temperature -25°C ÷ +70°C
conformity with standard EN 1154-3
ALArM AcTiVATioN BUTToN In red color ABS with a
Pressure on the plastic front plate activates the electrical weight of 110 gr.
contact. Re-arming of the contact is executed manually us-
ing a key (provided). Dimensions:
99 x 95 x 43mm.
Technical data
power supply max. 30 Vcc
protection rating IP41
operational temperature max. +65°C
internal exchange contact n.o./n.c.
conformity with standard EN 1154-11
eM eLecTroMAGNeT 75 53
65
35
90
65
Technical data
power supply 24 Vcc
absorption 60 mA
minimum withstand force 55 Kg.
EC certification 0407-CPD-011 (IG-098-2004) /02
EM wall electromagnet with white plastic casing, complete
conformity with standard EN 1155
with unlock button. Anchor consisting of a nickel-plated plate
and a jointed baseboard.
eMP eLecTroMAGNeT 70 53
65
65
114
104
Technical data
power supply 24 Vcc
absorption 60 mA
EMP floor electromagnet, consisting of a galvanized metal core
with an unlock button and a fastener plate. Anchor consisting of minimum withstand force 55 Kg.
a nickel-plated plate and jointed baseboard. EC certification 0407-CPD-011 (IG-098-2004)
conformity with standard EN 1155
NOTE
All DOOR-HOLDING SYSTEMS are supplied in separate packaging and
require on-site assembly.
235

238. EXUS
236

239. Presentation
EXUS® panic bars
PRESENTATION
EXUS
EXUS® panic bars
Ninz S.p.A. is a leader in fire doors and has once again With the new EXUS® panic exit device, NINZ S.p.A.
reasserted itself as a visionary company with a strong demonstrates its willingness to believe in market
identity created by its continuous research into the development by investing in designs and company
design and technology of its own products, such as image in order to endow its own products with
the new line of EXUS® panic bars. added value while maintaining highly competitive
EXUS® panic bars are marked in accordance with quality-price ratios.
European standard EN 1125:2008, which entered in ef-
fect January 01, 2010, and which prescribes a several
substantial changes that further extend the require-
ments for maximum safety and ease of opening.
The KIT designed for your needs
When ordered separately from the door, the EXUS® series
of panic bars is provided in elegant and functional KITs
packaged for presentation in the most appropriate for-
mat for distribution.
Packaging in KITs ensures customers, installers and there-
fore the final users that they are receiving a complete
anti-panic system with fully corresponding parts that are Stainless steel handle
all certified.
Finishing
Attention to detail and proportions are highlighted by se-
lect materials and finishing.
In addition to the black NYLON version combined with
anodized ALUMINUM bars, new combinations include
the all satinized STAINLESS STEEL version and the pol-
ished chromed ALUMINUM version combined with the
anodized ALUMINUM bar. Many other color and surface
combinations are possible for equally aesthetic solutions.
The particular aesthetics of soft forms is one of the ex-
clusive advantages of EXUS® panic bars, representing the
fruit of designs generated in collaboration with Studio
MM Design, which has been working with the company
for many years.
Certifications and replacements
Given the importance of maintaining the entire system’s
conformity, a special focus has been put on replace-
ment parts, which have been subjected to testing in ac-
cordance with the EN 1125:2008 standard due to their
pivotal role in maintaining certification.
The only way to ensure that the products maintain their
original characteristics over time is by using original
NINZ replacement parts.
For this reason, the instructions for EXUS® panic bars in-
clude additional indications regarding proper installation
and maintenance plus a explosion assembly drawing that
specifies every smallest detail of the certified system with all
of the references required for ordering replacement parts.
237

240. EXUS® - Features, certifications
Panic bar
FeATUres
eXUs®
-- Newly designed product with a state-of-the-art tech-
nological concept
-- Available in different color and surface combinations:
satinized stainless steel for the lever arms and the bar,
or aluminum with polished chrome lever arms and
anodized aluminum bar, and finally the classic combi-
nation that never goes out of style - black nylon lever
arms with anodized aluminum bar
-- Certified for internal locks with 40 mm entrances for
single leaves or active leaves, with 30 mm entrances for
secondary leaves and with up to 45° spindle rotation EXUS® is a registered trademark owned by Ninz S.p.A.
-- Locking by key possible on the bar side as well
-- Reversible for Right or Left mounting
-- Protrusion 125 mm Also suited for doors with classifications up to:
-- Proposed together with the door or separately in a
REI 30 REI 60 REI 90
complete KIT packaged in a black/yellow box
-- Label applied to the packaging to identify the prod-
uct‘s characteristics
-- Wide range of variations to personalize: colored bar,
special encrypted or mastered cylinders
40
200
95
125 38
max. 1237
cerTiFicATioN
Suited for one-leaved doors or the active and secondary
leaves of two-leaved doors with dimensions up to 1350 x
2880 mm/leaf, masses of 300 kg/leaf.
Denomination EXUS PANIC EXIT DEVICE
Manufacturer Ninz S.p.A. Corso Trento, 2/A
I-38061 ALA (TN)/ITALIA
Year application trademark 08
Nr. and year of the standard EN 1125:2008
Certifying body 0425
CE certificate Nr. 1228-CPD-2007
Classification 377B1321AA
1st Category of use very frequent
2nd Durability 200.000 cycles
3rd Door mass over 200 kg
4th Suitable for fire/smoke rated doors
5th Safety, suitable for evacuation routes
6th High corrosion resistance 96 h
7th Material safety 1000 N
8th Bar protrusion up to 150 mm
9th Activation type with push bar
10th Suitable for one- or two-leaved doors
238

241. EXUS® LP BLACK NYLON
Panic bar for internal locks - EN 1125:2008
EXUS® LP IN BLACK NYLON EXUS LP (SUPPLIED WITH THE DOOR)
EXUS®
For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf)
of two-leaved doors:
Included (mounted on the door): panic lock and strike plate insert
Included (supplied in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2
black nylon cover plates, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized
aluminum bar, Nr. 1 stainless steel external door furniture, Nr. 1 half-
cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 double cylinder with 3 keys (DC version
only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow),
Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions
Versions available: BM, DC BM, DC ELM, ELM
Description ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages
The EXUS LP panic exit device consists of an anodized alumi-
num horizontal bar that inserts into the lever arms attached For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors:
to the command mechanisms which activate the lock. Included (mounted on the door): panic lock, upper re-latch device,
upper strike plate and vertical rods
-- Reversible for right or left opening Included (supplied in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2
-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors black nylon cover plates, Nr. 2 black nylon lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized
-- The horizontal bar is made of extruded anodized alu- aluminum bar, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm,
minum with an elliptical cross-section measuring 40 x Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1
20 mm and a length of 1150 mm set of installation/maintenance instructions
-- Two black nylon lever arms with galvanized steel core Versions available: A
-- The two command mechanisms are made of galva-
nized steel with black nylon cover plates, one of which
has an EXIT label that identifies the lock side Variations on request (see dedicated page)
-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cylinders -- Aluminum bar painted in RAL colors
-- Stainless steel external door furniture (handle and rosette) -- Mastered or coded cylinders
-- DC version with double cylinder to pass -- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the
door is open
VERSIONS AVAILABLE NOTE
EXUS LP DC ELM and ELM versions not available for REI 90 and REI
120 glazed doors.
BM A DC BM
DC ELM ELM
239

242. EXUS® LA ALUMINUM
Panic bar for internal locks - EN 1125:2008
EXUS® LA IN ALUMINUM EXUS® LA (SUPPLIED WITH THE DOOR)
EXUS®
For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf)
of two-leaved doors:
Included (mounted on the door): panic lock and strike plate insert
Included (supplied in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2
polished chrome aluminum cover plates, Nr. 2 polished chrome alumi-
num lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 stainless steel
external door furniture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 double
cylinder with 3 keys (DC version only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1
adhesive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/mainte-
nance instructions
Description Versions available: BM, DC BM, DC ELM, ELM
The entire EXUS LA panic bar is made of stainless steel, ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages
and consists of a horizontal bar that inserts into lever
arms attached to the command mechanisms which acti- For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors
vate the lock. Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock, upper re-latch
device, upper strike plate and vertical rods
-- Reversible for right or left opening Included (supplied in the package): Nr. 2 command mechanisms, Nr. 2
-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors polished chrome aluminum cover plates, Nr. 2 polished chrome alumi-
-- The horizontal bar is made of extruded anodized alu- num lever arms, Nr. 1 anodized aluminum bar, Nr. 1 floor-mounted
minum with an elliptical cross-section measuring 40 x floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhe-
20 mm and a length of 1150 mm sive pictogram (green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance in-
-- The two lever arms are made of an aluminum alloy structions
with a polished chrome finish Versions available: A
-- The two command mechanisms are made of galva-
nized steel with aluminum alloy cover plates with a
polished chrome finish, one of which has an EXIT label Variations on request (see dedicated page)
to identify the lock side
-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cylinders -- Aluminum bar painted in RAL colors
-- Stainless steel door furnitures (handle and rosette) -- Mastered or coded cylinders
-- The arms, carters and backplates are finished with tri- -- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the
valent chrome in compliance with the ROSH regulation door is open
-- DC version with double cylinder to pass
NOTE
VERSIONS AVAILABLE EXUS LA DC ELM and ELM versions not available for REI 90 and REI
120 glazed doors.
BM A DC BM
DC ELM ELM
240

243. EXUS® LX STAINLESS STEEL
Panic bar for internal locks - EN 1125:2008
EXUS® LX IN STAINLESS STEEL EXUS LX (SUPPLIED WITH THE DOOR)
EXUS®
For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf)
of two-leaved doors:
Included (mounted on the door): panic lock and strike plate insert
Included (supplied in the package): Nr. 2 stainless steel command
mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel cover plates, Nr. 2 stainless steel lever
arms, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar, Nr. 1 stainless steel external door furni-
ture, Nr. 1 half-cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 double cylinder with 3 keys
(DC version only), Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram
(green arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions
Versions available: BM, DC BM, DC ELM, ELM
Description ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages
The entire EXUS LX panic exit device is made of stainless
steel, and consists of a horizontal bar that inserts into the For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors
lever arms attached to the command mechanisms which Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock, upper re-latch
activate the lock. device, upper strike plate and vertical rods
Included (supplied in the package): Nr. 2 stainless steel command
-- Maximum corrosion resistance and noteworthy ro- mechanisms, Nr. 2 stainless steel cover plates, Nr. 2 stainless steel lever
bustness of the entire set arms, Nr. 1 stainless steel bar, Nr. 1 floor-mounted floor catch, Nr. 1
-- Optimal aesthetic appearance companion arm, Nr. 1 drilling template, Nr. 1 adhesive pictogram (green
-- Reversible for right or left opening arrow), Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions
-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors Versions available: A
-- The horizontal bar is made of AISI 304 satinized stain-
less steel with an elliptical cross-section measuring 40
Variations on request (see dedicated page)
x 20 mm, length of 1150 mm
-- The two lever arms are made of AISI 304 satinized
-- Mastered or coded cylinders
stainless steel
-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the
-- The two command mechanisms are made of AISI 304
door is open
stainless steel
-- The two backplates and the cover caps are made of
AISI 304 satinized stainless steel, and one is labeled
with EXIT to identify the lock side NOTE
-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cylinders EXUS LX DC ELM and ELM versions not available for REI 90 and REI
-- External door furnitures in stainless steel 120 glazed doors.
-- DC version with double cylinder (feed-through)
VERSIONS AVAILABLE
BM A DC BM
DC ELM ELM
241

244. Touchbar CISA SBLOCK
Panic bar for internal locks - EN 1125:2008
Accessories
TOUCHBAR TOUCHBAR SUPPLIED TOGETHER WITH THE DOOR
glazed doors
For single leaves or the active leaf (main leaf)
of two-leaved doors:
Included (mounted on the door): panic lock and strike plate insert
Included (supplied in the package): Nr. 1 TB panic bar set, Nr. 1 half-
cylinder with 3 keys, Nr. 1 set of installation/maintenance instructions
Versions available: BM, ELM
ELM electric handle: see the dedicated pages
For the secondary leaf of two-leaved doors
Included (mounted on the door): anti-panic safety lock, upper re-latch
Description device, upper strike plate and vertical rods
-- Harmony of dimensions, lines and weight thanks to Included (supplied in the package): Nr. 1 TB panic bar set, Nr. 1 floor-
precise design research makes Touchbar adaptable to mounted floor catch, Nr. 1 companion arm, Nr. 1 set of installation/
any environment maintenance instructions
-- Clean line with no protrusions, with lowered bar Versions available: A
-- Clever manufacturing makes Touchbar installation sim-
ple and rapid on wood, iron and aluminum doors in com-
bination with panic latches for series 43000 insertion DIMENSIONS/ENCUMBRANCES
-- Touchbar made of quality materials and operational
33,5
mechanisms to ensure efficiency and duration over
time
50
Technical characteristics 74 32,5
--
38,5
Reversible for right or left opening 25
-- For application to single leaf and two-leaved doors
144,5
-- Painted aluminum/aluminum alloy carters
30
43
90
-- Painted aluminum bar that can be shortened down to
300 mm on any model
16,5
-- Galvanized steel internal components suited for fire L - 42
doors L
-- The lock is anti-panic/fire rated for Euro profile cyl-
inders
Operation in standard configuration Variations on request (see dedicated page)
-- From the inside: pressing the bar; from the outside: by
key and/or handle
-- Microswitch and cable sleeve for signaling when the
door is open
Standard finishing
-- BLACK carter, RED bar
-- Stainless steel door furnitures
VERSIONS AVAILABLE
BM A ELM
242

245. Notices
For NINZ glazed fire doors
Accessories
ATTENTION
glazed doors
Glazed doors and windows are required for internal compartmentali- Recommendations regarding the STORAGE of fire rated
zation and should be installed in areas that are protected from direct glazed panes.
exposure to sunlight, other heat sources and atmospheric agents. If Fire rated glazed panes need to be stored in a vertical position (maxi-
these products are used in locations exposed to direct sunlight, special mum deviation of 6° from vertical) as reported in the “REI Product
paints must be used for this environment, and in such cases it is recom- Handling” form. The utilization of standard glassmaker racks is optimal
mended to consult with our technical division. for this purpose because of how they allow for proper weight distribu-
tion of the glazed pane and proper contact with the pane surface itself.
Fire rated glass is sensitive to temperature, to water (humidity) and to Improper storage of fire rated glazed panes may create significant
the UV rays of solar radiation or particular forms of internal lighting. deformities in the panes (inflection or curvature). These types of de-
formations are irreversible. If improper efforts are made to reverse the
Recommendations regarding the AMBIENT TEMPERATURE of deformations, the glazed panes could break irreparably. Please contact
the installation area. us to avoid unpleasant inconveniences for which we cannot be held
The glass remains stable in a temperature range of -40°C +50°C. responsible.
Whenever the temperature of the glazed pane exceeds +50°C, the so-
dium silicate understands such temperatures as fire-related and begins Recommendations regarding the HANDLING of fire rated
developing an irreversible opaqueness. Please contact us should the glazed panes.
glazed pane ever exhibit any degree of opaqueness. The production of fire rated glass involves the stratification of extra-
The presence of an internal ventilation or air conditioning system could clear float glass with sodium silicate. The limited mechanical strength
benefit the installation of fire rated glazed panes. First, however, it is of float glass makes it necessary to store the glass in a vertical posi-
necessary to verify the specific ambient conditions with our technical tion and never in a horizontal position. In the horizontal position, the
division. Please do not hesitate to contact us in this regard. load generated by the weight of the glass itself can cause the panes
to break. Should one of the panes of the multi-layer glass break, the
Recommendations regarding the presence of WATER or HU- fire-resistance capacity and safety performance of the glass is not nec-
MIDITY in the area of installation. essarily compromised.
The sodium silicate found in fire rated glass is water-soluble. If water Panes of fire rated glass should never be rotated using one of their
gets inside the glass frame, or even in the presence of high levels of corners as a pivot point. Vertically-stored panels may at times need
atmospheric humidity, therefore, the sodium silicate liquefies and cre- to be rotated by 90°. The considerable weight of large pieces of glass
ates unsightly bubbles around the edges or even inside the glass, and could induce workers to rotate such panels by pivoting the pane with
these bubbles can increase in size over time. The fire rated properties only one corner touching the ground. The concentration of the pane’s
of sodium silicate are nullified when it dissolves in water. For this rea- weight on a single corner could very well cause the glass to break.
son, it is essential to take good care of the tape that seals the entire Fire rated glass may be handled using the normal suction pads used
edge of the glass. This function of this tape is to keep water vapor out. by glassmakers.
Improper handling or usage that causes tears in the perimetral tape
can create pathways through which water or humidity could attack the
sodium silicate. Please contact us should any tears in the perimetral Installation should only be executed by qualified technicians.
tape be detected during storage or installation. The installation instructions indicate the only allowable
modifications.
Recommendations regarding the presence of UV RAYS in the Original NINZ replacement parts must be used for all repair
installation area. work.
The sodium silicate found within the layers of fire rated glass is sen- The bearing capacity of the walls and crossbeams involved
sitive to the UV rays of solar radiation and certain types of internal needs to be verified due to the considerable weight of glazed
lighting. When the glass is exposed to sources of UV radiation, the doors.
sodium silicate polymerizes irreversibly and creates unsightly bubbles.
At first the bubbles are only the size of the tip of a pin. With continued Ninz reserves the right to make unannounced technical
exposure, however, their size increases over time. Please consult the changes to any of the contents of this entire form. All meas-
instructions contained in the “REI Product Handling” form. urements are in mm.
For this reason it is fundamental for the order form to indicate when
fire rated glass is for EXTERNAL USE (exposure to the UV rays of solar Ninz reserves the right to modify the product. For any ad-
radiation) or for use in the presence of UV-generating lamps. ditional clarifications, our technical division is available with
Improper storage of the material (at the work-site, for example) could special forms to fill out to stylize your order or request es-
also result in the emergence of unsightly bubbles over time. Therefore timates.
we invite you to follow with scrupulous attention the instructions con-
tained in the “REI Product Handling” form. Reproduction (partial or total) requires prior authorization
by Ninz. All rights reserved.
243

246. EDITION 01/2011
5002009/2 - C10
date of print: 01.12.2010
Ninz S.p.A. | Corso Trento 2/A | I-38061 Ala (TN)
Tel. +39 0464 678 300 | Fax +39 0464 679 025
info@ninz.it | www.ninz.it